61200780L1 1C ATLAS 830 890 User Manual

ATLAS_830__890_User_.. ATLAS_830__890_User_Manual

ATLAS 800 Series Module QUAD E1 ATLAS_830__890_User_Manual

User Manual: ATLAS 830 - 890 User Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 381

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

ATLAS 800 SERIES
System Manual

61200780L1-1C
August 2004

1200780L1

ATLAS 830 System, AC

1200781L1

ATLAS 830 System, DC

1200321L1

ATLAS 890 System

1200322L1

ATLAS 890 System Controller Module

1200185L3

Quad T1/PRI Option Module

1200264L1

Quad E1/PRA Option Module

1200184L1

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module

4200261Lx

Quad USSI Option Module

1200186L2

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module

1200343L1

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module

1200223L1

T3 Option Module

1200225L1

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface

4200773Lx

Dual Video Option Module

1200771L1

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module

1200338L1

Octal FXS Option Module

1200221Lx

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules

1200262L1

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module

1200222L1

HDLC Resource Module

1200181L1

Modem-16 Resource Module

1200782L1

Modem-24 Resource Module

1200182L1

Async-232 Option Module

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Trademarks

Trademarks
Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or
trade names of their respective holders.

To the Holder of the Manual
The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN reserves the right to change
the contents without prior notice. In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or
consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of
issue of this publication.

About this Manual
This manual provides a complete description of the ATLAS 800 Series System and system software. The
purpose of this manual is to provide the technician, system administrator, and manager with general and
specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, and maintenance of the ATLAS 800
Series. This manual is arranged so that needed information can be quickly and easily found.

Viewing Menu information
The ATLAS 800 Series System menus are hierarchical in nature, and information about the menus is
presented in the same succession. Main menus are numbered with submenus following. Also, hyperlinked
menu trees are provided for the first two menu levels.

901 Explorer Boulevard
P.O. Box 140000
Huntsville, AL 35814-4000
Phone: (256) 963-8000
© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

2

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Revision History

Revision History

Document
Revision

Date

Description of Changes

A

Aug 2002

Initial release.

B

Jan 2004

Added Modem-24 Module.
Combined ATLAS 830 and ATLAS 890 into one manual.

C

Aug 2004

Corrections to menu selections.

D
E
F
G

Conventions

Notes provide additional useful information.

Cautions signify information that could prevent service interruption.

Warnings provide information that could prevent damage to the equipment or
endangerment to human life.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

3

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, please follow these basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of
fire, electrical shock, or personal injury:
1. Do not use this product near water, such as a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a
wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless-type) during an electrical storm. There is a remote
risk of shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4. Use only the power cord, power supply, and/or batteries indicated in the manual. Do not dispose of
batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for special disposal instructions.

Save These Important Safety Instructions

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

4

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

FCC-Required Information

FCC-Required Information
Product: ATLAS 830 (1200780L1/1200781L1) and ATLAS 890 (1200321L1)
FCC regulations require the following information be provided in this manual:
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules and requirements adopted by ACTA. Each of
the registered modules has a label showing the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN). If requested, provide this information to the telephone company.
2. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily
discontinue service. If possible, advance notification is given; otherwise, notification is given as
soon as possible. The telephone company will advise the customer of the right to file a complaint
with the FCC.
3. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures
that could affect the proper operation of this equipment. Advance notification and the opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service are given.
4. If experiencing difficulty with this equipment, please contact ADTRAN for repair and warranty
information. The telephone company may require this equipment to be disconnected from the
network until the problem is corrected or it is certain the equipment is not malfunctioning.
5. This unit contains no user-serviceable parts.
6. An FCC compliant telephone cord with a modular plug is provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using an FCC
compatible modular jack, which is compliant with Part 68 and requirements adopted by ACTA.
7. The following information may be required when applying to the local telephone company for
service:

Part Number
1200780L1 /
1200781L1

Registration
Number
US: HDCDENAN1200780L1

Service Type

REN/SOC

1.544 Mbps - SF
1.544 Mbps - SF and B8ZS
1.544 Mbps - ESF
1.544 Mbps - ESF and B8ZS

6.0 N

FIC

USOC

04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN

RJ-48C

RJ-49C

1200185L3

HDCUSA-31934-DE-N

1200771L1

US: HDCDENAN1200346L1

1200186L2

HDCUSA-32227-DE-N

Basic Rate ISDN

6.0 N

02IS5

1200343L1

US: HDCXDNAN1200343L1

ISDN BRI S/T

6.0F

N/A

N/A

8. The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, the sum of the
RENs of all devices should not exceed five. To be certain of the number of devices you may
connect to your line as determined by the REN, call your telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for your calling area.
9. This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection
to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation
commission for information.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

5

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

FCC-Required Information

FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio frequencies. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with Class A FCC limits.

Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

6

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Affadavits

Affadavits
Affidavit Requirements Connection to Digital Services

•

An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company whenever digital terminal equipment
without encoded analog content and billing protection is used to transmit digital signals containing
encoded analog content which are intended for eventual conversion into voiceband analog signal and
transmitted on the network.

•

The affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog content or billing information is being
transmitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog content or billing protection
specifications.

•

End user/customer will be responsible to file an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when
connecting unprotected CPE to a 1.544 Mbps or subrate digital service.

•

Until such time as subrate digital terminal equipment is registered for voice applications, the affidavit
requirements for subrate services are waived.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

7

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Affadavits

Affidavit for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment
to 1.544 Mbps and/or Subrate Digital Services
For the work to be performed in the certified territory of ___________________ (telco name)
State of ________________
County of ________________
I, _______________________ (name), ____________________________________ (business address),
____________________ (telephone number) being duly sworn, state:
( ) I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be connected to 1.544 Mbps and/or
________ subrate digital services. The terminal equipment to be connected complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules except for
the encoded analog content and billing protection specifications. With respect to encoded analog content and billing
protection:
( ) I attest that all operations associated with the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the digital CPE with respect to
analog content and encoded billing protection information continuously complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and
Regulations.
( ) The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content or billing information which is intended
to be decoded within the telecommunications network.
( ) The encoded analog content and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of the customer.
I attest that the operator(s)/maintainer(s) of the digital CPE responsible for the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the
encoded analog content and billing information has (have) been trained to perform these functions by successfully having
completed one of the following (check appropriate blocks):
( )

A.

A training course provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or

( )

B.

A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative, using training materials and instructions
provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or

( )

C.

An independent training course (e.g., trade school or technical institution) recognized by the manufacturer/grantee of
the equipment used to encode analog signals; or

( )

D.

In lieu of the preceding training requirements, the operator(s)/maintainer(s) is (are) under the control of a supervisor
trained in accordance with _________ (circle one) above.

I agree to provide ______________________ (telco’s name) with proper documentation to demonstrate compliance with the
information as provided in the preceding paragraph, if so requested.
_________________________________Signature
_________________________________Title
_________________________________ Date
Transcribed and sworn to before me
This ________ day of _______________, _______
_________________________________
Notary Public
My commission expires:
_________________________________

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

8

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Industry Canada Compliance Information

Industry Canada Compliance Information
Notice: The Industry Canada label applied to the product (identified by the Industry Canada logo or the
“IC:” in front of the certification/registration number) signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is supplied in the
documentation or on the product labeling/markings. The REN assigned to each terminal device indicates
the maximum number of terminals that can be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an
interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the
RENs of all the devices should not exceed five (5).

Canadian Emissions Requirements
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus
as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the
Department of Communications.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux appareils numériques
de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 edictee
par le ministre des Communications.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

9

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Product Warranty

Product Warranty
ADTRAN will repair and return this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published
specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com.

Product Registration
Registering your product helps ensure complete customer satisfaction. Please take time to register your
products on line at www.adtran.com. Click Service and Support on the top of the page, and then click
Product Registration under Support.

Customer Service, Product Support Information, and Training
ADTRAN will repair and return this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published
specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty.
A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN. For service,
RMA requests, training, or more information, use the contact information given below.
Repair and Return

If you determine that a repair is needed, please contact our Customer and Product Service (CaPS)
department to have an RMA number issued. CAPS should also be contacted to obtain information
regarding equipment currently in house or possible fees associated with repair.
CaPS Department

(256) 963-8722

Identify the RMA number clearly on the package (below address), and return to the following address:
ADTRAN Customer and Product Service
901 Explorer Blvd. (East Tower)
Huntsville, Alabama 35806
RMA # _____________

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

10

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Pre-Sales Inquiries and Applications Support

Pre-Sales Inquiries and Applications Support
Your reseller should serve as the first point of contact for support. If additional pre-sales support is needed,
the ADTRAN Support web site provides a variety of support services such as a searchable knowledge
base, latest product documentation, application briefs, case studies, and a link to submit a question to an
Applications Engineer. All of this, and more, is available at:
http://support.adtran.com
When needed, further pre-sales assistance is available by calling our Applications Engineering
Department.
Applications Engineering (800) 615-1176

Post-Sales Support
Your reseller should serve as the first point of contact for support. If additional support is needed, the
ADTRAN Support web site provides a variety of support services such as a searchable knowledge base,
updated firmware releases, latest product documentation, service request ticket generation and
trouble-shooting tools. All of this, and more, is available at:
http://support.adtran.com
When needed, further post-sales assistance is available by calling our Technical Support Center. Please
have your unit serial number available when you call.
Technical Support

(888) 4ADTRAN

Installation and Maintenance Support

The ADTRAN Custom Extended Services (ACES) program offers multiple types and levels of installation
and maintenance services which allow you to choose the kind of assistance you need. This support is
available at:
http://www.adtran.com/aces
For questions, call the ACES Help Desk.
ACES Help Desk

61200780L1-1C

(888) 874-ACES (2237)

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

11

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Training

Training
The Enterprise Network (EN) Technical Training Department offers training on our most popular products.
These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of
ADTRAN's product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training
and courses taught at our facilities or at your site. For more information about training, please contact your
Territory Manager or the Enterprise Training Coordinator.

61200780L1-1C

Training Phone

(800) 615-1176, ext. 7500

Training Fax

(256) 963-6700

Training Email

training@adtran.com

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

12

Table of Contents

Section 1

Engineering Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Assists network designers in incorporating the ATLAS 800 Series System into
existing networks. Includes pinouts.

Section 2

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Provides managers with an overview of the ATLAS 800 Series System.

Section 3

Network Turnup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and powering up the ATLAS 800
Series System.

Section 4

User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Provides detailed descriptions of all menu options and configuration parameters for
the ATLAS 800 Series System.

Section 5

Detail Level Procedures (DLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Provides the detailed instruction for performing various unit functions such as
upgrading firmware.

Section 6

System Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Explains System Event Log messages and describes configuration of the Event
Log.

Section 7

ADTRAN Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Provides instructions for configuring and using the ADTRAN utilities (Telnet,
VT100, Syslog, and TFTP).

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

13

SECTION 1

ENGINEERING GUIDELINES
Assists network designers in incorporating the ATLAS 800 Series System into
existing networks. Includes pinouts.

Table of Contents
ATLAS 830 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements (AC System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements (DC System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23
23
23
23

ATLAS 830 Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACO Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRAFT Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23
24
24
24

ATLAS 830 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admin Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10/100BaseT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Relay Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/PRI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27
28
29
29
29
29

ATLAS 830 At-A-Glance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ATLAS 890 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements (AC System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements (DC System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33
33
33
33

ATLAS 890 Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACO Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRAFT Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34
34
35
35

ATLAS 890 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admin In Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10/100BaseT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Relay Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Input Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38
38
39
40
40

ATLAS 890 At-A-Glance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Option Module Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad T1/PRI Option Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad E1/PRA Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Async-232 Option Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Drop and Insert Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal FXS Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43
43
44
45
47
50
50
51
51
52
52
55
56

61200780L1-1C

14

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

List of Pinouts
Pinout 1.
Pinout 2.
Pinout 3.
Pinout 4.
Pinout 5.
Pinout 6.
Pinout 7.
Pinout 8.
Pinout 9.
Pinout 10.
Pinout 11.
Pinout 12.
Pinout 13.
Pinout 14.
Pinout 15.
Pinout 16.
Pinout 17.
Pinout 18.
Pinout 19.
Pinout 20.
Pinout 21.
Pinout 22.
Pinout 23.
Pinout 24.
Pinout 25.
Pinout 26.
Pinout 27.
Pinout 28.
Pinout 29.
Pinout 30.
Pinout 31.
Pinout 32.

ATLAS 830 CRAFT Port (DB-9, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 Admin Port (DB-9, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 Ethernet (RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 Alarm Relay Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 T1/PRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 CRAFT Port (RJ-48C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Admin In (RJ-48C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Ethernet (RJ-48C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Alarm Relay Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 External Relay Monitor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad T1/PRI Module (USOC RJ-48C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad E1/PRA Module (DB-15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad E1/PRA Module (DB-62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Nx 56/64 Module (V.35 Winchester) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Nx 56/64 Module (DB-78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Module (DB-78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Module (EIA-530) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Module (RS-449/V.36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Module (RS-232). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Module (CCITT X.21 V.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI (U-Interface) Module (RJ-45). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI (S/T Interface) Module (RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Async-232 Option Module (DB-25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Module (BNC pair, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Drop and Insert Module (BNC pair, female) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Module (RS-366, DB-25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Module (V.35 Winchester) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Module (EIA-530) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Module (RS-449) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (RJ-48C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (50-pin SCSI-II and V.35 Winchester) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal FXS Module (8-pin modular). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24
28
29
29
30
35
39
39
40
40
43
44
44
45
45
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
54
54
55
55
56

List of Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.

ATLAS 830 Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23
28
34
38

List of Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.

ATLAS 830 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 830 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 LED Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

24
26
30
35
36
41

15

1.

ATLAS 830 DESCRIPTION

Equipment Dimensions
The ATLAS 830 is 17.5” W, 12.5” D, and 5.5” H and is equipped for table top use or for mounting in a
19-inch rack (mounting brackets are included in the shipment). All option modules fit inside the unit.

Power Requirements (AC System)
Regardless of the option modules configuration installed in the unit, the ATLAS 830 AC system has a
maximum power consumption of 200 W and a maximum current draw of 3.5 A. With no option modules
installed, the AC-powered ATLAS 830 has a power consumption of 50 W and a current draw of 0.64 A,
maximum at 115 Vrms.

Power Requirements (DC System)
Regardless of the option modules configuration installed in the unit, the ATLAS 830 DC system has a
maximum power consumption of 200 W and a maximum current draw of 4.2 A at -48 VDC. With no
option modules installed, the DC-powered ATLAS 830 has a power consumption of 45 W at -48 VDC.

2.

ATLAS 830 FRONT PANEL

The ATLAS 830 front panel contains the Alarm Cut-off (ACO) switch, the CRAFT port, and status LEDs
for the system (POWER, SYSTEM, ETHERNET, and REMOTE), network (NETWORK), and option module (MODULE). Figure 1 locates these features and Table 1 on page 17 further describes their functions.

Network LEDs
(Slot 0, Ports 1&2)

CRAFT port

NETWORK

1

2
OK

OK

SYSTEM

TEST

TEST

ERROR

ERROR

ONLINE

ALARM

ALARM

TEST

CRAFT

REMOTE

System
LEDs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

STATUS
ACO

ETHERNET

ATLAS 830

MODULES

POWER

ACO
Switch

Module Status LEDs
Figure 1. ATLAS 830 Front Panel Layout

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

16

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 Front Panel

ACO Switch
The ACO switch clears the Alarm Relay (located on the rear panel) after an alarm condition has occurred.
If an alarm condition is corrected and then reoccurs, the Alarm Relay activates again.

CRAFT Port
Use the CRAFT port (see Pinout 1) to configure the system via an EIA-232 connection.
Pinout 1. ATLAS 830 CRAFT Port (DB-9, female)
Pin

Name

Description

1

DCD

Data Carrier Detect (output)—not connected

2

RD

Receive Data (output)

3

TD

Transmit Data (input)

4

DTR

Data Terminal Ready (input)—not connected

5

SG

Signal Ground

6

DSR

Data Set Ready (output)—not connected

7

RTS

Request to Send (input)—not connected

8

CTS

Clear to Send (output)— not connected

9

RI

Ring Indicate (output)—not connected

Front Panel LEDs
With the ATLAS 830 powered-up, the front panel LEDs provide visual information about the status of the
ATLAS 830 and any option modules that may be installed. Table 1 describes the purpose of the front panel
LEDs, and Table 2 on page 19 provides information about the meaning of the LED colors.
Table 1. ATLAS 830 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose
LED
System

Purpose

Displays the status of the power supply, controller, and other system
parameters for the ATLAS 830 (see Table 2 on page 19).

Power

Indicates the status of the power supply.

System

Indicates the status of the unit controller and other system parameters.

Ethernet

Indicates the status of the Ethernet port.

Remote

Indicates whether a user (Telnet or VT100) is logged into the unit.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

17

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 Front Panel

Table 1. ATLAS 830 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose (Continued)
LED
Network

Purpose

Displays the status of the two built-in T1/PRI interfaces on the rear panel
of the unit. (These are referred to in the menus as Slot 0, Ports 1 and 2.)

OK

Indicates that the network interface has passed self-test and is operating
correctly.

Test

Indicates that there is an active test on the T1/PRI interface.

Error

Blinks to indicate the occurrence of error events such as clock slip
seconds (CSS), bipolar violations (BPV), errored seconds (ES), etc.

Alarm

Indicates an active alarm condition on the T1/PRI interface.

ACO

Indicates the status of the ACO switch.

Modules

Displays by row the operational condition of each module installed in the
option slots. All LEDs will be off if no option module is installed or
configured.

Status

Indicates the operational condition of modules installed in the option
slots.

Online

Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use. If
the module is manually taken offline, this LED is turned off.

Test

Indicates that one or more ports within a module are in test.

ACO

Clears the Alarm Relay connection located on the rear panel of the
ATLAS 830.

CRAFT

Allows the ATLAS 830 to connect to a computer using a VT100 terminal
or terminal emulator.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

18

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 Front Panel

Table 2. ATLAS 830 LED Descriptions
For these LEDs...

This color light...

Indicates that...

Red (solid)

Power supply error condition or temperature alarm.

Green

The unit is on and connected to a power source.

Off

The unit is off.

Green (solid)

No diagnosed system faults were found.

Green (fast blink)

System Controller is offline.

Yellow (fast blink)

Flash download is in progress.

Yellow (solid)

Self-test in progress.

Red (solid)

Internal error condition.

Red (fast blink)

Flash download or flash error condition.

Off

Power is not currently supplied to the system or the
power switch is in the off position.

Green

Link has been established.

Off

Link has not been established.

Yellow

A user is logged into the unit via Telnet or VT100.

Off

No users are logged into the unit.

Yellow

ACO switch is depressed.

Off

ACO switch is not depressed.

Green (solid)

The network T1/PRI interface is operating normally with
error-free operation.

Off

The interface has experienced an alarm.

TEST

Yellow (solid)

The T1/PRI interface is in a test mode.

ERROR

Red (blinking)

Blinks with the occurrence of an error event including
BPV, CRC, and ES.

ALARM

Red (solid)

The T1/PRI interface is experiencing an alarm such as
loss of frame (LOF), loss of signal (LOS), etc.

System

Power

System

Ethernet

Remote

ACO

Network

OK

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

19

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 Rear Panel

Table 2. ATLAS 830 LED Descriptions (Continued)
For these LEDs...

This color light...

Indicates that...

Green (solid)

Module is present.

Green (fast blink)

Module has been manually taken offline by the user.

Red (solid)

Module is in an alarm state.

Red (fast blink)

Module has no response, has been removed, or is not
supported.

Red (slow blink)

Module is not ready.

None

No module occupies the slot.

Green (solid)

Module has an active connection.

Green (fast blink)

Module has invalid flash memory or is downloading
firmware.

Yellow (solid)

Module is in a test mode.

Modules

Status

Online

Test

3.

ATLAS 830 REAR PANEL

The ATLAS 830 rear panel (see Figure 2) contains an ADMIN port for connecting to a VT100 terminal (or
terminal emulator) or modem, a 10/100BaseT interface for ETHERNET access, ALARM contacts, two
built-in T1/PRI network interfaces (NTWK1 and NTWK2) and eight slots for housing option modules
which provide a variety of additional resources and data ports. All slots are functionally identical. An
optional redundant power supply may be installed in slots 7 and 8. In addition, the ON/OFF switch and
POWER SUPPLY are located on the rear panel.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

20

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ADMIN Ethernet
Port
Port

ATLAS 830 Rear Panel

T1/PRI
Interfaces

Alarm
Contacts

Slot 1

Slot 5

Slot 2

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 7

Slot 4

Slot 8

Option Module Slots

Power On/Off
Switch

Power Supply

Figure 2. ATLAS 830 Rear Panel

Admin Port
The ADMIN port (EIA-232, see Pinout 2 on page 21) connects to a computer or modem and provides the
following functions:
•
•
•
•

Accepts EIA-232 input from a PC or a modem for controlling the ATLAS 830.
Operates at 2400, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps.
Acts as input for either VT100 or PC control.
Acts as an interface for flash memory software downloads using XMODEM.

Pinout 2. ATLAS 830 Admin Port (DB-9, female)
Pin

Name

Description

Pin

Name

Description

1

DCD

Data Carrier Detect (output)

6

DSR

Data Set Ready (output
— not connected

2

RD

Receive Data (output)

7

RTS

Request to Send (input)

3

TD

Transmit Data (input)

8

CTS

Clear to Send (output)

4

DTR

Data Terminal Ready (input)

9

RI

Ring Indicate (output)
— not connected

5

SG

Signal Ground

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

21

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 Rear Panel

10/100BaseT Connection
The 10/100BaseT port (RJ-45) provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN connection, which is used for IP
Routing, TFTP, SNMP, and Telnet connections (see Pinout 3).
Pinout 3. ATLAS 830 Ethernet (RJ-45)
Pin

Name

Description

1

TX1

Transmit Positive

2

TX2

Transmit Negative

3

RX1

Receive Positive

4, 5

Unused

—

6

RX2

Receive Negative

7, 8

Unused

—

Alarm Relay Connection
This connection alerts the user when a pre-selected alarm condition exists (see Pinout 4). The four-pin,
removable terminal block connects with external wiring. Refer to DLP-11, Connecting the Alarm
Contacts, on page 344 for detailed instructions. Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch
located on the front panel of the ATLAS 830.
Pinout 4. ATLAS 830 Alarm Relay Connector
Pin

Name

Description

1

NC

Normally closed, but opens when a pre-selected alarm condition is present.

2

NO

Normally open, but closes when a pre-selected alarm condition is present.

3

COM

Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO terminal.

4

GND

The chassis ground.

MON
The MON IN and OUT Bantam test jacks provide a bridged access jack for nonintrusive monitoring of the
incoming T1. When connected to this jack, configure the test equipment for bridged termination.

T1/PRI Connections
Each of the T1/PRI ports, NTWK1 and NTWK2, uses a single eight-position modular jack to connect to the
T1 or PRI circuit. Pinout 5 shows the pinout for this connector.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

22

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 At-A-Glance Specifications

Pinout 5. ATLAS 830 T1/PRI
Pin

Name

1

RxData-Ring

(R)

Receive data from the network

2

RxData-Tip

(T)

Receive data from the network

3

Unused

4

TxData-Ring

(R1)

Send data towards the network

5

TxData-Tip

(T1)

Send data towards the network

6,7,8

4.

Description

—

Unused

—

ATLAS 830 AT-A-GLANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Table 3 lists the specifications for the ATLAS 830 system.
Table 3. ATLAS 830 Specifications
Application

Feature

Specification

Operating Specifications

Temperature

Operation: 0°C to 45°C
Storage: -40°C to 70°C

Relative Humidity

To 95% noncondensing

TDM bandwidth

46 Mbps Full duplex

Dedicated map connections

766 dedicated DS0 map connections in each
of the 5 maps

TDM Applications

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

23

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 At-A-Glance Specifications

Table 3. ATLAS 830 Specifications (Continued)
Application

Feature

Specification

Switching Applications

61200780L1-1C

ISDN signaling types

National ISDN
Lucent 5E
AT&T 4ESS (PRI Only)
Northern DMS-100 (Nortel Custom)
Euro ISDN

T1 signaling types

Loop-Start
Ground-Start
E&M Wink
E&M Immediate
Feature Group D

DSP Features

DTMF/MF tones support
Progress tone generation
32 available DSP channels
27 simultaneous dial tones

BRI Connections
(recommended)

64 connections

PRI Connections
(recommended)

345 B channels and 15 D channels

RBS T1 Connections
(recommended)

120 DS0 connections

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

24

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 830 At-A-Glance Specifications

Table 3. ATLAS 830 Specifications (Continued)
Application

Feature

Specification

Frame Relay

Packet throughput

7900 pkts/sec (based on 64 byte size
packets)

Management signaling
interfaces

UNI (user and network)
NNI

Management signaling types

ANSI T1.617-D (Annex D)
ITU-T Q.933-A (Annex A)
LMI (Group of four)
Auto

Encapsulation

RFC 1490

PVC support

24 PVCs per packet endpoint (DS0 limited,
24 PVCs for T1).
992 is the limit of PVCs allowed in the unit.

Congestion control

FECN / BECN
Discard eligible (DE)

Quality of service (QOS)

Prioritization on a per-PVC basis

Testing (ADTRAN
proprietary)

PVC loopback
Round trip delay measurement

SNMP support

RFC 1315

Connection support

35 PPP connections to the internal router
(not exceeding 3200 packets per second)

PPP

100 PPP connections to the internal router
(requires HDLC Module and cannot exceed
3200 packets per second)

61200780L1-1C

Authentication support

PAP
CHAP
EAP

Keepalive support

On/Off

Interface support

Numbered interfaces
Unnumbered interfaces

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

25

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Description

Table 3. ATLAS 830 Specifications (Continued)
Application

Feature

Specification

IP Routing

Route discovery

RIP V1
RIP V2
ICMP
ARP
IARP
UDP Relay

SNMP support

RFCs 1315, 1213, 1406
Adtran Enterprise MIB

Algorithm

Voice Compression Module
G.723.1 or Netcoder (proprietary)

Voice Compression

Number of channels supported Up to 64 compression channels

5.

PCM coding

µ-Law

Fax support

9600 bps

DTMF generation and
detection

TIA 464A

ATLAS 890 DESCRIPTION

Equipment Dimensions
The ATLAS 890 base unit is 17.08” W, 11.67” D, and 10.5” H and can be mounted in a 19-inch or 23-inch
rack (mounting brackets are included in the shipment). All other equipment (option modules) fit inside the
base unit.

Power Requirements (AC System)
Regardless of the option modules configuration installed in the base unit, the ATLAS 890 AC system has a
maximum power consumption of 400 W and a maximum current draw of 7 A.

Power Requirements (DC System)
Regardless of the option modules configuration installed in the base unit, the ATLAS 890 DC system has a
maximum power consumption of 325W and a maximum current draw of 8 A at -48 VDC.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

26

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

6.

ATLAS 890 Front Panel

ATLAS 890 FRONT PANEL

The front panel contains the Alarm Cut-off (ACO) switch, the CRAFT port, and the controller and option
modules, and system (fans and alarm) status LEDS. The LEDs provide visual information about the
ATLAS 890 base unit and any option module that may be installed. Figure 3 identifies these features.
Controller LEDs

Option Module LEDs

System LEDs

CRAFT
Port
ACO
Switch

Figure 3. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout

ACO Switch
The ACO switch deactivates (clears) the Alarm Relay, located on the rear panel, after an alarm condition
has occurred. If an alarm condition is corrected and then reoccurs, the Alarm Relay activates again.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

27

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Front Panel

CRAFT Port
Use the CRAFT port (see Pinout 6) to connect to a computer to configure the system via an EIA-232
connection or to connect to a modem.
Pinout 6. ATLAS 890 CRAFT Port (RJ-48C)
Pin

Name

Description

1,2

Unused

—

3

RXDATA

Data received by the ATLAS 890

4

Unused

—

5

TXDATA

Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890

6,7

Unused

—

8

Unused

—

Front Panel LEDs
With the ATLAS 890 powered-up, the front panel LEDs provide visual information about the status of the
unit and any option modules that may be installed. Table 4 describes the purpose of the front panel LEDs,
and Table 5 on page 29 provides information about the meaning of the LED colors.
Table 4. ATLAS 890 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose
LED
System

Purpose

Displays the status of the fans, alarm, and ACO buttons for the
ATLAS 890. (See Table 5 on page 29.)

Fans

Indicates the fans are operational.

Alarm

Indicates a triggered alarm condition for the alarm relays.

ACO

Indicates the alarm cut-off switch is pressed.

Controller Module

Displays the status of the network interface. All LEDs are off if no
network module is installed. (See Table 2 on page 19.)

Status

Indicates the operational condition of the controller installed in the
controller slot.

Online

Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use.

Test

Indicates that the module is in test.

Link

Indicates there is an active 10/100 Ethernet connection on the installed
controller module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

28

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Front Panel

Table 4. ATLAS 890 Front Panel LEDs’ Purpose (Continued)
LED

Purpose

Option Module

Displays by row the operational condition of each module installed in the
option slots. All LEDs will be off if no option module is installed. (See
Table 5 on page 29.)

Status

Indicates the operational condition of modules installed in the option
slots.

Online

Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use. If
the module is manually taken offline, this LED is turned off.

Test

Indicates that one or more ports within a module are in test.

Table 5. ATLAS 890 LED Description
For These Leds...

This Color Light...

Indicates That...

Fans

Red (solid)

Fan speed is too low or fan is disconnected.

Amber (solid)

Fan speed is too high.

Green (solid)

All fans are functioning properly.

Alarm

Red (solid)

A fan, external input, or power supply error has occurred.
LED will remain red until the ACO button is pressed.

ACO

Amber

ACO button is being pressed.

Status

Green (slow blink)

Stand-by controller is present.

Online

Green (solid)

Stand-by controller operational for redundancy.

Red (fast blink)

Controller cannot automatically become the active
controller while the current active controller is installed.

Test

N/A

N/A

Link

Green (solid)

Ethernet link detected.

Stand-by controller

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

29

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Front Panel

Table 5. ATLAS 890 LED Description (Continued)
For These Leds...

This Color Light...

Indicates That...

Green
(slow blink)

Card is not ready.

Green
(fast blink)

Card is not supported.

Green (solid)

Active controller present.

Amber (solid)

Controller is in test mode.

Amber
(fast blink)

Card is upgrading firmware.

Red (fast blink)

Flash parameters are not compatible.

Green (fast blink)

Card is unresponsive or not supported.

Red (fast blink)

Card is not ready.

Test

Amber (solid)

Controller is in test mode.

Link

Green (solid)

Ethernet link detected.

Green (solid)

Module is present.

Green (fast blink)

Module has been manually taken offline by the user.

Red (solid)

Module failed self-test.

Red (fast blink)

Module has no response, has been removed, or is not
supported.

Red (slow blink)

Module is not ready.

None

No module occupies the slot.

Green (solid)

Module has an active connection.

Green (fast blink)

Module has invalid flash memory or is downloading
firmware.

Yellow (solid)

Module is in a test mode.

Active controller
Status

Online

Module Status

Module Online

Module Test

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

30

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

7.

ATLAS 890 Rear Panel

ATLAS 890 REAR PANEL

The ATLAS 890 rear panel contains 16 slots for housing option modules which provide a variety of
additional resources and data ports (see Figure 4). All slots are functionally identical. The ATLAS 890 also
contains two slots for housing controller modules and a single slot dedicated for power supply use only.
The most common configuration is a fully redundant system with two system controllers and two power
supplies. A fully redundant AC-powered ATLAS 890 provides 13 option slots. A fully redundant
DC-powered ATLAS 890 provides 15 option slots.

ADMIN In
Port
Power
Connection
10/100BaseT
Port

Alarm Relay
Outputs
External
Input

Chassis
Ground

Figure 4. ATLAS 890 Rear Panel

Admin In Port
The ADMIN IN port (EIA-232) connects to a computer or modem (see Pinout 7 on page 32). The control
port input provides the following functions:
•
•
•
•

Accepts EIA-232 input from a PC or a modem for controlling the ATLAS 890.
Operates at 2400, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps.
Acts as input for either VT100 or PC control.
Acts as an interface for flash memory software downloads using XMODEM.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

31

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Rear Panel

Pinout 7. ATLAS 890 Admin In (RJ-48C)
Pin

Name

Description

1

GND

Ground—connected to unit chassis

2

RTS

Request to send—low control

3

RxData

Data received by the ATLAS 890

4

DTR

Data terminal ready

5

TxDATA

Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890

6

CD

Carrier detect

7

Unused

—

8

CTS

Clear to send—flow control

10/100BaseT Connection
The 10/100BaseT port (RJ-48C) provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN connection, which is used for IP
Routing, TFTP, SNMP, and Telnet connections (see Pinout 8).

Pinout 8. ATLAS 890 Ethernet (RJ-48C)
Pin

Name

Description

1

Tx1

Transmit Positive

2

Tx2

Transmit Negative

3

Rx1

Receive Positive

4, 5

Unused

—

6

Rx2

Receive Negative

7, 8

Unused

—

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

32

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 Rear Panel

Alarm Relay Connection
This connection alerts the user when a pre-selected alarm condition exists. The four-pin, removable
terminal block connects with external wiring (see Pinout 9). Refer to DLP-12, Connecting to the
ATLAS 890 External Input, for detailed instructions. Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch
located on the front panel of the ATLAS 890.

Pinout 9. ATLAS 890 Alarm Relay Connector
Pin

Name

Description

1

NC

Normally closed, but opens when a preselected alarm condition is present.

2

NO

Normally open, but closes when a preselected alarm condition is present.

3

COM

Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO terminal.

4

GND

Chassis Ground

External Input Connection
This connection alerts the user when a pre-selected external alarm condition exists and could be used, for
example, to monitor a UPS with dry contacts or another ATLAS 890. The three-pin, removable terminal
block connects with external wiring (see Pinout 10). Refer to DLP-12, Connecting to the ATLAS 890
External Input, for detailed instructions. Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch located on
the ATLAS 890 front panel.

Pinout 10. ATLAS 890 External Relay Monitor Connector
Pin

Name

Description

1

Input

Monitors for the presence or absence of -48 VDC

2

Vout

-48 VDC @ 1 mA

3

GND

Chassis Ground

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

33

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

8.

ATLAS 890 At-A-Glance Specifications

ATLAS 890 AT-A-GLANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Table 6 lists the specifications for the ATLAS 890 system.
Table 6. ATLAS 890 Specifications
Application

Feature

Specification

TDM Applications

TDM bandwidth

49 Mbps Full duplex

Dedicated map connections

766 dedicated DS0 map connections in
each of the 5 maps

ISDN signaling types

National ISDN
Lucent 5E
AT&T 4ESS (PRI Only)
Northern DMS-100 (Nortel Custom)
ETSI/DSS1

T1 signaling types

Loop-Start
Ground-Start
E&M Wink
E&M Immediate
Feature Group D

DSP Features

DTMF/MF tones support
Progress tone generation
32 available DSP channels

BRI Connections

128 connections

PRI Connections

766 DS0 connections

RBS T1 Connections

766 DS0 connections
27 simultaneous dial tones

Switching Applications

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

34

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

ATLAS 890 At-A-Glance Specifications

Table 6. ATLAS 890 Specifications (Continued)
Application

Feature

Specification

Frame Relay

Packet throughput

11,700 pkts/sec (64-1500 size packets)

Management signaling
interfaces

UNI (user and network)
NNI

Management signaling types

ANSI T1.617-D (Annex D)
ITU-T Q.933-A (Annex A)
LMI (Group of four)
Auto

Encapsulation

RFC 1490

PVC support

990 PVCs per packet endpoint

Congestion control

FECN / BECN
Discard eligible (DE)

Quality of service (QOS)

Prioritization on a per-PVC basis

Testing (ADTRAN
proprietary)

PVC loopback
Round trip delay measurement

SNMP support

RFC 1315

Connection support

35 PPP connections to the internal router
(not exceeding 11,700 packets per second)

PPP

100 PPP connections to the internal router
(requires HDLC Module and cannot exceed
11,700 packets per second)

61200780L1-1C

Authentication support

PAP
CHAP
EAP

Keepalive support

On/Off

Interface support

Numbered interfaces
Unnumbered interfaces

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

35

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Table 6. ATLAS 890 Specifications (Continued)
Application

Feature

Specification

IP Routing

Route discovery

RIP V1
RIP V2
ICMP
ARP
IARP
UDP Relay

SNMP support

RFCs 1315, 1213, 1406
Adtran Enterprise MIB

Algorithm

Voice Compression Module
G.723.1 or Netcoder (proprietary)

Voice Compression

Number of channels supported Up to 64 compression channels

9.

PCM coding

µ-Law

Fax support

9600 bps

DTMF generation and
detection

TIA 464A

OPTION MODULE PINOUTS

Pinouts for all of the available options modules are included here.

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Each port of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3) uses a single, eight-position modular jack
to connect to the T1 or PRI circuit (see Pinout 11).
Pinout 11. Quad T1/PRI Module (USOC RJ-48C)
Pin

Name

Description

1

RxData-Ring

(R)

Receive data from the network

2

RxData-Tip

(T)

Receive data from the network

3

Unused

—

4

TxData-Ring (R1)

Send data towards the network

5

TxData-Tip

Send data towards the network

6,7,8

Unused

61200780L1-1C

(T1)

—

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

36

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Using the provided adapter cables, the DB-62 port of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)
supplies a DB-15 connection (see Pinout 12). See Pinout 13 for the DB-62 interface pinout.
Pinout 12. Quad E1/PRA Module (DB-15)
Pin

Name

Description

1

RT

Receive Tip

2

GND

Ground

3

TT

Transmit Tip

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

7

GND

Ground

9

RR

Receive Ring

11

TR

Transmit Ring

Pinout 13. Quad E1/PRA Module (DB-62)

1

Pin

Name

Description

Pin

Name

11

P4 TT

2

Description

Port 4 Transmit Tip

42

GND

Ground

P4 TR

Port 4 Transmit Ring

43

P4 RT

Port 4 Receive Tip

3

GND

Ground

44

P4 RR

Port 4 Receive Ring

6

GND

Ground

45

GND

Ground

7

P3 TT

Port 3 Transmit Tip

48

GND

Ground

8

P3 TR

Port 3 Transmit Ring

49

P3 RT

Port 3 Receive Tip

9

GND

Ground

50

P3 RR

Port 3 Receive Ring

12

GND

Ground

51

GND

Ground

13

P2 TT

Port 2 Transmit Tip

54

GND

Ground

14

P2 TR

Port 2 Transmit Ring

55

P2 RT

Port 2 Receive Tip

15

GND

Ground

56

P2 RR

Port 2 Receive Ring

18

GND

Ground

57

GND

Ground

19

P1 TT

Port 1 Transmit Tip

60

GND

Ground

20

P1 TR

Port 1 Transmit Ring

61

P1 RT

Port 1 Receive Tip

21

GND

Ground

62

P1 RR

Port 1 Receive Ring

Pins that are not identified are not used. P(1-4) indicates the Port

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

37

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module
Using the provided adapter cables, each DB-78 port of the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module
(P/N 1200184L1) supplies a V.35 Winchester-style connection (see Pinout 14). Pinout 15 shows the DB-78
interface pinout.
Pinout 14. Quad Nx 56/64 Module (V.35 Winchester)
Pin

CCITT

Description

Pin

CCITT

Description

A

101

Protective ground (PG)

V

115

RX clock (RC-A) to DTE

B

102

Signal ground (SG)

X

115

RX clock (RC-B) to DTE

C

105

Request to send (RTS) from
DTE

P

103

Transmitted data (TD-A) from
DTE

D

106

Clear to send (CTS) to DTE

S

103

Transmitted data (TD-B) from
DTE

E

107

Data set ready (DSR) to DTE

Y

114

TX clock (TC-A) to DTE

F

109

Received line signal detector
(DCD) to DTE

AA

114

TX clock (TC-B) to DTE

H

—

Data terminal ready (DTR)
from DTE

U

113

External TX clock (ETC-A) from
DTE

J

—

Ring indicator (RI)

W

113

External TX clock (ETC-B) from
DTE

R

104

Received data (RD-A) to DTE

NN

—

Test mode (TM) to DTE

T

104

Received data (RD-B) to DTE

Pinout 15. Quad Nx 56/64 Module (DB-78)
Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

11

RXD-A 2/4

42

GND

2

RXD-B 2/4

43-48

Not used

3

RXC-A 2/4

49

MOD2

4

RXC-B 2/4

50

MOD0

5

TXD-A 2/4

51

EXT-TXC-A 1/3

6

TXD-B 2/4

52

DTR-B 1/3

7

TXC-A 2/4

53

DTR-A 1/3

8

TXC-B 2/4

54

DCD-B 1/3

9

EXT-TXC-A 2/4

55

DCD-A 1/3

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

38

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 15. Quad Nx 56/64 Module (DB-78) (Continued)
Pin

1

Signal

Pin

Signal

10

EXT-TXC-A 2/4

56

DSR-B/RI 1/3

11-17

Not used

57

DSR-A 1/3

18

GND

58

CTS-B 1/3

19

GND

59

CTS-A 1/3

20

CHASIS GND

60

CHASIS GND

21

CTS-A 2/4

61

GND

22

CST-B 2/4

62-68

Not used

23

DSR-A 2/4

69

MOD1

24

DSSR-B/RI 2/4

70

EXT-TXC-B 1/3

25

DCD-A 2/4

71

TXC-B 1/3

26

DCD-B 2/4

72

TXC-A 1/3

27

DTR-A 2/4

73

TXD-B 1/3

28

DTR-B 2/4

74

TXD-A 1/3

29-37

Not used

75

RXC-B 1/3

38

RTS-A 1/3

76

RXC-A 1/3

39

RTS-B 1/3

77

RXD-B 1/3

40

RTS-A 2/4

78

RXD-A 1/3

41

RTS-B 2/4

1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the Nx 56/64 Module

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

39

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Quad USSI Option Module
Pinouts 16 through 20 on the following pages describe the available interfaces for the Quad USSI Option
Module (P/N 4200261Lx).
Pinout 16. Quad USSI Module (DB-78)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal
Description

11

RXD-A 2/4

25

DCD-A 2/4

57

DSR-A 1/3

2

RXD-B 2/4

26

DCD-B 2/4

58

CTS-B 1/3

3

RXC-A 2/4

27

DTR-A 2/4

59

CTS-A 1/3

4

RXC-B 2/4

28

DTR-B 2/4

60

CHASIS GND

5

TXD-A 2/4

29-37

Not used

61

GND

6

TXD-B 2/4

38

RTS-A 1/3

62-68

Not used

7

TXC-A 2/4

39

RTS-B 1/3

69

MOD1

8

TXC-B 2/4

40

RTS-A 2/4

70

EXT-TXC-B 1/3

9

EXT-TXC-A 2/4

41

RTS-B 2/4

71

TXC-B 1/3

10

EXT-TXC-A 2/4

43-48

Not used

72

TXC-A 1/3

11-17

Not used

49

MOD2

73

TXD-B 1/3

18

GND

50

MOD0

74

TXD-A 1/3

19

GND

51

EXT-TXC-A 1/3

75

RXC-B 1/3

20

CHASIS GND

52

DTR-B 1/3

76

RXC-A 1/3

21

CTS-A 2/4

53

DTR-A 1/3

77

RXD-B 1/3

22

CST-B 2/4

54

DCD-B 1/3

78

RXD-A 1/3

23

DSR-A 2/4

55

DCD-A 1/3

24

DSSR-B/RI 2/4

56

DSR-B/RI 1/3

1

1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the USSI Module

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

40

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 17. Quad USSI Module (EIA-530)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

10

Carrier Detect (B)

19

Request to Send (B)

2

Transmit Data (A)

11

Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

20

DTE Ready (A)

3

Received Data (A)

12

Transmit Clock (B)

21

Remote Loopback

4

Request to Send (A)

13

Clear to Send (B)

22

DCE Ready (B)

5

Clear to Send (A)

14

Transmit Data (B)

23

DTE Ready (B)

6

DCE Ready (A)

15

Transmit Clock (A)

24

Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

7

Signal Ground

16

Received Data (B)

25

Test Mode

8

Carrier Detect (A)

17

Receive Clock (A)

9

Received Clock (B)

18

Local Loopback

Pinout 18. Quad USSI Module (RS-449/V.36)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

14

Remote Loopback

27

Clear to Send (B)

2

Signaling Rate
Indicator

15

Ring Indicator

28

Terminal in Service

3

Not Used

16

Select Frequency

29

DCE Ready (B)

4

Transmit Data (A)

17

Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

30

DTE Ready (B)

5

Transmit Clock (A)

18

Test Mode

31

Carrier Detect (B)

6

Received Data (A)

19

Signal Ground

32

Select Standby

7

Request to Send (A)

20

Receive Common

33

Signal Quality

8

Receive Clock (A)

21

Not Used

34

New Signal

9

Clear to Send (A)

22

Transmit Data (B)

35

Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

10

Local Loopback

23

Transmit Clock (B)

36

Standby/Indicator

11

DCE Ready (A)

24

Receive Data (B)

37

Send Common

12

DTE Ready (A)

25

Request to Send (B)

13

Carrier Detect (A)

26

Receive Clock (B)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

41

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 19. Quad USSI Module (RS-232)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

14

Sec. Transmit Data

2

Transmit Data

15

DCE Transmit Clock

3

Received Data

16

Sec. Received Data

4

Request to Send

17

Receive Signal Element Timing

5

Clear to Send

18

Not used

6

Data Set Ready

19

Sec. Request to Send

7

Signal Ground

20

Data Terminal Ready

8

Received Line Signal Detector

21

Signal Quality Detector

9

+ Voltage

22

Ring Indicator

10

- Voltage

23

Data Signal Rate Selector

11

Not used

24

DTE Transmit Clock

12

Sec. Received Line Signal Indicator

25

Not used

13

Sec. Clear to Send

Pinout 20. Quad USSI Module (CCITT X.21 V.11)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

8

Signal Ground

2

Transmit Data (A)

9

Transmit Data (B)

3

Request to Send (A)

10

Request to Send (B)

4

Received Data (A)

11

Received Data (B)

5

Carrier Detect (A)

12

Carrier Detect (B)

6

Transmit/Receive Clock (A)

13

Transmit/Received Clock (B)

7

Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

14

Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

15

Not Used

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

42

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Octal BRI ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module
Each port of the Octal BRI ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module (P/N 1200186L2) uses a single RJ-45 jack
to connect to a standard BRI U interface circuit (see Pinout 21).
Pinout 21. Octal BRI (U-Interface) Module (RJ-45)
Pin

Name

Description

1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8

Unused

—

4

Ring

Ring to and from the Network Interface

5

Tip

Tip to and from the Network Interface

Octal BRI ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module
Each port of the Octal BRI ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module uses a single RJ-45 jack to connect to a
standard BRI S/T interface circuit (see Pinout 22). The Octal BRI ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module is
only available for use in NT mode (User Term) applications.
Pinout 22. Octal BRI (S/T Interface) Module (RJ-45)
Pin

Name

Description

1, 2, 7, 8

Unused

—

3, 6

Receive

Receive for User Term (NT Mode)

4, 5

Transmit

Transmit for User Term (NT Mode)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

43

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Async-232 Option Module
Using the provided adapter cables, each Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1) interface provides a
DB-25 (see Pinout 23).
Pinout 23. Async-232 Option Module (DB-25)
Pin

Name

Description

1

Shield

Shielded ground connection

2

TXD

Transmit data from DTE

3

RXD

Receive data to DTE

4

RTS

Request to send from DTE

5

CTS

Clear to send to DTE

6

DSR

Data set ready to DTE

7

GND

Ground

8

DCD

Data carrier detect to DTE

9—19, 21, 23—25

Unused

n/a

20

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE

22

RI

Ring indicator to DTE

T3 Option Module
Using the provided RG 59, 75-Ohm cables (P/N 3125I054), each T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)
provides BNC connectors for transmit and receive connections (see Pinout 24).
Pinout 24. T3 Module (BNC pair, female)
Name

Description

RX IN

Receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

TX OUT

Transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

44

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

T3 Drop and Insert Option Module
Using the provided RG-59, 75-Ohm cables (P/N 3125I054), each T3 Drop and Insert Option Module
(P/N 1200225L1) provides BNC connectors for primary and secondary transmit and receive connections
(see Pinout 25).
Pinout 25. T3 Drop and Insert Module (BNC pair, female)
Name

Description

Primary RX IN

Primary receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Primary TX OUT

Primary transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Secondary RX IN

Secondary receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Secondary TX OUT

Secondary transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Dual Video Option Module
The Dual Video Option Module (P/N 4200773Lx) provides a standard RS-366 dialing interface (DB-25)
and a DTE interface (provided through adapter cables). Pinout 26 shows the RS-366 dialing interface and
Pinouts 27 through 29 on the following pages show pinouts for the other available interfaces.

Pinout 26. Dual Video Module (RS-366, DB-25)
Pin

Name

Description

Pin

Name

Description

1

Shield

Shielded Ground Connection

14

NB1

Digit Signal Circuit 1

2

DPR

Digit Present

15

NB2

Digit Signal Circuit 2

3

ACR

Abandon Call and Retry

16

NB4

Digit Signal Circuit 4

4

CRQ

Call Request

17

NB8

Digit Signal Circuit 8

5

PND

Present Next Digit

18

RC

Receive Common

6

PWI

Power Indication

19

SC

Send Common

7

SG

Signal Ground

20-21

Unused

n/a

8-12

Unused

n/a

22

DLO

Data Link Occupied

13

DSC

Distant Station Connection

23-25

Unused

n/a

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

45

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 27. Dual Video Module (V.35 Winchester)
Pin

CCITT

A

101

PG

Protective ground

B

102

SG

Signal ground

C

105

RTS

Request to send from DTE

D

106

CTS

Clear to send to DTE

E

107

DSR

Data set ready to DTE

F

109

DCD

Received line signal detector to DTE

H

—

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE

J

—

RI

Ring indicator

R

104

RD-A

Received data to DTE

T

104

RD-B

Received data to DTE

V

115

RC-A

RX clock to DTE

X

115

RC-B

RX clock to DTE

P

103

TD-A

Transmitted data from DTE

S

103

TD-B

Transmitted data from DTE

Y

114

TC-A

TX clock to DTE

AA

114

TC-B

TX clock to DTE

U

113

ETC-A

External TX clock from DTE

W

113

ETC-B

External TX clock from DTE

NN

—

TM

Test mode to DTE - (Not Supported)

61200780L1-1C

Name

Description

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

46

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 28. Dual Video Module (EIA-530)
Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

2

Transmit Data (A)

3

Pin

10

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

Carrier Detect (B)

19

Request to Send (B)

11

Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

20

DTE Ready (A)

Received Data (A)

12

Transmit Clock (B)

21

Not Used

4

Request to Send (A)

13

Clear to Send (B)

22

DCE Ready (B)

5

Clear to Send (A)

14

Transmit Data (B)

23

DTE Ready (B)

6

DCE Ready (A)

15

Transmit Clock (A)

24

Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

7

Signal Ground

16

Received Data (B)

25

Not Used

8

Carrier Detect (A)

17

Receive Clock (A)

9

Received Clock (B)

18

Not Used

Pinout 29. Dual Video Module (RS-449)
Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

Pin

Signal Description

1

Shield (Ground)

14

Remote Loopback
(Not Supported)

27

Clear to Send (B)

2

Not Used

15

Ring Indicator

28

Not Used

3

Not Used

16

Not Used

29

DCE Ready (B)

4

Transmit Data (A)

17

Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

30

DTE Ready (B)

5

Transmit Clock (A)

18

Test Mode
(Not Supported)

31

Carrier Detect (B)

6

Received Data (A)

19

Signal Ground

32

Not Used

7

Request to Send (A)

20

Not Used

33

Not Used

8

Receive Clock (A)

21

Not Used

34

Not Used

9

Clear to Send (A)

22

Transmit Data (B)

35

Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

10

Local Loopback
(Not Supported)

23

Transmit Clock (B)

36

Not Used

11

DCE Ready (A)

24

Receive Data (B)

37

Not Used

12

DTE Ready (A)

25

Request to Send (B)

13

Carrier Detect (A)

26

Receive Clock (B)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

47

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module
The NxT1 HSSI/V/35 Option Module (P/N 1200771L1) uses a single 50 pin SCSI-II interface (or V.35
interface using an optional adapter cable) to combine eight T1s of data (a combination of eight using the
four NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module T1 ports and other T1 ports installed in the system). See Pinouts 30 and 31.
Pinout 30. NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (RJ-48C)
Pin

Name

Description

1

RxData - Ring (R)

Receive data from the network

2

RxData - Tip

Receive data from the network

3

Unused

—

4

TxData - Ring (R1)

Send data towards the network

5

TxData-Tip

Send data towards the network

6,7,8

Unused

(T)

(T1)

—

Pinout 31. NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (50-pin SCSI-II and V.35 Winchester)
Pin
(+ Side)

Pin
(- Side)

Direction

1

26

—

HSSI SG - Signal Ground

2

27

O

HSSI RT - Receive Timing

3

28

O

HSSI CA - DCE Available

4

29

O

HSSI RD - Receive Data

5

30

O

HSSI LC - Loopback Circuit C

6

31

O

HSSI ST - Send Timing

7

32

—

HSSI SG - Signal Ground

8

33

I

HSSI TA - DTE Available

9

34

I

HSSI TT - Terminal Timing

10

35

I

HSSI LA - Loopback Circuit A

11

36

I

HSSI SD - Send Data

12

37

I

HSSI LB - Loopback Circuit B

13

38

—

HSSI SG - Signal Ground

—

39

—

Ancillary to DCE (Reserved)

14

—

I

V.35 RTS - Request to Send

15

40

I

V.35 TT Terminal Timing

61200780L1-1C

Description

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

48

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Engineering Guidelines

Option Module Pinouts

Pinout 31. NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (50-pin SCSI-II and V.35 Winchester) (Continued)
Pin
(+ Side)

Pin
(- Side)

Direction

Description

16

41

I

V.35 SD Send Data

—

42

O

V.35 DCD - Data Carrier Detect

17-18

43

—

Ancillary to DCE (Reserved)

19

44

—

HSSI SG - Signal Ground

20

45

O

V.35 ST - Send Timing

21

46

O

V.35 RT - Receive Timing

22

47

O

V.35 RD - Receive Data

23

—

O

V.35 CTS - Clear to Send

—

48

I

V.35 Ground/Present

24

49

O

HSSI TM - Test Mode

25

50

—

HSSI SG - Signal Ground

Octal FXS Option Module
The Octal FXS Option Module provides eight analog voice-grade interfaces. Each interface can operate in
loop-start or ground-start mode, providing talk battery, off-hook supervision, ringing, and E&M signaling
conversion. Call progress tones, where necessary, are provided to the modules by the ATLAS.

Pinout 32. Octal FXS Module (8-pin modular)
Pin

Name

Description

1,2,3,6,7,8

Unused

—

4

Ring

Ring to and from the analog phone interface

5

Tip

Tip to and from the analog phone interface

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

49

SECTION 2

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provides managers with an overview of the ATLAS 800 Series System.
This section contains general information and describes physical and operational
concepts, card functions, network relationships, provisioning, testing, alarm
status, and system monitoring. This section should be used in conjunction with
Section 1, Engineering Guidelines, on page 14 of the system manual.

Table of Contents
System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ATLAS 830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ATLAS 890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Upgradeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signaling Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN Switch Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dedicated Connection Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switched Connection Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PPP Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17

Option Modules Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATLAS 890 System Controller Module (P/N 1200322L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 4200261Lx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module (1200186L2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module (1200343L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Option Module (P/N 4200773Lx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module (1200771L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal FXS Option Module (P/N 1200338L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem-24 Resource Module (P/N 1200782L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20

61200780L1-1C

50

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

1.

System Overview

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The ATLAS 800 Series’ modular and highly scalable platform provides robust solutions for the wide-area
communication needs of medium-to-large corporations and network access providers. The ATLAS 800
Series is an Integrated Access System with extensive support of dedicated bandwidth management and
access switching. It contains a high-performance CPU and powerful communications drivers which
support applications such as frame relay and call switching.
With the ATLAS 800 Series, you can consolidate voice, data, and video applications into a single platform
while optimizing wide-area bandwidth and reducing equipment costs. The ATLAS 800 Series
architecture’s expansion slots allows for a variety of modules, making it one of the most versatile access
systems on the market.

ATLAS 830
The ATLAS 830 architecture includes a packet switching and a circuit switching bussing scheme. The
result is a system that supports bandwidth requirements of up to 30 T1 or Primary Rate ISDN (PRI)
circuits. Designed for standalone or rackmount use, the ATLAS 830 provides eight expansion slots that
accommodate hot-swappable option modules. A redundant power supply may be installed in slots 7 and 8,
if desired. A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection for IP routing and network management and two onboard
T1/PRI interfaces are standard with the ATLAS 830.

ATLAS 890
The ATLAS 890 architecture includes a packet switching and a circuit switching bussing scheme. The
result is a system that supports bandwidth requirements of up to 30 T1 or Primary Rate ISDN (PRI)
circuits. Designed for standalone or rackmount use, the ATLAS 890 base unit provides two hot-swappable,
redundant system controller slots and up to 16 expansion slots that accommodate hot-swappable option
modules and up to four hot-swappable, redundant power supplies for a variety of applications. A
10/100BaseT Ethernet connection for IP routing and network management is standard with the
ATLAS 890 System Controller Module.

2.

FEATURES AND BENEFITS

The following sections briefly describe features and benefits of the ATLAS 800 Series systems.

Configuration and Management
•
•
•
•
•

VT100 Emulation
SNMP, per MIB II (RFC1213), DS1 MIB (RFC1406), and ADTRAN private MIBs
Telnet
Dial-up, remote management via external analog modem
Six levels of password protection and privileges

Software Upgradeable
•
•
•

Flash memory
TFTP download
XMODEM via control port

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

51

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

Features and Benefits

Signaling Support
•
•
•
•

ISDN D Channel
Robbed Bit, E&M, Ground Start, Loop Start
Convert between Robbed Bit Signaling and ISDN D Channel
Direct Inward Dialing

ISDN Switch Types
•

5ESS™, DMS-100™, National ISDN, 4ESS™, Euro ISDN (ATLAS 830 only)

Dedicated Connection Maps
•
•
•
•

Up to five connection maps
Time of day/day of week configurable
Preserves signaling through cross-connect
No effect on unconfigured channels

Switched Connection Maps
•

Inbound and outbound call filtering and blocking

Testing
•
•

Local and remote: payload/line, V.54 (depending on installed modules)
Patterns: 511, QRSS, all ones, all zeros (depending on installed modules)

Performance Monitoring
•
•
•
•

Reports: Information for the ATLAS is stored for the last 24 hours, last 15 minutes, and last 5 minutes.
ATLAS 830 can store frame relay performance at user-specified intervals (5, 10, 15, 20, 30 mins).
Performance statistics per TR54016, T1.403, RFC1406
Alarm reporting per TR54016, T1.403

Frame Relay
•
•
•
•

•

Routes Internet Protocol (IP) traffic between the Ethernet port and a public frame relay network, a
private frame relay network, or a point-to-point (PPP) network.
Concentrates IP traffic from a public or private frame relay network to one or more serial ports (V.35).
The protocol passed over the serial port is frame relay (RFC 1490 encapsulation).
Passes Systems Network Architecture (SNA), Bisync, and other legacy protocols between a public or
private frame relay network and an external DTE running frame relay to the ATLAS.
Performs voice compression/decompression (G.723.1) and interfaces to either a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX) or the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This feature requires an
additional option module, the VCOM Module—P/N 1200221Lx.
Supports LMI, Annex D, or Annex A signaling on frame relay connections.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

52

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

Option Modules Overview

PPP Switching
•
•
•
•

Supports up to 100 simultaneous PPP connections.
Performs PAP, CHAP, or EAP authentication methods on a per connection basis.
Includes keepalive functionality for PPP connections.
Provides capability for numbered or unnumbered PPP interfaces.

3.

OPTION MODULES OVERVIEW

Each option module is hot-swappable with configuration restored upon replacement. The following option
modules are available in an ATLAS chassis:
Module Name

Part Number

ATLAS 830

ATLAS 890

ATLAS 890 System Controller

1200322L1

n/a

*

Quad T1/PRI Option Module

1200185L3

*

*

Quad E1/PRA Option Module

1200264L1

*

*

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module

1200184L1

*

*

Quad USSI Option Module

4200261Lx

*

*

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module

1200186L2

*

*

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module

1200343L1

*

*

T3 Option Module

1200223L1

*

*

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface

1200225L1

*

*

Dual Video Option Module

4200773Lx

*

*

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module

1200771L1

*

*

Octal FXS Option Module

1200338L1

*

*

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules 1200221Lx

*

*

Nx 56/64 IMUX/BONDing Resource Module

1200262L1

*

*

HDLC Resource Module

1200222L1

*

*

Modem-16 Resource Module

1200181L1

*

*

Modem-24 Resource Module

1200782L1

*

*

Async-232 Option Module

1200182L1

*

*

Replacing an option module with a different module type results in configuration loss.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

53

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

Option Modules Overview

Each option module provides a variety of performance and alarm status information. Several features of
each module are user-configurable, although default values reflect the most common configurations. All
option modules contain an extensive self-test as well as tests designed for the technologies they
incorporate.

ATLAS 890 System Controller Module (P/N 1200322L1)
In addition to controlling the shelf and its contents, the system controller modules serve as the user
interface. The user provisions and monitors all modules in the system, either locally or remotely, via the
system controller interface. The system controllers provision the option cards in the shelf via the faceplate
RJ-45 ADMIN connector of the active system controller and a VT100 terminal. Additionally, a
10/100BaseT Ethernet interface provides Telnet access.

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)
The Quad T1/PRI Option Module provides four channelized T1 or PRI interfaces. Each interface can
operate independently in DS-1, DSX-1, or PRI mode and any port can deliver timing for the system.

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)
The Quad E1/PRA Option Module provides four channelized E1 or PRA interfaces using the supplied
120-ohm, DB-15 converter cable. The Quad E1/PRA Option Module may also be purchased to include
BNC converter cables (P/N 4200264L1). This interface operates in CCS or CAS signaling mode and can
deliver timing for the system.

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1)
The Quad Nx 56/64 Module provides four synchronous V.35 DTE ports (using the supplied DB-78 to V.35
converter cables) that can operate from 56K to 2.048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps. Any port can deliver
timing for the system.

Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 4200261Lx)
The Quad USSI Option Module provides four synchronous DTE ports that can operate from 56K to
2.048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps. Using adapter cables, the DTE ports available include EIA-530,
RS-449, RS-232, and CCITT X.21. Any port can deliver timing for the system.

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module (1200186L2)
The Octal Basic Rate ISDN Module provides eight Basic Rate ISDN (BRI) U interfaces, each capable of
operating in either NT or LT mode. Any port can deliver timing for the system.

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module (1200343L1)
The Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Module provides eight Basic Rate ISDN (BRI) S/T interfaces,
each capable of operating in NT (User Term) mode only. This module does not deliver timing for the
system.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

54

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

Option Modules Overview

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)
The T3 Option Module provides a single, channelized T3 interface that allows bandwidth management of
up to 28 T1s. It functions as a T3 DSU/CSU, M13 multiplexer, and 3/1/0 timeslot interchange DACS. The
T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver timing for the system.

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1)
The T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface provides a single, channelized T3 interface for
primary service and an additional drop and insert interface for passing T3 channels (in T1 pairs) to a
secondary channelized T3 device. The module functions as a T3 DSU/CSU, M13 multiplexer, and 3/1/0
timeslot interchange DACS. The T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver
timing for the system.

Dual Video Option Module (P/N 4200773Lx)
The Dual Video Option Module provides two independent video ports, each including an RS-366 dialing
interface (DB-25) and a synchronous DTE port (interface connector determined by custom cable). When
used in conjunction with the Nx56/64 BONDing Option Module (P/N 1200262L1), the Dual Video
Module provides high-bandwidth videoconferencing. The Dual Video Module does not provide timing for
the ATLAS 800 Series system.

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module (1200771L1)
The NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module aggregates bandwidth from one to eight T1s into a single logical
channel on the HSSI interface (or V.35 interface using the optional adapter cable). The NxT1/V.35 Option
Module supports point-to-point T1 applications only. Any of the four built-in T1 ports of the NxT1
HSSI/V.35 Option Module can provide timing for the ATLAS 800 Series system.

Octal FXS Option Module (P/N 1200338L1)
The Octal FXS Option Module provides eight analog voice-grade interfaces. Each interface provides talk
battery, off-hook supervision, E&M signaling conversion, and ringing in loop-start or ground-start
operation. Call progress tones, where necessary, are provided to the modules by the ATLAS 800 Series.

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx)
The Voice Compression Resource Module (VCOM Module) combines with other ATLAS 800 Series
components to implement voice over frame relay (VoFR) capability. The Voice Compression Resources
modules support 8, 16, 24, or 32 simultaneous compressed calls using G.723.1 or Netcoder compression
algorithms.

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1)
The Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module supports multiple, independent BONDing sessions with each
session capable of using from 2 to 32 channels of 56K or 64K data. The Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource
Module combines with other ATLAS 800 Series components to provide a flexible disaster recovery
system.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

55

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Description

Option Modules Overview

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1)
Certain ATLAS 800 Series applications require a larger number of High-level Data Link Control (HDLC)
controllers than the 35 supplied on the system controller module. The HDLC Resource Module contains
128 HDLC controllers and is used when the application requirements call for more HDLC controllers than
are provided with the other ATLAS 800 Series hardware components. The HDLC Resource Module
provides no physical interfaces.

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1)
The Modem-16 Resource Module is a high-capacity card for the ATLAS 800 Series, capable of processing
16 modem or ISDN Calls. Modem or ISDN calls are presented to the ATLAS 800 Series via one or more
Primary Rate ISDN (PRI), Basic Rate ISDN (BRI), or T1 circuits. The Modem-16 Resource Module
combines with the Async-232 Module to enable dial-up access for up to 32 users. The Modem-16
Resource Module provides no physical interfaces.

Modem-24 Resource Module (P/N 1200782L1)
The Modem-24 Module contains 24 V.90-compliant modems that interface digitally to the network to
allow remote dial-in access to the ATLAS 800 Series chassis. The Modem-24 module terminates 24
56-Kbps dial-up data streams. This module allows remote access users to connect to the corporate facility
using analog dial-up lines.

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)
The Async-232 Module combines with the ATLAS 800 Series components to provide solutions for a
variety of wide area networking (WAN) applications. Providing 16 asynchronous EIA-232 data terminal
equipment (DTE) ports, the Async-232 Module serves as the interface to terminal servers and other DTE
equipment. Each port of the Async-232 Module can be configured to operate at any standard asynchronous
rate, up to 115.2 kbps. The Async-232 Module is only supported in dial-up applications (using the
Modem-24 Resource Module) and is not a valid interface for TDM data.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

56

SECTION 3

NETWORK TURNUP PROCEDURES
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and powering up the ATLAS 800
Series System.

Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Unpacking and Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Contents of ADTRAN Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Grounding Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Supplying Power to the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AC-Powered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DC-Powered Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installing Network and Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Slots Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules Shipping Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

63
63
64
64

List of Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.

Mounting Brackets (shown with ATLAS 830). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ATLAS 830 Slot Designation (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ATLAS 890 Slot Designations (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

57

1.

INTRODUCTION

This section discusses the installation process for the ATLAS 800 Series System.

2.

TOOLS REQUIRED

The tools required for installation of the ATLAS include the following:
• #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver (for installing modules)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning
storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules, wear
an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place modules in
antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on modules, always place
them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

3.

UNPACKING AND INSPECTING THE SYSTEM

Each ATLAS is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the carton carefully and avoid deep
penetration into the carton with sharp objects. After unpacking the unit, inspect it for possible shipping
damage. If the equipment has been damaged in transit, immediately file a claim with the carrier, then
contact ADTRAN Customer Service (see the contact information in the front of this manual).

Contents of ADTRAN Shipment
Table 1 lists the items included in your ADTRAN shipment. Customers must supply a DB-9 male console
cable for VT100 terminal/terminal emulation connection and an Ethernet cable.
Table 1. Items Included in ATLAS Shipment
Item Description

ATLAS 830

Either the ATLAS 830 or the ATLAS 890 base unit

ATLAS 890

One Base Unit

The ATLAS System CD

D

D

AC Power cord - ADTRAN P/N 3127031 (with AC systems)

D

D

19” Rackmount brackets and screws

D

n/a

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

58

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

Grounding Instructions

Table 1. Items Included in ATLAS Shipment (Continued)
Item Description

ATLAS 830

ATLAS 890

19-23” Convertable Rackmount brackets and screws

n/a

D

RJ-45—DB-25 adapter (1 for modem connection)

n/a

D

RJ-45 control port cable (1) - ADTRAN P/N 3127004

n/a

D

RJ-45—DB-9 adapter (1)

n/a

D

4.

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS

The following grounding information is from the Underwriters’ Laboratory UL60950 Standard for Safety
of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment, Third Edition,
December 1, 2000.
An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply
conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system. Bare, covered, or
insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding
conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow
stripes. The equipment grounding conductor is to be connected to ground at the service equipment.
The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type,
and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at
the service equipment.
A supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be installed between the product or system and
ground that is in addition to the equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord. The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall not be smaller in size than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply
conductors. The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the product at the
terminal provided, and shall be connected to ground in a manner that will retain the ground connection
when the product is unplugged from the receptacle. The connection to ground of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be in compliance with the rules for terminating bonding jumpers at Part K
or Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Termination of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor is permitted to be made to building steel, to a metal electrical raceway system,
or to any grounded item that is permanently and reliably connected to the electrical service equipment
ground.
The supplemental grounding conductor shall be connected to the equipment using a number 8 ring terminal
and should be fastened to the grounding lug provided on the rear panel of the equipment. The ring terminal
should be installed using the appropriate crimping tool (AMP P/N 59250 T-EAD Crimping Tool or
equivalent.)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

59

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

5.

Supplying Power to the Unit

SUPPLYING POWER TO THE UNIT

AC-Powered Systems
The AC-powered ATLAS 830 and ATLAS 890 come equipped with a detachable 6-foot power cord with a
3-prong plug for connecting to a grounded power receptacle. As shipped, the ATLAS is set to factory
default conditions. After installing the unit and any option modules, the ATLAS is ready for power-up. To
power-up the unit, ensure that the unit is properly connected to an appropriate power source, and then turn
on the unit using the on/off switch on the rear panel.
•

•

The unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA 70
when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a locked
door, service personnel only area).
Power to the ATLAS 830 AC system must be from a grounded 90-130/190-240 VAC, 50/60
Hz source.
Power to the ATLAS 890 AC system must be from a grounded 90-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz
source.
The power receptacle uses double-pole, neutral fusing.

•

Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45oC.

•
•

DC-Powered Systems
The DC-powered ATLAS comes equipped with a DC Power supply to furnish the voltages necessary for
proper backplane operation. As shipped, the ATLAS is set to factory default conditions. After installing the
unit and any option modules, the ATLAS is ready for power-up.
•

•
•
•
•

61200780L1-1C

The unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA 70
when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a locked
door, service personnel only area)
Power to the ATLAS DC system must be from a reliably grounded -48 VDC source which
is electrically isolated from the AC source.
The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated minimum
60 VDC, maximum 10A.
A readily accessible disconnect device, that is suitably approved and rated, shall be
incorporated in the field wiring.
Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45oC.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

60

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

6.

Mounting Options

MOUNTING OPTIONS

The ATLAS 830 may be used on a tabletop or installed in a 19-inch or 23-inch rackmount configuration.
The ATLAS 890 must be rackmounted. For rackmount installations, the ATLAS allows flush-face mount,
face-forward mount, and center mount (see Figure 1).

NETWORK

1

2

ATLAS 830

MODULES

POWER

OK

OK

SYSTEM

TEST

TEST

ERROR

ERROR

ONLINE

ALARM

ALARM

TEST

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

STATUS
ACO

ETHERNET
REMOTE

CRAFT

NE

K
OR 2
TW

1

ER

ROR

ALAR
CR

WER
PO
EM
SYST
RN
ETHE
RE

(Optional)
Mid-Mounting holes

MOT

AF

OK
TEST

OK
TEST

ER

ROR

ALAR

M

M

T

O
AC

ET

E

Four screws are provided
with shipment
(#6-32 5/16” length)

Brackets are provided
with shipment.

Figure 1. Mounting Brackets (shown with ATLAS 830)

Be careful not to upset the stability of the equipment mounting rack when installing this product.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

61

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

7.

Installing Network and Option Modules

INSTALLING NETWORK AND OPTION MODULES

Option Slots Numbering
Figure 2 shows the option slot numbering designation for the ATLAS 830, and Figure 3 shows the option
slot numbering designation for the ATLAS 890. (Slots 7 and 8 of the ATLAS 830 may also be used for an
optional redundant power supply.) The two units share the same ATLAS 800 Series option module cards.
However, the controller slots of the ATLAS 890 only accept ATLAS 890 controller modules.
Understanding the slot numbering convention is important for successful module installation.

Slot 1

Slot 5

Slot 2

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 7

Slot 4

Slot 8

Figure 2. ATLAS 830 Slot Designation (Rear Panel)
Modules or
Power Supply
Power
Supply

Controller
Slots
Module Slots

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15

Figure 3. ATLAS 890 Slot Designations (Rear Panel)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

62

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

Installing Network and Option Modules

Option modules are intended to be serviced by qualified service personnel only.

Modules Installation Instructions
1. Remove the cover plate from the appropriate option slot of the ATLAS rear panel.
2. Slide the option module into the option slot until the module is firmly seated against the front of the
chassis.
3. Secure the (thumb)screws at both edges of the module. Tighten with a screwdriver.
4. Connect the cables to the associated device(s).

Modules Shipping Contents
Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)
•
•
•
•
•

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Quad T1/PRI Option Module Quick Start Guide
Four cables (RJ-48C to RJ-48C), ADTRAN P/N: 3125M008
Two cross-over cable (RJ-48C to RJ-48C), ADTRAN P/N: 3125M010
Two DB-15 to RJ-48 Adapters, ADTRAN P/N: 3196027

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)
•
•
•

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Quad E1/PRA Option Module Quick Start Guide
One DB-62 to Quad DB-15 female cable, ADTRAN P/N: 3125I061
The Quad E1/PRA Option Module may also be purchased with BNC Network Connection Interfaces
(P/N 4200264L1).

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1)
•
•
•

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module
Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module Quick Start Guide
Two DB-37 to V.35 converter cables, ADTRAN P/N 1200784L1

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

63

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

Installing Network and Option Modules

Quad USSI Option Module System (P/N 4200261Lx)
• Quad USSI Option Module System
• Quad USSI Option Module System Quick Start Guide
And one of the following:
• EIA-530 to DB-78 Cable (System P/N 4200261L2, Cable P/N 3125I058)
• RS-449/V.36 (System P/N 4200261L1, Cable P/N 3125I057)
• RS-232 (System P/N 4200261L4, Cable P/N 3125I063)
• CCIT X.21 V.11 (System P/N 4200261L3, Cable P/N 3125I056)

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module (P/N 1200186L2)
•
•
•

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module
Octal Basic Rate ISDN (U-Interface) Option Module Quick Start Guide
Eight RJ-45-to-RJ-11 cables, ADTRAN P/N: 3125M007

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module (P/N 1200343L1)
•
•
•

Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module
Octal Basic Rate ISDN (S/T Interface) Option Module Quick Start Guide
Eight RJ-45-to-RJ-11 cables, ADTRAN P/N: 3125M007

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)
•
•
•

T3 Option Module
T3 Option Module Quick Start Guide
Two 6 ft. coaxial BNC cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I054)

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1)
•
•
•

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface
T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface Quick Start Guide
Four 6 ft. coaxial BNC cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I054)

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module (P/N 1200771L1)
•
•
•

NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module Quick Start Guide
Four 15 ft. RJ-48 to RJ-48 cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125M008)
A SCSI-II to V.35 adapter cable is available (P/N 1200763L1) for applications requiring a
V.35 interface.

Octal FXS Option Module (P/N 1200338L1)
•
•

Octal FXS Option Module
Octal FXS Option Module Quick Start Guide

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

64

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Network Turnup Procedures

Installing Network and Option Modules

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx)
•
•

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules
8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules Quick Start Guide

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1):
•
•

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module
Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module Quick Start Guide

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1)
•
•

HDLC Resource Module
HDLC Resource Module Quick Start Guide

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1)
•
•

Modem-16 Resource Module
Modem-16 Resource Module Quick Start Guide

Modem-24 Resource Module (P/N 1200782L1)
•
•

Modem-24 Resource Module
Modem-24 Resource Module Quick Start Guide

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)
•
•
•

Async-232 Option Module
Async-232 Option Module Quick Start Guide
Two DB-78 to Octal RS-232 cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I030)

Dual Video Option Module (P/N 4200773Lx)
• Dual Video Option Module
• Dual Video Option Module Quick Start Guide
And one of the following:
• V.35 (System P/N 4200773L1, Cable P/N 1200774L1)
• EIA-530 (System P/N 4200773L2, Cable P/N 1200774L2)
• RS-449 (System P/N 4200773L3, Cable P/N 1200774L3)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

65

SECTION 4

USER INTERFACE GUIDE
Provides detailed descriptions of all menu options and configuration parameters
for the ATLAS 800 Series System.

This section is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the
system. It contains information about navigating the VT100 user interface, configuring the unit and
modules, and using the menus.

Table of Contents
Navigating the Terminal Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Terminal Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Navigating using the Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Terminal Menus and System Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Selecting the Appropriate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

System Info Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System Status Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
System Config Menu Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
System Utility Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Modules Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Quad T1/PRI Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad E1/PRA Option Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Nx56/64 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USSI Option Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI U Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal BRI S/T Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 D&I Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Video Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NxT1 HSSI Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal FXS Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCOM Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDLC Resource Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem-16 Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem-24 Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Async-232 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106
113
119
126
135
138
141
151
162
168
177
181
188
191
193
204
211

Packet Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

66

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
User Interface Guide

Router (IP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Dedicated Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Circuit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

List of Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.

Top-Level Terminal Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alternate Menu View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System Info Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
System Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
View Self-test Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Loopback Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
E1/PRA Network Loopback Test Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Network Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Network Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
HSSI Interface Loopback Test Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Packet Manager Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Router Menu (IP Selected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Dedicated Maps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Circuit Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Dial Plan Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Hyperlinked Dial Plan Menu Tree (Partial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

List of Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.

Password Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
DTE Lead States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
USSI Module Send Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DTR Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FXS 2W State Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Analog Resource Session Status Line Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Analog Resource Session Status Line Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
DLCI Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ICMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IP Fast Cache Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

67

1.

NAVIGATING THE TERMINAL MENUS

Log in to the ATLAS 800 Series by connecting a standard straight-through serial cable to a VT100
terminal (or PC with VT100 emulator) and the DB-9 CRAFT port located on the front panel of the unit or
the ADMIN port on the rear panel of the unit. Configure the terminal settings for 9600 data rate, no parity, 8
data bits, 1 stop bit, and no flow control.
After you connect to the unit, a login screen appears. The default password for the ATLAS 800 Series is
password (all lower case). (Refer to DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, for detailed instructions.)

Terminal Menu Window
After you log in, all menu items and data fields are displayed in the terminal menu window, through which
you have complete control of the ATLAS 800 Series (see Figure 1).

Menu Path

Right Pane

Left Pane

SYS

^A=more

Extended Help
Slot Status

Navigation Help

Tool Tip

System Time

Figure 1. Top-Level Terminal Menu Window

Menu Path
The first line of the terminal menu window (the menu path) shows the session’s current position (path) in
the menu structure. For example, Figure 1 shows the top-level menu with the cursor on the SYSTEM INFO
submenu; therefore, the menu path reads ATLAS 830/SYSTEM INFO.

For simplicity, only the ATLAS 830 is used in examples throughout this section.

Window Panes
When first starting a terminal menu session, the terminal menu window is divided into left and right panes.
The left pane shows the list of available submenus, while the right pane shows the contents of the currently
selected submenu.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

68

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Navigating the Terminal Menus

You can view the terminal windows in two ways: with fields and submenus displaying horizontally across
the right pane, or with fields and submenus displaying vertically down the right pane. Viewing submenus
vertically rather than horizontally allows you to see information at a glance rather than scrolling
horizontally across the window. To change the view, move your cursor to an index number and press
. Figure 2 shows this alternate view. Fields and submenu names may vary slightly in this view.

Figure 2. Alternate Menu View
Window Pane Navigation

Use the following chart to assist you in moving between and within the two window panes.
To do this...

Move from left pane to right pane

Press this key...

Tab
Enter
Right Arrow

Move from right pane to left pane

Tab
Escape
Left Arrow
Backspace

Move within each pane

Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Left Arrow
Right Arrow

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

69

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Navigating the Terminal Menus

Right Window Pane Notation

The right window pane shows the contents of the currently selected menu. These contents can include
both submenu items and data fields. Some submenus contain additional submenus and some data fields
contain additional data fields. The following chart explains the notation used to identify these
additional items.
This notation...

Means that...

[+]

More items are available when selected

[DATA]

More items are available when selected

<+>

An action is to be taken, such as activating a test

Highlighted menu item

You can enter data in this field

Underlined field

The field contains read-only information

Additional Terminal Menu Window Features
•
•
•
•
•
•

SYS - displays status information about the system controller, such as ONLIN (online), STBY
(standby), and NRDY (not ready).
Tool Tip - provides a brief description of the currently selected (highlighted) command
Slot Status - displays status information, such as OK, WARN, or ALRM about slots 1-8
Extended Help - displays information about selected commands (CTRL+A)
Navigation Help - lists characters used for navigating the terminal menu and session management
(CTRL+Z)
System Time - displays current time

Navigating using the Keyboard Keys
Use keyboard keys to move through the terminal menu, manage a terminal menu session, and configure the
system. Press the keyboard combination CTRL+Z to activate a pop-up screen listing the navigation
keystrokes.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

70

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Navigating the Terminal Menus

Moving through the Menus
To do this...

Press this key...

Return to the home screen

H

Jump between two menu items
Press J while the cursor is located on a menu item, and you jump back to the
main screen.
Go to another menu item, press J, and you jump back to the screen that was
displayed the first time you pressed J.

J

Press J anytime you want to jump between these items.
Select items
Edit a selected menu item
Cancel an edit
Close pop-up help screen
Move between the left and right panes
Move to the top of a screen

A

Move to the bottom of a screen

Z

Ascend one menu level

Session Management Keystrokes
To do this...

Press this key...

Log out of a session

+L

Invalidate the password entry and return to the login screen
Refresh the screen - To save time, only the portion of the screen that has changed is
refreshed. This option should only be necessary if the display picks up incorrect
characters caused by disconnecting and reconnecting the terminal session.
View Extended Data - Display data fields too large for display window.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

+S

+R

+V

71

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Navigating the Terminal Menus

Configuration Keystrokes
To do this...

Press this key...

Restore factory default settings.
This setting restores the factory defaults based on the location of the cursor. If the
cursor is on a module line (in the MODULES menu), then only the selected module
is updated to factory defaults.

F

Copy selected items to the clipboard.
The amount of information you can copy depends on the cursor location when you
press C:
If the cursor is over an editable field, only that item is copied.

C

If the cursor is over the index number of a list, then all of the items in the row of
the list are copied. For example, if the cursor is over the SLOT # field in the
MODULES screen, all of the information associated with the slot is copied.
Paste the item stored in the clipboard, if the information is compatible.
You must confirm all pastes, except those to a single editable field.

P

Increment the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information
into those fields.

>

Decrement the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information
into those fields.

<

Insert a new list item.
For example, add a new item to the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing I
while the cursor is over the index number.
Delete a list item.
For example, delete an item from the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing
D while the index number is active.

I
D

Getting Help
The bottom line of the terminal menu window contains context-sensitive help information. When the
cursor is positioned over a set of configuration items, a help message displays (when available) providing a
description of the item. When more detailed help is available for a particular item, ^A displays at the
bottom of the window. At this point, if you press the key combination CTRL+A, a pop-up help screen
displays with information about the item. Press the key combination CTRL+Z to activate a help screen that
displays the available keystrokes you can use to navigate the terminal menu.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

72

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

2.

TERMINAL MENUS AND SYSTEM CONTROL

Selecting the Appropriate Menu
The terminal menus are the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several
functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. Use the
chart below to help select the appropriate terminal menu.
To do this...

Go to this menu...

Review and monitor general system information for the ATLAS.

System Info

Review and monitor system status for the ATLAS.

System Status

Set up the operational configuration for the ATLAS.

System Config

Update settings, transfer files, perform system diagnostics, and reboot
the ATLAS.

System Utility

Review and configure settings for each installed module, including the
ATLAS built-in network ports.

Modules

Define and configure all layer 2 connections including Frame Relay and
PPP endpoints.

Packet Manager

Define, configure and monitor all ATLAS Router functions.

Router

Assign dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS.

Dedicated Maps

Monitor the status of backup links, manually force a backup switch, and
restore a primary connection.

Circuit Status

Set global ATLAS switch parameters or set individual parameters for
each port in the ATLAS that handles a switched call.

Dial Plan

Security Levels
To edit terminal menu items, users must have a password and the appropriate security level. Table 1
describes the six security levels.
Table 1. Password Security Levels
Security Level

Description

5

Read-only permission for all menu items - minimum rights

4

Read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands

3

Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, authentication methods,
and interface configurations

2

Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, and authentication methods

1

Access to all commands except passwords

0

Permission to edit every menu item, including creating and editing passwords maximum rights

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

73

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

3.

System Info Menu Descriptions
System Name

SYSTEM INFO MENU DESCRIPTIONS

The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit as well as data fields for editing
information. Figure 3 displays the submenus and data fields available for this menu.

Figure 3. System Info Menu

System Name
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the ATLAS. This name can help distinguish
between different installations. Enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field, including spaces and
special characters (such as an underbar).

System Location
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the ATLAS. This field helps keep track of the
physical location of the unit. Enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field, including spaces and
special characters (such as an underbar).

System Contact
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. Use this field to enter the name, phone number,
or e-mail address of a person responsible for the ATLAS system. Enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in
this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar).

Firmware Revision
Read security: 5

Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

74

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Info Menu Descriptions
System Uptime

System Uptime
Read security: 5

Displays the length of time the ATLAS system has been running. Resetting the system resets this value to
0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs.

Startup Mode
Read security: 5

Displays details about the last system startup. For example, this field reads “Warm Reboot” when
rebooting the ATLAS from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu.

Current Time/Date (24Hr)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the current date and time, including seconds. To edit this field, place the cursor on the field and
press . Then, enter the time in a 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm), and the date in
mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-2003). Press  to exit the menu.

Installed Memory
Read security: 5

Displays the type and amount of memory in use (including Flash memory and DRAM).

Serial Number
Read security: 5

Displays the serial number for the unit. The serial number of the ATLAS automatically displays in this
field.

Boot ROM Rev
Read security: 5

Displays the boot ROM revision.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

75

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

4.

System Status Menu Descriptions
Event Log

SYSTEM STATUS MENU DESCRIPTIONS

The SYSTEM STATUS menu provides the user with status information about the ATLAS operational
parameters including logged system events and timing. Figure 4 displays the submenus and data fields.

Figure 4. System Status Menu

Event Log
Displays the last 349 warning or failure messages sent including the day, date, and priority of the message.
The most recent messages display at the top of the list. The following read-only fields are available for
review:
Time

Displays the date (mm/dd) and the time (hh:mm:ss) that the event occurred.

Category

Displays the severity of the event. The possible categories are CRITICAL, MAJOR,
MINOR, WARNING, NORMAL, and INFO. Specify which types of errors to log with
the SYSTEM EVENT LOGGING option. (See System Event Log on page 353 for
details.)

Source (Src)

Displays the source of the event.

Slot/Pktlnk

Displays the slot number in which the event occurred. If this field displays (0),
the event that occurred was on one of the two built-in network ports.

Port/Sublink

Displays the port in which the event occurred.

Description

Displays a description of the event.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

76

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Status Menu Descriptions
Clear System Event Log

Clear System Event Log
Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Clears the event log. Select Y to clear the log or N to exit the command. The following prompt displays:
Confirm (y/n)
This will clear the entire event log.

After clearing the event log, data cannot be retrieved.

Ethernet Port
Read security: 5

Displays status information about the Ethernet port. An asterisk (*) indicates activity for the item. The
following read-only fields are available to review:
I/F Status

Indicates the current status of the Ethernet port.

Tx Frames

Indicates the number of frames transmitted from the Ethernet port since system
startup.

Rx Frames

Indicates the number of frames received on the Ethernet port since system
startup.

Ethernet Rate

Indicates whether the Ethernet network is 10 or 100BaseT.

Admin Port
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Displays the status of the ADMIN port.
Signal Leads

Displays the state of the ADMIN port signals (RTS, CTS, DTR, and DCD).

Tx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the ADMIN port.

Rx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes received by the ADMIN port

Overrun Errs

Displays the number of overrun errors received by the ADMIN port.

Framing Errs

Displays the number of framing errors received by the ADMIN port.

Clear Counters

Clears the ADMIN port statistics. Press Y to activate this command.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

77

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Status Menu Descriptions
Craft Port

Craft Port
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Displays the status of the CRAFT port.
Tx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the CRAFT port.

Rx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes received by the CRAFT port.

Overrun Errs

Displays the number of overrun errors received by the CRAFT port.

Framing Errs

Displays the number of framing errors received by the CRAFT port.

Clear Counters

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Clears the CRAFT port statistics. Press Y to activate this command.

System Alarms (ATLAS 830)
Read security: 5

Contains alarm information about the ATLAS system including power and
temperature alarms. The following status symbols are used:
Symbol

Description

[–]

Normal condition

[*]

Failure condition

[!]

No information available

Power

Indicates that one or both of the power supplies are not functional. Both the
primary and auxiliary (installed in slots 7 and 8 of the ATLAS 830) power
supplies are continuously monitored to determine failures. If one of these
supplies fails, a message will be placed in the EVENT LOG (see System Event Log
on page 353 for more details).

Temperature

Indicates that the internal temperature of the power supply has exceeded normal
operating limits. When the operating temperature is exceeded by any power
supply, a warning will be placed in the EVENT LOG but no other action will be
taken (see System Event Log on page 353 for more details).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

78

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Status Menu Descriptions
System Alarms (ATLAS 890)

System Alarms (ATLAS 890)
Displays the status of all ATLAS 890 system alarms. The following symbols are used.
Symbol

Description

[–]

Normal condition

[*]

Failure condition

[!]

No information available. May indicate that one of the four power
supply slots does not contain a power supply.

Power

Indicates that one or both of the power supplies are not functional. These power
supplies are continuously monitored to determine failures. If one of these
supplies fails, a message will be placed in the EVENT LOG (see System Event
Log on page 353 for more details).

Temperature

Indicates that the internal temperature of the power supply has exceeded normal
operating limits. When the operating temperature is exceeded by any power
supply, a warning will be placed in the EVENT LOG but no other action will be
taken (see System Event Log on page 353 for more details).

Fans

Indicates that installed fans are operating normally.

External Input

Indicates that the external input has been activated. [–] indicates that input is not
active and [*] indicates that input is active.

System Timing Source
Read security: 5

Indicates which timing source (primary or backup) is in use by ATLAS and whether the system is locked
onto this source. If the display does not indicate locked, the ATLAS does not have a valid source of timing
and cannot reliably transfer data. Review the current setting for system timing source in the SYSTEM
CONFIG menu. See Primary Timing Source on page 83 and Backup Timing Source on page 83 for details.

Resource Usage
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Provides resource usage tracking for dynamic resources throughout the system. This includes current,
average, and minimum availability for both analog and digital resources.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

79

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Data Tables

System Status Menu Descriptions
Resource Usage

Read security: 5
Displays resource usage for dynamic resources throughout the system in a table
format.

Submenus

Description

Resource Type

Displays types of dynamically allocated resources being tracked throughout the
system. Examples are Analog (analog modem resource), SW Digital (digital
call resource), and Pkt Voice (packet voice compression resource). Choices are
ADPCM VOICE, ANALOG, NL DIGITAL, PKT VOICE, and SW DIGITAL.

Current

Shows the number of resources available (not in use) and the total number of
resources. If a resource is taken offline, it is not included in the total.

Average

Shows the average number of resources available since the statistics were last
reset.

Min

Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset.

0 (Zero) Avail

Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available resources
reached 0.

Hr Data

Displays the TIME OF DAY, AVERAGE, MINIMUM, and 0 AVAILABLE data broken
down in hour increments for a 24-hour period.

Reset

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics for the selected
resource.

Config

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the statistics displayed under data tables.

Submenus

Description

Display Format

Toggle this display format for all RESOURCE USAGE statistics to either RAW DATA
or PERCENT.

Reset Mode

Sets the reset mode for the RESOURCE USAGE statistics to one of the following:

61200780L1-1C

Daily

Performs reset daily at 12:00 AM

Weekly

Performs reset on Saturday night, 12:00 AM

Manual

Disables automatic reset of the resource usage statistics

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

80

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Status Menu Descriptions
Trunk Usage

Trunk Usage
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

DS0 usage tracking for Dial Plan connections. Indicates trunk use: (NET TERM PRI, NET TERM RBS; USER
TERM PRI, and USER TERM RBS).
Data Tables

Read security: 5
Displays collected trunk resource usage data.

Submenus

Description

Trunk Type

Displays types of trunks in the system including the following:
Net RBS

T1 (Robbed Bit Signaling) trunks configured in the DIAL PLAN
as NETWORK TERM.

Net PRI

Primary Rate ISDN circuits configured in the DIAL PLAN as
NETWORK TERM.

User RBS

T1 (Robbed Bit Signaling) trunks configured in the DIAL PLAN
as USER TERM.

User PRI

Primary Rate ISDN circuits configured in the DIAL PLAN as
USER TERM.

Current

Shows the number of resources available (not in use) and the total number of
resources. If a resource is taken offline, it is not included in the total.

Average

Shows the average number of resources available since the statistics were last
reset.

Min

Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset.

0 (Zero) Avail

Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available resources
reached 0.

Slot/Port Data

Displays the usage data (CURRENT, AVERAGE, MIN, 0 AVAIL, and HR DATA)
broken down by slots and ports.

Reset Stats

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics.

Config

Write security: 5 Read security: 5
Configures the statistics displayed under data tables.

Submenus

Description

Display Format

Sets the display format for all TRUNK USAGE statistics to either RAW DATA or
PERCENT.

Reset Mode

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Sets the reset mode for the TRUNK USAGE statistics to one of the following:

61200780L1-1C

Daily

Performs reset daily at 12:00 AM.

Weekly

Performs reset on Saturday night, 12:00 AM.

Manual

Disables automatic reset of the trunk usage statistics

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

81

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Status Menu Descriptions
Redundancy (ATLAS 890)

Redundancy (ATLAS 890)
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

SCU A

Displays the status of the system controller unit (SCU) installed in Slot A.

SCU B

Displays the status of the system controller unit (SCU) installed in Slot B.

Hardware Compatibility Displays the current hardware of the SCUs installed in Slots A and B. Provides

status for any compatibility issues that exist.
Firmware Compatibility Indicates whether the firmware revision of SCUs A and B have any

incompatibility problems that would affect controller switchover. For proper
operation, the firmware in SCU A should match the firmware in SCU B.
Active/Standby
Configuration

Standby Startup Mode

InterController
Communications

61200780L1-1C

Compares the configuration of SCUs A and B. Displays any discrepancies in the
comparison and indicates when the controllers are synchronized.
Displays the manner in which the standby controller booted. In the event that
the Standby SCU previously rebooted, this message attempts to explain the
cause of the reboot.
Displays the status of the Intercontroller Communications Channel (ICC).

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

82

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

5.

System Config Menu Descriptions
Primary Timing Source

SYSTEM CONFIG MENU DESCRIPTIONS

The SYSTEM CONFIG menu allows you to set up the ATLAS operational configuration. Figure 5 shows the
items included in this menu. Menu options follow.

Figure 5. System Config Menu

Primary Timing Source
Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Selects the primary timing source. You can select either Internal or any port available that is capable of
providing timing. Please refer to the specific module information to determine whether a port can provide
timing for the system.

Backup Timing Source
Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Selects the secondary timing source. You can select either Internal or any port available that is capable of
providing timing. Please refer to the specific module information to determine whether a port can provide
timing for the system. ATLAS 800 Series uses the backup timing source if the primary timing source goes
into alarm. The backup timing source should be different from the primary timing source for the most
reliable operation.

ADLP Address
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Shows the system ADTRAN Data Link Layer Protocol (ADLP) address for connecting remote devices to
ADTRAN management software. The allowable range is between 2 and 65520. Enter a value not used by
any other ADTRAN units controlled by the management software.

Session Timeout
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the number of seconds the terminal session must remain idle before the session times out (valid
range 0 to 65535). You can enter zero to deactivate this option (the session will never time out).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

83

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Config Menu Descriptions
Max Telnet Sessions

Max Telnet Sessions
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can be active at the same time. Enter a number
between 0 and 12 in this field.
If you enter zero in MAX TELNET SESSIONS, you will not be able to use Telnet. Only enter
zero if you want to completely lock out Telnet access.

Ethernet Port
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port. The following options are available for
review and editing:
Port Name

Defines the name of the Ethernet port. You can leave this field blank.

IP Address

Lists the address assigned to the base Ethernet port. This address is in dotted
decimal notation (four decimal numbers, each in the range of 0 to 255, separated
by periods). Default value is 10.0.0.1. The IP address is used for the
10/100BaseT Ethernet interface. Obtain the correct IP address from your LAN
administrator.

Default Gateway

Defines or changes the default gateway. Enter the default gateway address by
entering a decimal number into the appropriate field and then pressing 
to move to the next field. You will need a default gateway if the LAN contains
multiple segments. This address is in dotted decimal notation (four decimal
numbers, each in the range of 0 to 255, separated by periods). This value is set
to 0.0.0.0 by default. Contact your LAN administrator for the appropriate
address.

Subnet Mask

Defines which part of a destination IP address contains the network number.
This address is in dotted decimal notation (four decimal numbers, each in the
range of 0 to 255, separated by periods). Default value is 255.255.255.0 by
default. This part of the destination IP address is used along with the
ATLAS 800 Series IP address to determine which nodes must be reached
through the default IP gateway.

MAC Address

Read-only field displays the system Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC)
address.

Ethernet Speed

Defines the rate at which the Ethernet port operates. Choose from 10 MBPS or
AUTO 10/100. When the unit is set for Auto 10/100, the ATLAS 800 Series auto
detects the data rate of the LAN and sets itself to that rate, either 10 or
100 Mbps.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

84

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Config Menu Descriptions
Admin Port

Admin Port
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Accepts input for configuring the ADMIN port located on the rear of the unit.
Port Name

Defines the name of the ADMIN port. You can leave this field blank.

Port Type

Specifies whether you use DIRECT or DIAL mode. DIRECT mode is used when
connecting to a VT100 terminal, and DIAL mode is used for modem access.

Port Speed

Specifies the baud rate of the port. Select either 2400, 9600, 19200, or 38400. If
you are using DIAL for PORT TYPE, ensure that the PORT SPEED setting matches
the modem baud rate.

Modem Initialization
String

Specifies the initialization string for a modem. Refer to your modem
documentation for acceptable initialization strings. The default value will set
most modems to the appropriate configuration for the ATLAS 800 Series.

Initialize Modem

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Sends the modem initialization string to the modem. When you select this
command, the following message displays: Please verify a modem is connected
to the Admin port before continuing. Confirm (y/n). Ensure that a modem is
connected before selecting Y.

Flow Control

This option sets the flow control for the ADMIN port. You may configure the
ADMIN port flow control for NONE or HARDWARE.

Craft Port
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Accepts input for configuring the CRAFT port located on the front of the unit.
Port Name

Defines the name of the CRAFT port. You can leave this field blank.

Port Speed

Specifies the baud rate of the port. Select either 2400, 9600, 19200, or 38400 to
match the VT100 terminal (or emulator) settings.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

85

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Config Menu Descriptions
SNMP

SNMP
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a way to configure SNMP access for the ATLAS. The following options are available for review
and editing:
SNMP Access

Defines whether SNMP access to the ATLAS is enabled or disabled. Select the
appropriate option.

SNMP Communities

Defines SNMP manager(s) characteristics as follows:.

Submenus

Description

IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the network manager.

Privileges

Defines the GET (read-only) and GET/SET (read and write) privileges.

Get Name

Defines the community name for GET access. This value must match the GET
name defined on the network management station. PUBLIC is the default name.

Set Name

Defines the community name for SET access. This value must match either the
GET or SET name defined on the network management station. PUBLIC is the
default name

Trap Transmission

Enables and disables SNMP trap transmission.

Authen Trap
Transmission

Enables and disables the authentication failure trap.

Traps Destination

Defines the destination for SNMP traps as follows:

Submenus

Description

IP Address

Identifies the IP address for the network manager (NM) to sends traps.

Community Name

Defines the community name for trap destinations. This name must match the
community name defined on the NM.

Trap Filtering

Sets the minimum severity level required for a system event to generate an
SNMP trap. If a trap event occurs with a security level equal to or more severe
than the trap type’s current threshold setting, the event is sent as an SNMP trap.
(Refer to the ADTRAN Technical Support web page (www.adtran.com) for a
listing of all MIBs containing traps and their security levels.) The following
threshold levels for the available selections: DISABLED, CRITICAL, MAJOR,
MINOR, WARNING, NORMAL, and INFO.

Station Type

To deliver the SNMP trap packet with the COMMUNITY NAME unchanged, define
thE STATION TYPE as NORMAL. If you are using T-Watch PRO, define the STATION
TYPE as T-WATCH MGMT and append the COMMUNITY NAME with “.ADLP
ADDRESS.” Within the SNMP trap packet, this field is automatically updated
before it is sent to the management station.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

86

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

DS1 Current Perf
Thresholds

System Config Menu Descriptions
SNMP

Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics recorded
in a 15-minute interval. Refer to the ADTRAN Enterprise MIB and the DS1
Extension MIB (available on the ADTRAN website at www.adtran.com) for
more MIB-specific information. If a statistic value exceeds its threshold value,
then the corresponding Alert Trap will be sent if the alert event is armed and
Alert Traps are enabled. These thresholds apply to all DS1 interfaces in the
system.

Submenus

Description

Current ES Thrsh

Current 15 minute Errored Seconds (ES) parameter. The default value is 65 for
an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current SES Thrsh

Current 15 minute Severely Errored Seconds (SES) parameter. The default
value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current SEFS Thrsh Current 15 minute Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) parameter. The

default value is 2 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.
Current UAS Thrsh

Current 15 minute Unavailable Seconds (UAS) parameter. The default value is
10 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current CSS Thrsh

Current 15 minute Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) parameter. The default value
is 1 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current PCV Thrsh
(D4)

Current 15 minute Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type
is Super Frame (AT&T D4 format) DS1. The default value is 72 framing errors
for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current PCV Thrsh
(ESF)

Current 15 minute Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type
is Extended Super Frame DS1. The default value is 13,296 CRC errors for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current LES Thrsh

Current 15 minute Line Errored Seconds (LES) parameter. The default value is
65 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Current LCV Thrsh

Current 15 minute Line Code Violations (LCV) parameter. The default value is
13,340 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

87

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

DS1 Total Perf
Thresholds

System Config Menu Descriptions
SNMP

Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics. Refer to
the ADTRAN Enterprise MIB and DS1 Extension MIB (available on the
ADTRAN website at www.adtran.com) for more MIB specific information. If a
statistic value exceeds its threshold value, then the corresponding Alert Trap
will be sent if the alert event is armed and Alert Traps are enabled. These
thresholds apply to all DS1 interfaces in the system.

Submenus

Description

Total ES Thrsh

Total Errored Seconds (ES) parameter. The default value is 648 for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total SES Thrsh

Total Severely Errored Seconds (SES) parameter. The default value is 100 for
an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total SEFS Thrsh

Total Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) parameter. The default value is
17 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total UAS Thrsh

Total Unavailable Seconds (UAS) parameter. The default value is 10 for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total CSS Thrsh

Total Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) parameter. The default value is 4 for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total PCV Thrsh
(D4)

Total Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type is Super
Frame (AT&T D4 format) DS1. The default value is 691 framing errors for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total PCV Thrsh
(ESF)

Total Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type is Extended
Super Frame DS1. The default value is 132,960 CRC errors for an approximate
BER level of 10E-5.

Total LES Thrsh

Total Line Errored Seconds (LES) parameter. The default value is 648 for an
approximate BER level of 10E-5.

Total LCV Thrsh

Total Line Code Violations (LCV) parameter. The default value is 133,400 for
an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

88

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

ASP Endpoint
Communities

System Config Menu Descriptions
Event Logging

(Write security: 0; Read security: 0)
Configures the ADLP list used when accepting incoming traps from remote
ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 units. For a trap to be recognized and
sent to the network management station listed in the Traps Destination field, the
remote unit must be listed in the ASP Endpoint Communities list. The ADLP
Address and ADLP Password parameters must be configured.

Submenus

Description

ADLP Address

Enter the ADLP address (Unit ID) of the remote unit. Only traps containing an
ADLP address listed here will be accepted.

ADLP Password

Enter the ADLP password (Unit Password) of the remote unit. The password
will be verified before traps will be accepted from the remote unit.

SNMP/ASP Proxy

(Write security: 0; Read security: 0)
Enables or disables Get_Request capabilities for remote units. When enabled,
this feature allows SNMP requests to be sent from the Network Management
Station through the ATLAS 800 Series to the selected remote unit. Remote units
must be ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 products. All remote units must
be listed in the ASP ENDPOINT COMMUNITIES list.

SNMP/ASP Polling

(Write security: 0; Read security: 0) Enables or disables trap polling through the
ATLAS 800 Series to remote ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 units.
When enabled, this feature allows the ATLAS 800 Series to forward any traps
received from remote units to the Network Management Station listed in the
TRAPS DESTINATION field. The remote unit must be listed in the ASP ENDPOINT
COMMUNITIES for the traps to be forwarded.

Event Logging
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the system event severity level threshold for each of the ATLAS 800 Series system event types. When
a system event occurs, the event is logged if the event’s severity level is equal to or more severe than the
event type’s current threshold setting. See System Event Log on page 353 for detailed information on the
system events.

Syslog Setup
Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Configures the ATLAS 800 Series Syslog client for use with a Syslog server (supplied with ADTRAN
Utilities or available on most UNIX platforms).
Transmission

(Write security: 3; Read security: 3) Enables or disables the transmission of log
events to the external Syslog server

Host IP Address

(Write security: 3; Read security: 3) Lists the IP address of the external server
that is running the Syslog host daemon.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

89

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Host Facility

System Config Menu Descriptions
Real Time Clock

(Write security: 3; Read security: 3)
Specifies the facility destination of log events. Facilities are located on the host
and are managed by the Syslog host daemon running on either a UNIX machine
or a PC. For details on the ADTRAN syslog server host facilities, please refer to
Section 7, ADTRAN Utilities, on page 367.

Real Time Clock
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides access to the two options listed below. You can review and edit these options.
Current Time/Date

Displays the current date and time, including seconds. To edit this field, enter
the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm), and enter the date in
mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 09-23-1998).

Auto Daylight Savings

When enabled, automatically updates the time and date when Daylight Savings
Time starts and when Standard Time ends.

Access Passwords
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Provides a way to edit passwords and to add new users and passwords. All menu items are protected by
passwords of varying security levels. By assigning different passwords to different security levels, the
ATLAS 800 Series system administrator can control which users can change various menu items. You can
assign multiple passwords at the same access level. This way, different users with the same access
privileges can have different passwords. Each of the six password security levels is described in Table 1 on
page 68.
Label

Defines a username.

Password

Allows you to change the password (the default password is “password”). The
current password displays as a series of asterisks (********). The password can
contain up to a combination of 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters,
spaces, or special characters.

Access Rights

Defines the password level for the corresponding label. You can select from six
different password levels (see Table 1 on page 68).

Active

Displays the number of users currently logged into the system for each label.

Licenses
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

(Not currently used.) Provides menus to enable the optional ATLAS 800 Series feature upgrades.
Feature

Names the ATLAS 800 Series feature upgrade.

License Key

Displays the license key of the feature upgrade.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

90

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Config Menu Descriptions
Bonding Config

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the feature upgrade.

Lic Cnt

Displays the number of instances of the feature that the license provides. This
field may not be applicable for a given feature—if it is not, this field is blank.

Status

Reflects the status, PERMANENT or TEMPORARY, of the feature upgrade license
key.

Bonding Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration submenus available for the BONDing Module. This configuration is shared
among all BONDing Modules.Time is given in seconds
TXINIT Timer

Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect the
BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint before deciding the
BONDING call has failed.

TXFA Timer

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the BONDING
frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the BONDING call has
failed. When interoperating with other manufacturers' BONDING equipment, it
may be necessary to change this time so that it matches TXADD01.

TXADD01 Timer

Specifies the length of time both endpoints wait for additional calls to be
connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the BONDING call has
failed. The factory default setting is sufficient for most calls to connect,
although when dialing overseas it may be necessary to lengthen this timer to
allow for slower call routing.

TXDEQ Timer

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the network
delay between the bearer channels before deciding the BONDING call has
failed.

TANULL Timer

Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect the
BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint before deciding
the BONDING call has failed. It may be necessary to shorten this timer if the
DTE equipment using the BONDING module also has timer constraints for
completing non-BONDING parameter negotiation.

TCID Timer

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an agreeable
value for bearer channels and channel capacities before deciding the BONDING
call has failed.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

91

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Call Stagger

System Config Menu Descriptions
Alarm Relay Reset

Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing BONDING
sessions. The following call stagger values are available:

Submenus

Description

No Stagger

There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

500 ms

Wait approximately ½ second between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

1 sec

Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

2 sec

Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

Alarm Relay Reset
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears the Alarm Relay located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890. Activating the software Alarm Relay
Reset functions the same as manually pressing the ACO Switch located on the ATLAS 890 front panel.

Alarm Relay State
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the alarm relay response during an active alarm. The following sections are available:
Energized

In an alarm condition, the Normally Open (NO) relay is closed and the
Normally Closed (NC) relay is opened.

De-Energized

In an alarm condition, the NO relay is opened and the NC relay is closed.

Alarm Relay Threshold
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the event log category for the message associated with the alarm. For more details on Event Log
categories refer to System Event Log on page 353.

Ext. Input Threshold (ATLAS 890)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the alarm level and text for external switch contacts. If the external switch contact is closed, the
alarm is thrown and the event text is sent to the event log.
Name

Read security: 5
Displays the name External Input to identify the entry for the external input
alarm.

Description

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Contains the user-defined text that will be sent to the ATLAS 800 Series event
log when the alarm is triggered.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

92

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Level

System Config Menu Descriptions
Ext. Input Alarm (ATLAS 890)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Defines the event log category for the message associated with the alarm. For
more details on event log categories, refer to Section 7, System Event Log.

Ext. Input Alarm (ATLAS 890)
Selects the condition that will trigger an External Input Alarm.
Present

The alarm activates when a signal is present.

Absent

The alarm activates when a signal is absent.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

93

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

6.

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Update Firmware

SYSTEM UTILITY MENU DESCRIPTIONS

Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6. System Utility Menu

Update Firmware
Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Updates firmware when ATLAS 800 Series enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available
for use in updating any modules that contain Flash memory—including the ATLAS 800 Series system
controller. The first transfer method uses the ATLAS 800 Series serial Admin port of the system controller
and XMODEM protocol. The second transfer method uses the ATLAS 800 Series built-in Ethernet port of
the system controller and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). For more details on updating firmware,
please refer to DLP-6, Updating ATLAS Firmware using TFTP and DLP-7, Updating ATLAS Firmware using
XMODEM.
Module Slot

Displays the slot you selected for firmware updating. When this option first
appears, NONE SELECTED displays. When you move the cursor to this field and
press , a dialog box opens, allowing you to select various slots or ALL
MODULES OF A TYPE.

Module Type

Reflects the module type selected in MODULE SLOT. The selections only include
upgradable modules.

Transfer Method

Lists the two transfer methods for updating firmware after selecting a module
slot: XMODEM and TFTP. XMODEM transfers files by connecting to a
communications program that supports XMODEM uploads to the terminal
interface. TFTP transfers files by specifying an appropriate server address and
filename.

TFTP Server IP
Address

61200780L1-1C

(Available for TFTP transfers only). Configures the IP address of the TFTP
Server on which the update file resides. The ATLAS 800 Series uses this field to
locate the network server on which the update file resides.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

94

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Update Status

TFTP Server Filename

(Available for TFTP transfers only). Identifies the name of the update file to
retrieve from the TFTP Server. Enter the full path name and filename for the
file.

Restart Schedule

Indicates when to restart the updated module to invoke the new software, after
selecting a module slot. The two options include RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER
UPDATE and RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME.

Submenus

Description

Restart Immediately
After Update

Automatically restarts the module or unit (when SLOT 0 is selected)
immediately after the update is complete.

Restart At Specified
Date and Time

Lets you specify a date and time to automatically restart the updated module or
unit (when Slot 0 is selected). When you select this option, a new field called
Restart Date and Time displays below the current field.
Restart Date
and Time

Current Update Status

Defines the date and time to restart the system after updating.
Enter the time using a 24-hour format (i.e., 23:25:30 for 11PM,
25 minutes, 30 seconds). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format
(i.e.,11-08-2000).

If MODULE SLOT is set to ALL MODULES OF A TYPE, the following fields appear;
otherwise, this field simply indicates the status of the current update.

Submenu

Description

Slot

Indicates the slot number.

Module type

Indicates the module type for the chosen expansion slot.

Current Update StatusIndicates the status of the current update.
Previous Update
Status

Indicates the status of the previous update.

Previous Update Status If MODULE SLOT is set to ALL MODULES OF A TYPE, this information appears
under CURRENT UPDATE STATUS; otherwise, this field simply indicates the status

of the previous update.
Begin Firmware Update This field begins or cancels an update of the specified module(s).

Update Status
Read security: 5

Displays the status of the current firmware update. These fields are identical to those previously defined in
Current Update Status.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

95

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Config Transfer

Config Transfer
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

(Available with TFTP transfers only.) Sends a file containing the ATLAS 800 Series configuration to a file
on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol through the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. CONFIG TRANSFER also
lets you save the ATLAS 800 Series configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration
with multiple ATLAS 800 Series units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file
from a TFTP server.
To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the ATLAS 800 Series called
TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a
configuration file.
Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. The TCP/IP
parameters are not saved or overwritten as part of an ATLAS 800 Series unit’s transferred configuration;
therefore, identical configurations can be sent to multiple units. For complete details on configuration
transfers to/from the ATLAS 800 Series, please refer to DLP-8, Saving the Current Configuration using
TFTP.
Transfer Method

TFTP Server
IP Address

TFTP Server
Filename

Current Transfer
Status

Previous Transfer
Status

Load and Use Config

Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server.
Currently, TFTP is required.
Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this address information from
your System Administrator.
Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from
the TFTP server. The default name is at830.cfg, but it is editable.
Read security: 5
Indicates the current status of the transfer.
Read security: 5
Indicates the status of the previous transfer.
Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field
from the server. To start this command, enter Y. To cancel this command,
enter N.
If you execute the LOAD AND USE CONFIG command, ATLAS
retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new
configuration.

Save Config Remotely

61200780L1-1C

Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server
identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y. To
cancel this command, enter N.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

96

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
System Utilization

System Utilization
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Displays statistics related to the ATLAS 800 Series internal operating system. Please check with ADTRAN
Technical Support before attempting to use this menu.

System Selftest
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Initiates a system self-test. The self-test consists of memory tests and data integrity tests for each installed
module.
Self-tests disrupt data flow.

Selftest

Activates the self-test. To confirm self-test activation, press Y; to cancel the
self-test press N.

Selected Tests

Allows the user to select a system-wide test or an individual card test. Choose
from ALL TESTS, SLOT: 0 SYS CTRL, or any other installed option/network
module.

Current Test Status

Displays which part of self-test is active. See View Selftest Log ON PAGE 97 for
details on individual tests.

Current Slot/Port

Displays which slot and port are being tested.

View Selftest Log

(Read security: 5) Displays time-stamped log of the tests conducted and the
Pass/Fail results. Self-tests verify data integrity and processor control to each
port. Each port is looped back and a data pattern is sent and tested. The result of
the self-test on each installed port is listed with Pass/Fail results. Figure 7
depicts a typical test log.

Figure 7. View Self-test Log

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

97

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Ping

Submenu

Description (Self-test Log)

Idx

Index number of the log.

Time

Time and date of the log entry.

Sl

ATLAS 800 Series slot number.

Pt

ATLAS 800 Series port number.

Event

Event description.

Result

Show PASS/FAIL results

Submenu

Description (System Controller)

Flash

Flash memory checksum verified

BootRom

Boot ROM checksum verified

DSP RAM

Memory associated with the Digital Signal Processor

RTC RAM

Memory associated with the real time clock

NV Batt

Tests the battery associated with non-volatile memory

TDM RAM

Memory associated with mapping TDM bandwidth

DRAM

Dynamic RAM used for program execution

HDLC

The High-Level Data Link Controllers

Card Tst

Tests the data path for each slot in the system with an installed option module.

Port Tst (0.1, 0.2)

Built-in T1/PRI ports located on the rear panel

Clear Selftest Log

Clears the self-test log.

Ping
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows you to send pings (ICMP echo requests) to devices accessible via the Ethernet interface.

Only one ping session can be active at a time.

IP Address

Specifies the IP address to ping.

Count

Specifies the number of pings to send. The default value is 4, and the maximum
value is 99.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

98

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
ATEL Client

Size (Bytes)

Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request. The default
value is 64 bytes, and the maximum size is 1024 bytes.

Timeout (ms)

Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out.
The default timeout is 3 seconds (3000), and the maximum timeout value is 10
seconds (10,000).

Round Trip Min

Read security: 5
Displays the minimum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current
set of pings.

Round Trip Avg

Read security: 5
Displays the average round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current set
of pings.

Round Trip Max

Read security: 5
Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current
set of pings.

Tx Stats

Read security: 5
Displays the number of ping requests transmitted (n TXED), the number of ping
replies received (n RXED), and the number of ping requests that were lost (n
LOST).

Reset Stats

Resets all ping statistics to zero. If the ping client is active, this menu will stop
it.

Start/Stop

If the ping client is currently idle, this menu sends pings to the specified
address. If the ping client is active, the menu either starts or stops sending pings.

ATEL Client
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows a user to remotely configure ADTRAN TSUs using ADLP over the inband management channel
on a V.35 port. This feature only allows for remote sessions through the ATLAS 800 Series to the TSUs,
not vice versa.
ATEL Address

Defines the ADLP address (Unit ID) assigned to the remote unit you are trying
to connect to. The valid range is 2 to 65520.

Connect

Activator used to start an ATEL client session to the remote unit configured in
the ATEL ADDRESS field.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

99

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Telnet Client

Telnet Client
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 800 Series route table.
Address.

Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to.

Escape Char

Defines the Telnet client escape character. Typing the combination characters
will close the active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS
field.

Option

Keystroke

^]

 + ]

^\

 + \

^[

 + [

^^

 +  + 6

^_

 +  + -

Port

Defines the IP port used in the remote login session. Default (for Telnet) is 23

Connect

Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the
ADDRESS field.

Client Status
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays status from current Telnet client sessions.
User Name

In an active Telnet client session, displays the username (from access passwords
list).

Session ID

Displays the remote units IP address followed by the IP port of an active Telnet
client session (in the format IP.IP.IP.IP:PORT).

Control Switch Schedule (ATLAS 890)
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies when a controller switch from active to standby will occur.
Controller Switch
Immediate

A forced controller switch will occur immediately.

Controller Switch at
Time

Controller switch will occur at the specified date and time. When this option is
selected, a new field called CTRL SWITCH DATE AND TIME will be displayed
below the current field.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

100

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

System Utility Menu Descriptions
Force Controller Switch (ATLAS 890)

Force Controller Switch (ATLAS 890)
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Forces the switch from active to standby to occur immediately.

Reboot System
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Reboots the ATLAS 800 Series system. When you select this command, the following message displays:
** WARNING ** This will reboot the entire system and service will be interrupted!
Press Y to reboot the system or N to cancel the command.

Factory Default System
Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Resets the entire system to the factory default settings. To reset the system, press Y. To cancel this
command, press N. When you select this command, the following message displays:

This will delete all configuration settings. ADTRAN recommends making a backup
copy of the configuration before defaulting the system.

Alarm Relay Test (ATLAS 890)
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

TOGGLE TEST MODE / TOGGLE set the amount of time for which the alarm relay test mode is active. Change
the amount of time by placing the cursor over the TOGGLE field and pressing the “.” key to increases the
amount of test time and the “,” key to decreases the amount of test time. The displayed time is in seconds.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

101

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

7.

Modules Menu Descriptions
Slt

MODULES MENU DESCRIPTIONS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The MODULES menu provides status information and menu options that allow you to configure and control
the installed option modules, as well as the network ports (see Figure 1).

Figure 8. Modules Menu

If you install a module in a slot, then want to install a different type of module in the slot,
you must set this field to Empty before selecting another module type.
If a module is installed, the module type automatically shows the name of the installed
module, and it cannot be set to any other option.

Slt
Read security: 5
ATLAS 830

Displays the eight module slots and the system controller slot (which includes the two built-in T1/PRI
ports located on the rear panel).
ATLAS 890

Display the four types of slots: system controller, option module, option module or power supply, and
power supply only.
• The two controller slots are designated SCUA and SCUB for system controller units A and B.
• The 13 option module slots are designated 1 through 13.
• The three hybrid option module or power supply slots are designated 14 through 16.
• Slot 17 is used for power supplies only.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

102

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modules Menu Descriptions
Type

Inserting modules into inappropriate slots will result in damage to the ATLAS.
ATLAS 830:
• Auxiliary power supplies are for use in Slots 7 and 8 only.
ATLAS 890:
• System Controller modules are for use in the controller slots SCUA and SCUB only.
• Option Modules are for use in the option module slots 1-16 only.
• Power supplies are for use in the power supply slots 14-17 only.

Type
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the type of module actually installed in the slot or the type of module you plan to install in the
slot. The ATLAS controller automatically detects the type of module installed in each slot, and the TYPE
field automatically defaults to the installed module type. You can also use this field to preconfigure a unit
before actually installing modules by specifying the module that you want to install in each slot.
To use this option, navigate to the field you want to edit and press . For empty slots, a list of all the
available module types displays. Select the one you want and it displays in the TYPE field. If this field is
already configured with a module, you can only set this field to EMPTY. To change from one module type to
another, you must set the field to EMPTY first.

Menu
Read security: 5

Displays additional status and configuration menus for the ATLAS controller or selected module. To
access the submenus for this item, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MENU column for the module you
want to edit, and press . For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module,
refer to the modules menus discussion for the appropriate option or resource module.

Alarm
Read security: 5

Displays whether there is an alarm condition on the ATLAS controller or selected module. Press 
to access the ALARM menu. For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module, refer to
the following sections for the appropriate option or resource module alarm menu discussions.

Test
Read security: 5

Displays whether the ATLAS controller or selected module is executing a test. Press  to access the
TEST menu. This option will allow you to setup and initiate tests. You may also access this menu through
the MENU submenu on this screen. For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module,
refer to the following sections for the appropriate option or resource module test menu discussions.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

103

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modules Menu Descriptions
State

State
Read security: 5

Displays whether the ATLAS controller or selected module is online or offline. Even though a module is
physically installed, it must be marked ONLINE for it to be considered an available resource. This parameter
allows an installed module to be marked OFFLINE, which may be useful in system troubleshooting. If you
choose OFFLINE, the module will not be in alarm condition, but will display OFFLINE. While in OFFLINE, the
STATUS LED will flash green. A module will automatically change to the ONLINE state when installed.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays status information on the installed modules as follows:
Online

The module is enabled and is responding to the system controller’s status polls.
This is the normal response of the system.

No Response

The module is enabled but is not responding to the system controller’s status
polls. This response indicates a problem in the system or that the module is not
properly installed.

Empty

The system controller has not detected the presence of a module in the system;
nor has a module been manually enabled for this option slot.

Offline

The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user. The module is still
responding to controller polls.

Offline/No Response

The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user. The module is not
responding to controller polls.

Not Supported

The module is not supported by the current system configuration.

Rev
Read security: 5

Displays the hardware revision of the ATLAS and installed modules.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

104

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Info

QUAD T1/PRI OPTION MODULE
This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad T1/PRI
Option Module (P/N 1200185L3). The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the
presence of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as MODULES
(T1/PRI)). To see the menus for the Quad T1/PRI Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow
keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press  to access the module choices. The following menu
tree shows the hierarchy of the menus discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number

Alarm Status

DS0 Status

DS0 Alarms

Sig Status

Prt

Serial Number

Alarms

Board Revision

Rx Level

PLL Status

Performance Current, [15Min, and 24Hr]

Configuration

Test

Prt

Prt

Prt

Clr

Port Name

Loc LB

ES

Frame

Remote LB

BES

Code

Pattern

SES

Tx Yel

QRSS/RLB Results

SEFS

Tx Prm

CLR

LOFC

LBO

Inj

CSS

LB Accept

UAS

Pulse Density

LCV

ADLP

PCV
LES

Info
Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Quad T1/PRI Option Module.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module.

Serial Number

Displays the module’s serial number.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the module.

PLL Status

Indicates whether the module phase lock loop is locked to its specific source.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

105

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Alarm Status

Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays the current T1 alarm status.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Displays the following alarm conditions on the ATLAS 800 Series unit. Press
 to access this menu item.

Alarm Types

Descriptions

LOS

Indicates a loss of signal detected on port interface.

RED

Indicates inability to frame data received on the port. Alternately referred to as
Out of Frame (OOF).

YELLOW

Receiving remote alarm (RAI) on port.

BLUE

Receiving unframed all ones from the port Alarm Indicator Signal (AIS).

DS0 ALARM

Displays per-DS0 alarm status; that is, at least one DS0 channel is in alarm if an
asterisk (*) appears. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the
protocol that has been configured for the DS0.
Receive level indicates the strength of the signal (in dB) received on the port.

Rx Level

DS0 Status
Read security: 5

The following characters indicates usage on a DS0-basis.

Character

Description

-

Unallocated

*

Inactive

+

Signaling mismatch

A

Active B Channel

D

Active D Channel

M

Maintenance

N

Dedicated (nailed)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

106

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
DS0 Alarms

Character

Description

O

Off hook - originate (RBS)

R

Ringing (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

W

Waiting dial tone

DS0 Alarms
Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has
been configured for the DS0.
.

Character

Description

-

No Alarm DS0

D

D Channel Alarm (ISDN)

F

Frame Alarm (packet)

T

TBOP Alarm (packet)

P

PPP Alarm (packet)

Sig Status
Read security: 5

Indicates the signaling of all 24 DS0s. The A/B bits for Rx (receive) and Tx (transmit) DS0s are shown.
Dashes display for those DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being transferred by the
ATLAS 800 Series.

Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for the T1/PRI port. Except for
CLR, these fields are all read-only. The monitored parameters include the following
Prt

Displays the port number.

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES

Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR one or more
Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

107

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Performance 15Min

BES

Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but less than 320
error events.

SES

Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error events OR
one or more Out Of Frame events.

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive
errored framing patterns.

LOFC

Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern
could not be obtained.

CSS

Controlled Slip Second.

UAS

Unavailable Second

LCV

Line Code Violation.

PCV

Path Code Violation.

LES

Line Errored Second.

Performance 15Min
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to Performance Current for a detailed
description of these fields.

Performance 24Hr
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to Performance Current for a detailed
description of these fields.

Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate
ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Port Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the ATLAS 800 Series.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

108

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Test

Frame

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
This line framing field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to
which it is connected, available from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or
ESF.

Code

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
Set this line encoding field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is
connected (this information is available from the network supplier). Choose
either AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) or B8ZS (Bipolar Eight Zero
Substitution).

Tx Yel

Controls the transmission of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

Tx Prm

Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the
facility data link (FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT
PRM is turned off (possible only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

LBO

Selects the Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface. When connecting
an ATLAS 800 Series port to a DSX-1 interface, this parameter is typically set
to match the distance (in feet) between the ATLAS 800 Series and the device
with which it is connecting. When you select this item, a list of choices displays
(0 DB, -7.5 DB, -15 DB, -22 DB, 266 FT, 399 FT, 533 FT, 655 FT). Select the
appropriate option.

LB Accept

Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined
in ANSI T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

Pulse Density

Choose either ON or OFF. Pulse Density Enforcer ON causes the ATLAS 800
Series to monitor for ones (1s) density violations and insert a one (1) when
needed to maintain ones at 12.5%. This data insertion causes data errors.

ADLP

Read security: 5
The ADTRAN Data Link Protocol (ADLP) provides a communications link
between ADTRAN equipment over point-to-point or multidrop connections that
can be used for configuration and monitoring remote ADTRAN devices.
Choose ENABLE to activate the ADLP over the FDL for the DS1 interface. (For
ADTRAN use only.)

Test
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
.

Prt

61200780L1-1C

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

109

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Loc LB

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Test

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Causes loopback on near-end (local) port (see Figure 3 on page 74). The
following options are available:

Options

Description

Line

Metallic loopback

Payld

Payload loopback; framing and clocking are regenerated.

Remote LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Sends loopback code to remote CSU. The following options are available:

Options

Description

AT&T Inband line

(ESF/D4) - Full 1.544 Mbps loopback of the signal received from the network
(metallic loopback).

ANSI FDL Line

(ESF) - Full 1.544 Mbps loopback of the signal received from the network.
Initiated through loopback activation transmission over the facility data link
(FDL).

ANSI FDL Pyld

(ESF) - 1.536 Mbps loopback of the payload data received from the network
maintaining bit-sequence integrity for the information bits by synchronizing
(regenerating) the timing. Initiated through loopback activation transmission
over the facility datalink (FDL).

Inband NIU

(ESF/D4) - Full 1.544 Mbps loopback of the signal received from the network
after passing through the T1 framer of the remote unit.

Pattern

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

Options

Description

All Ones

Framed ones

All Zeros

Framed zeros

QRSS/RLB Results

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros. Displays current
status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns.
When displaying test pattern status, the display string is composed of pattern
sync status and errored seconds:

Status

Description

None

No sync.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

110

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad T1/PRI Option Module
Test

Status

Description

LOS

Sync has been lost.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

CLR

Write security: 3; Read security: 3
Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

Inj

Write security: 3; Read security: 3
Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

Quad T1/PRI
NI CSU
DS1
Payload Loopback
Line Loopback

Figure 9. Loopback Test Diagram

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

111

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Info

QUAD E1/PRA OPTION MODULE
This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad E1/PRA
Option Module (P/N 1200284L1). The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the
presence of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as E1/PRA). To see
the menus for the Quad E1/PRA Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the
MODULES menu and press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the
hierarchy of the menus discussed in this section.
Info

Alarm Status

Part Number

Prt

Serial Number

Alarms

TS0 Alarms

TS0 Status

Sig Status (Port 1-4)

Board Revision

Performance Current
(15min, 24 hr)

Configuration
Prt

Test
Prt

Prt

Name

Loc LB

Clr

FAS2

Pattern

ES

TS16 MF

QRSS Results

BES

CRC-4

Clr

SES

Auto Alarm

Inj

UAS

Code

CSS

TS0 Spare

SEFS

TS16 Spare

DM

Intl Bit

LCV
PCV
LES
LOFC

Info
Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Quad E1/PRA Option Module.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module.

Serial Number

Displays the module’s serial number.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

112

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Alarm Status

Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays any active alarms, as follows:
Prt

Indicates the port number. The Quad E1/PRA Option Module is a single-port
device.

Alarms

Displays the alarm type, as listed below.

Alarm Types

Description

LOS

(Loss of Signal) No signal detected on port interface.

LOF

(Loss of Framing) The receiver is unable to synchronize to the Frame
Alignment Signal (FAS) framing pattern of the received signal.

LOMF

(Loss of Multi-frame) The receiver is unable to synchronize to the TS15
multi-frame pattern of the received signal.

CRC4

(Loss of CRC-4 Framing) The receiver is unable to synchronize to the CRC-4
frame pattern of the received signal.

AIS

(Alarm Indication Signal) An upstream failure has been detected and all ones
are being received.

REM

(Remote Frame Alarm) Loss of frame alarm being received from far end.

REMMF

(Remote Multi-Frame Alarm) Loss of multi-frame alarm being received from
far end.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

113

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
TS0 Alarms

TS0 Alarms
Read security: 5

Displays per-TS0 alarm status. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has
been configured for the TS0.
Character

Description

-

No Alarm TS0

D

D Channel Alarm (ISDN)

F

Frame Alarm (packet)

T

TBOP Alarm (packet)

P

PPP Alarm (packet)

TS0 Status
Read security: 5

The TS0 status indicates usage on a TS0 basis for each port. These options are read-only:
Character

Description

•

Idle

–

Inactive

A

Active call on this TS0

D

Active D Channel TS0

M

Maintenance TS0

N

Dedicated (nailed) TS0

O

Off hook detected

R

Ringing detected

S

Signaling

Sig Status (Port 1-4)
Read security: 5

Displays the state of the A/B/C/D signaling bits for the Quad E1/PRA Option Module. Dashes indicate
TS0s where signaling is not being transferred by the ATLAS 800 Series.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

114

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Performance Current

Performance Current
Write security:5; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in G.821 and RFC 1406 for the E1/PRA port.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES

Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR one or more
Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

BES

Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but less than 320
error events.

SES

Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error events OR
one or more Out Of Frame events.

UAS

Unavailable Second.

CSS

Controlled Slip Second.

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive
errored framing patterns.

DM

Degraded Minutes is the number of minutes with a bit error rate of 10-6 or
greater.

LCV

Line Code Violation.

PCV

Path Code Violation.

LES

Line Errored Second.

LOFC

Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern
could not be obtained.

Performance 15Min
Write security:5; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to Performance Current on page 115
for a detailed description of these fields.

Performance 24Hr
Write security:5; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to Performance Current on page 115 for
a detailed description of these fields.
61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

115

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Configuration

Configuration
Write security:5; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate Access
circuit or a channelized E1 circuit.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Quad E1/PRA Option Module.

FAS2

If enabled, resync if FAS or bit 2 of non-FAS frame is received in error three
consecutive times. If disabled, rSesync if FAS is received in error three
consecutive times.

TS16 MF

Must be enabled for CAS (common associated signaling) to be used. If disabled,
CCS (common channel signaling) is used.

CRC-4

Transmits the CRC-4 checksum bits in the outgoing E1 data stream, when
enabled. Also, checks the received signal for errors.

Auto Alarm

Transmits a remote alarm when framing is lost (when Red Alarm Generation is
on), and transmits an AIS alarm when all ones are received (when RCM AIS
Generation is on).

Code

Allows selection of line coding. HDB3 is normally the only coding method used
on public networks. AMI may be selected for testing purposes.

TS0 Spare

TS0 bits Sa4 through Sa8 in frames not containing the Frame Alignment Signal
may be used in specific applications, but should be set to 1s when crossing an
international border. Enter decimal number whose 5 LSB are to be used for all
Sa4.Sa8 bits. Refer to CCITT G.704 for more information.

TS16 Spare

TS16 in CAS frame 0 contains 3 spare bits: 0000XYXX where ‘X’ marks a
spare bit and ‘Y’ marks an alarm indications to the remote end. Enter a decimal
number whose masked 4 LSB are inserted into TS0 in CAS frame 0. Refer to
CCITT G.704 for more information.

Intl Bit

Bit 0 in all non-CRC4 frames are reserved for international use. They may be
used nationally if the path does not cross an international border. If not
specifically used, the bits should be set to ‘1’ on paths crossing a border. Enter
the international bit value of 0 or 1. Refer to CCITT G.704 for more
information.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

116

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
Test

Test
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Loc LB

Causes loopback on near-end (local) port (see Figure 3). The following options
are available:

Options

Description

None

No loopback active

Line

Metallic loopback

Pattern

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

Options

Description

All ones

Framed ones

All zeros

Framed zeros

QRSS

Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

QRSS Results

Test pattern results that indicate sync and errors of received data pattern.

Clr

Clears test results on QRSS RESULTS field.

Inj

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern. Return receipt of the errors is
displayed in the QRSS RESULTS field.

E1/PRA
NI CSU

Line Loopback

Figure 10. E1/PRA Network Loopback Test Diagram

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

117

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
Info

QUAD NX56/64 OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad Nx 56/64 Option
Module (P/N 1200184L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as V35NX). To see the menus for the
Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu
and press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the
menus discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

PLL/FIFO
Port
PLL/FIFO

Alarm Status
Port
Alarms

Configuration
Port
Name
Clk +/Data
CTS
DCD
DSR
DTR
0 Inh
Inband
Send Leads

DTE Status

Data Rate

Prt
Dte Status

Dial

Port
Rate

Test

Prt
Mode
Dial
Src ID
Number

Port
Loopback
511
511 Result
Inject
CLR

Inband Stats
Port
Rx Frames
Tx Frames
Rx Bytes
Tx Bytes
Tx Accept
Flow Budget
Poll Skips
Rx Overflow
Tx Reset
Link Verify
Remote Fail
Link Verify Ack
Reset Stats

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status.
Port

61200780L1-1C

Indicates the port number.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

118

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Alarms

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
DTE Status

Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 800 Series unit:

Condition

Description

Slip

A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network-side clock (as
set by DS0 assignment).

Pll

The Nx port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network interface.

Zero

The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network
interface.

No Ext Clk

The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock. This alarm displays only if
the Nx port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE.

Pkt Ep Alm

A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing.

DTE Status
Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a
hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.
Prt

Operating port number.

Dte Status

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

Option

Description

RTS

Request to send from DTE.

CTS

Clear to send to DTE.

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE.

DSR

Data set ready to DTE.

DCD

Data carrier detect to DTE.

RI

Ring indicate to DTE.

TD

Transmit data from the DTE.

RD

Receive data toward the DTE.

EC

External clock present.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

119

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
Data Rate

Data Rate
Read security:

Displays the data rate at which each Nx port is currently operating. A port’s data rate is determined by the
number of DS0s assigned to it and the rate per DS0 associated with the active maps.
Port

Operating port number.

Rate

This read-only field displays the data rate for the selected port.

Inband Stats
Read security: 5

Provides information on the following inband channel statistics.
Port

Operating port number.

Rx Frames

The number of frames received on the operating port since system startup.

Tx Frames

The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since system startup.

Rx Bytes

The number of bytes received from the operating port since system startup.

Tx Bytes

The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system startup.

Tx Accept

The number of transmitted frames accepted by the far end.

Flow Budget

The number of times the Inband Flow Budget buffer is exceeded.

Poll Skips

The number of times the Inband Poll is skipped due to box congestion.

Rx Overflow

The number of times the Inband Rx buffer is overflowed.

Tx Reset

The number of times the transmitter is reset.

Link Verify

The number of Link Verify frames received from the far end.

Remote Fail

The number of communication failures with the far end.

Link Verify Ack

The number of Link Verify Acknowledge frames received from the far end.

Reset Stats

Clears inband statistic results.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

120

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
PLL/FIFO

PLL/FIFO
Read security: 5

Displays the Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and FIFO status.
Port

Indicates the operating port.

PLL/FIFO

Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems.

State

Description

Lock

PLL is locked (This is required to transfer data.)

RXE

Receive data FIFO empty.

RXF

Receive data FIFO full.

TXE

Transmit data FIFO empty.

TXF

Transmit data FIFO full.

Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual V.35 ports.
Port

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 17 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Quad V.35 Option Module.

Clk +/-

Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 800 Series to accept the transmit (TX)
data from the DTE. This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is long,
causing a phase shift in the data, the clock can be set to INVERTED. This switches
the phase of the clock, which compensates for a long cable.

Data

Controls the inverting of the DTE data. This inversion can be useful when
operating with a high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol (often used as a
means to ensure 1s density). Select either NORMAL or INVERTED. Data inversion
configuration must match at both ends of the circuit.

CTS

Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. If set to Normal,
CTS will follow the value of Request To Send (RTS). If set to Forced On, CTS
will always be asserted.

DCD

Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, also called
RLSD on V.35 interfaces. If set to Normal, DCD will generally be asserted
when the interface is capable of passing data. If set to Forced On, DCD will

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

121

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
Configuration

always be asserted. If set to Remote RTS, the value of DCD will track the value
of the remote unit’s RTS signal. Note that this feature requires the Inband
control channel to be Enabled.
DSR

Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal. If set to NORMAL,
DSR will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data. If
set to FORCED ON, DSR will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE DTR, the value
of DSR will track the value of the remote unit’s DTR signal. This remote feature
requires the Inband control channel to be ENABLED.

DTR

Determines whether the ATLAS 800 Series treats a connection as permanent
(IGNORE) or connects only when Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is active
(CONNECT ON DTR). Select either IGNORE or CONNECT ON DTR.

0 Inh

When the port detects an uninterrupted string of 0s being transmitted for more
than one second, setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 800 Series
to send 1s toward the network.

Inband

Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the
port’s allocated bandwidth. This channel can be used for management for
ADTRAN products that are not co-located with the ATLAS. Consult the manual
for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on using this feature.

Send Leads

Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads
change state. If any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal, this
option must be enabled. The DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband
control channel, which must be enabled (see Table 2).

Table 2. DTE Lead States
SIGNAL

RTS

V.54
LOOPBACK

511 TEST
ON

SELF
TEST
ACTIVE

NETWORK
TEST
ACTIVE

NO DS0
MAPPED

NETWORK
ALARM

CTS

Follows

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

DCD

—

—

—

Off

Off

Off

Off

DSR

—

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

—

— = Do not care
Force On = On under all conditions

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

122

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
Dial

Dial
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Dials an Nx port that is configured to ignore DTR.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Mode

Configures the dialing mode. The following options are available:

Options

Description

Persistent

Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails.

One Time

Attempt the call only once.

Dial

Write security: 0; Read security: 0
Signals the Nx port to dial/clear the call.

Src ID

Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the
Nx INTERFACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

Number

Indicates the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the Nx INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

Test
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Port

Indicates operating port.

Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

Options

Description

No Loopback

No active loopback.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

123

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
Test

Options

Description

Local Loopback

Activates both a local loopback (back toward the DTE) and a port loopback
(toward the network).

Remote Loopback

V.54 loopback code to be sent to the far end, and if the device at the far end
supports V.54, the device activates a loopback on detection of the V.54 code.

Loopback Status

Read security: 5
This read-only option indicates a port’s current loopback status by displaying
any of the following status messages:
No Loopback
Active
Looping Up Remote Unit
Remote Unit Looped Back
Looping Down Remote Unit
Remote Loop-Up Failed
Port Looped From Remote Source
Port Loopback Active

511

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector.

511 Result

Read security: 5
Displays the results of the 511 test. This option is read-only. Clear these results
by pressing  when CLR is selected.

Results

Description

None

Pattern is not synchronized.

LOS

At one point the pattern was synchronized, but is currently not synchronized.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

Inject

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

124

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Info

USSI OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad USSI Option
Module (P/N 4200261Lx) when it is installed in the system (listed as USSI). To see the menus for the Quad
USSI Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press
 to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

PLL/FIFO
Port
PLL/FIFO

Alarm Status
Prt
Alarms

Configuration
Prt
Name
Clk +/Data
CTS
DCD
DSR

DTE Status
Prt
DTE Status

Dial
Prt
Mode
Dial
Src ID
Number

Data Rate
Port
Rate

Test
Port
Loopback
511
511 Result
Inject
CLR

Inband Stats
Port
Rx Frames
Tx Frames
Rx Bytes
Tx Bytes
Tx Accept
Flow Budget
Poll Skips
Rx Overflow
Tx Reset
Link Verify
Remote Fail
Link Verify Ack
Reset Stats

DTE Interface
Prt
DTE Interface
Mode
Current DTE Type

DTR
0 Inh
Inband
Send Leads

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

125

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Board Revision

USSI Option Module
Alarm Status

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 800 Series unit.

Condition

Description

Slip

A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network-side clock (as
set by DS0 assignment).

Pll

The USSI port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network
interface.

Zero

The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network
interface.

No Ext Clk

The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock. This alarm displays only if
the USSI port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE.

Pkt Ep Alm

A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing.

DTE Status
Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a
hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.
Prt.

Operating port number.

DTE Status

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

Options

Description

RTS

Request to send from DTE.

CTS

Clear to send to DTE.

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE.

DSR

Data set ready to DTE.

DCD

Data carrier detect to DTE.

RI

Ring indicate to DTE.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

126

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Data Rate

Options

Description

TD

Transmit data from the DTE.

RD

Receive data toward the DTE.

EC

External clock present.

Data Rate
Read security: 5

Displays the data rate at which each USSI port is currently operating. A port’s data rate is determined by
the number of DS0s assigned to it and the rate per DS0 associated with the active maps.
Port

Displays operating port.

Rate

Displays the data rate of the selected port.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

127

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Inband Stats

Inband Stats
Read security: 5

Provides information on the inband channel statistics.
Port

Operating port number.

Rx Frames

The number of frames received on the operating port since system startup.

Tx Frames

The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since system startup.

Rx Bytes

The number of bytes received from the operating port since system startup.

Tx Bytes

The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system startup.

Tx Accept

The number of transmitted frames accepted by the far end.

Flow Budget

The number of times the Inband Flow Budget buffer is exceeded.

Poll Skips

The number of times the Inband Poll is skipped due to box congestion.

Rx Overflow

The number of times the Inband Rx buffer is overflowed.

Tx Reset

The number of times the transmitter is reset.

Link Verify

The number of Link Verify frames received from the far end.

Remote Fail

The number of communication failures with the far end.

Link Verify Ack

The number of Link Verify Acknowledge frames received from the far end.

Reset Stats

Clears inband statistic results.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

128

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
PLL/FIFO

PLL/FIFO
Read security: 5

Displays the Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and FIFO status.
Port

Indicates the operating port.

PLL/FIFO

Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems:

State

Description

Lock

PLL is locked (This is required to transfer data.)

RXE

Receive data FIFO empty.

RXF

Receive data FIFO full.

TXE

Transmit data FIFO empty.

TXF

Transmit data FIFO full.

Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual USSI ports.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Quad USSI Option Module.

Clk +/-

Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 800 Series to accept the transmit (TX)
data from the DTE. This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is long,
causing a phase shift in the data, the clock can be set to INVERTED. This switches
the phase of the clock, which compensates for a long cable.

Data

Controls the inverting of the DTE data. This inversion can be useful when
operating with a high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol (often used as a
means to ensure 1s density). Select either NORMAL or INVERTED. Data inversion
configuration must match at both ends of the circuit.

CTS

Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. If set to NORMAL,
CTS will follow the value of Request To Send (RTS). If set to FORCED ON, CTS
will always be asserted.

DCD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, also called
RLSD on some interfaces. If set to NORMAL, DCD will generally be asserted
when the interface is capable of passing data (consult the ATLAS 800 Series

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

129

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Configuration

User Manual for exact conditions.) If set to FORCED ON, DCD will always be
asserted. If set to REMOTE RTS, the value of DCD will track the value of the
remote unit’s RTS signal. Note that this feature requires the Inband control
channel to be ENABLED.
DSR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal. If set to NORMAL,
DSR will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data. If
set to FORCED ON, DSR will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE DTR, the value
of DSR will track the value of the remote unit’s DTR signal. This remote feature
requires the Inband control channel to be ENABLED.

DTR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines whether the ATLAS 800 Series treats a connection as permanent
(IGNORE) or connects only when Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is active
(CONNECT ON DTR). Select either IGNORE or CONNECT ON DTR.

0 Inh

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
When the port detects an uninterrupted string of 0s being transmitted for more
than one second, setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 800 Series
to send 1s toward the network.

Inband

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the
port’s allocated bandwidth. This channel can be used for management for
ADTRAN products that are not co-located with the ATLAS. Consult the manual
for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on using this feature.

Send Leads

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads
change state. If any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal, this
option must be enabled. The DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband
control channel, which must be enabled (see Table 1 on page 130).

Table 3. USSI Module Send Leads
SIGNAL

RTS

V.54
LOOPBACK

511 TEST
ON

SELF
TEST
ACTIVE

NETWORK
TEST
ACTIVE

NO DS0
MAPPED

NETWORK
ALARM

CTS

Follows

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

DCD

—

—

—

Off

Off

Off

Off

DSR

—

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

—

— = Do not care
Force On = On under all conditions

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

130

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Dial

Dial
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Dials a USSI port that is configured to ignore DTR.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Mode

Configures the dialing mode. The following options are available:

Options

Description

Persistent

Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails.

One Time

Attempt the call only once.

Dial

Write security: 0; Read security: 0
Signals the USSI port to dial/clear the call.

Src ID

Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the
USSI INTERFACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

Number

Indicates the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the USSI INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

Test
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Port

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

131

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
Test

Options

Description

No Loopback

No active loopback.

Local Loopback

Activates both a local loopback (back toward the DTE) and a port loopback
(toward the network).

Remote Loopback

V.54 loopback code to be sent to the far end, and if the device at the far end
supports V.54, the device activates a loopback on detection of the V.54 code.

Loopback Status

Read security: 5
This read-only option indicates a port’s current loopback status by displaying
any of the following status messages:
No Loopback Active
Looping Up Remote Unit
Remote Unit Looped Back
Looping Down Remote Unit
Remote Loop-Up Failed
Port Looped From Remote Source
Port Loopback Active

511

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector.

511 Result

Read security: 5
Displays the results of the 511 test. This option is read-only. Clear these results
by pressing  when CLR is selected.

Results

Description

None

Pattern is not synchronized.

LOS

At one point the pattern was synchronized, but is currently not synchronized.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

Inject

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

132

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

USSI Option Module
DTE Interface

DTE Interface
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Configures the Quad USSI Module for the appropriate interface type. Select the parameters matching the
interface cable being used.
Prt.

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

DTE Interface Mode

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the Quad USSI Module interface type. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

Auto

The ATLAS 800 Series will automatically detect the interface type. The cable
must be connected before the interface can be determined.

EIA-530\RS-449\V.36 Configures the interface for EIA-530, RS-449, or V.36 use.
X.21/V.11

Configures the interface for X.21 or V.11 use.

RS-232

Configures the interface for RS-232 use.

Current DTE Type

61200780L1-1C

Read security: 5
Displays the current configuration of the Quad USSI Module DTE Interface.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

133

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal BRI U Option Module
Info

OCTAL BRI U OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Octal BRI Option
Module (P/N 1200186L2) when it is installed in the system (listed as U-BRI). To see the menus for the
Octal BRI Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

Alarms

Channel Usage

Prt
Alarms

Prt
Cha

Performance Current
Prt
Reset
NEBE
FEBE

Configuration
Prt
Port Name

Test
Prt
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Alarms
Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for the selected Octal BRI Option Module.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Displays the current alarm status of each BRI U interface.

Alarm

Description

L1 Down

A layer one alarm is indicated by an asterisk (*) when the BRI U physical layer
is not active. An L1 alarm is present when problems are detected with the
endpoint or a cabling problem.

Channel

Displays the alarm status of each 2B+D channel. A hyphen (–) indicates no
active channel alarm and D indicates an active D channel alarm.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

134

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal BRI U Option Module
Channel Usage

Channel Usage
Read security: 5

Displays the status of each of the BRI U interfaces.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Cha

(Channel) Displays the status of individual channels. The following symbols
may display:

Character

Description

-

Unallocated channel

.

Inactive channel

A

Active B channel

D

Active D channel

Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance field provides status on key performance measures for each of the four Octal BRI U
ports. These fields are all read-only.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Reset

Resets the NEBE and FEBE statistics.

NEBE

Near-end block errors.

FEBE

Far-end block errors.

Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual BRI U interfaces.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Port Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Octal BRI Option Module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

135

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal BRI U Option Module
Test

Test
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Local Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates a local loopback toward the U interface. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

None

No active loopback.

Loopback B1

Loops the first B channel of the interface.

Loopback B2

Loops the second B channel of the interface.

Loopback B1 + B2

Loops both B channels of the interface.

Loopback 2B+D

Loops the entire physical interface.

Remote Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates a loopback towards the controller. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

None

No active loopback.

Loopback B1

Loops the first B channel of the interface.

Loopback B2

Loops the second B channel of the interface.

Loopback 2B+D

Loops the entire physical interface.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

136

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal BRI S/T Option Module
Info

OCTAL BRI S/T OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Octal BRI S/T Option
Module (P/N 1200343L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as ST-BRI). To see the menus for the
Octal BRI S/T Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu
and press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the
menus discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

Alarms
Prt
Alarms
Channel

Channel Usage
Prt
Cha

Configuration
Prt
Port Name

Test
Prt
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback

Info
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Read security: 5
Displays the part number of the module. (Read-only.)

Serial Number

Read security: 5
Displays the serial number of the module. (Read-only.)

Board Revision

Read security: 5
Displays the board revision of the installed module. (Read-only.)

Alarms
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for the selected Octal BRI S/T Option Module.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Displays the current alarm status of each Octal BRI S/T interface.

Alarm

Description

L1 Down

A layer one alarm is indicated by an asterisk (*) when the Octal BRI S/T
physical layer is not active. An L1 alarm is present when problems are detected
with the endpoint or a cabling problem.

Channel

61200780L1-1C

Displays the alarm status of the D-channel alarm. A hyphen (–) indicates no
active channel alarm and D indicates an active D channel alarm.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

137

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal BRI S/T Option Module
Channel Usage

Channel Usage
Read security: 5

Displays the channel status of each of the eight Octal BRI S/T module ports.
Prt

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Indicates the port number.

Cha

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
(Channel) Displays the status of individual channels. The following symbols
may display:

Character

Description

-

Unallocated channel

.

Inactive channel

A

Active B channel

D

Active D channel

Configuration
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows the user to personally identify each port with an appropriate name.
Prt

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Port Name

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Octal BRI S/T Option Module.

Test
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

61200780L1-1C

Identifies the port number.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

138

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Local Loopback

Octal BRI S/T Option Module
Test

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates a local loopback toward the S/T interface. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

None

No active loopback.

Loopback B1

Loops the first B channel of the interface.

Loopback B2

Loops the second B channel of the interface.

Loopback B1 + B2

Loops both B channels of the interface.

Loopback 2B+D

Loops the entire physical interface.

Remote Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Activates a loopback towards the controller. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

None

No active loopback.

Loopback B1

Loops the first B channel of the interface.

Loopback B2

Loops the second B channel of the interface.

Loopback 2B+D

Loops the entire physical interface.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

139

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS3 Info

T3 OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 Option Module
(P/N 1200223L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as DS3). To see the menus for the T3 Option
Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press  to
access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus discussed in this
section.

DS3 Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
DS1 Framer Revision
M13 Rev

DS1 Alarm Status
Prt
Alarms

DS1 Performance
Current (15Min, 24hr)
Prt
Clr
ES
BES
SES
SEFS
LOFC
CSS
UAS
PCV

DS3 Performance
DS3 Alarm Status Current (15 m, 24h)
Prt
Prt
Alarms
Clr
FE Alarms
ES_L
Rx Framing
SES_L
LOSS_L
CV_P
ES_P
SAS_P
SES_P
UAS_P

DS1 DS0 Status

DS1
Configuration
Prt
Port Name
Frame
Tx Yel
Tx Prm
LB Accept

DS1 DS0 Alarm

DS3 Configuration
Prt
Port Name
Frame
Tx Clock
LBO

DS3 Test
Prt
Loopback
Remote LB
Remote Status

DS1 Sig Status

DS1 Test
Prt
Loc LB
Remote LB
Pattern
QRSS/RLB
Results
Clr
Inj

DS3 Info
Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Option Module.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the Option Module.

Serial Number

Displays the module’s serial number.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

140

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS3 Alarm Status

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the module.

DS1 Framer Revision

Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module.

M13 Rev

Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module.

DS3 Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status of the T3 interface.
Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the
presence of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are
monitored:

Alarms

Description

LOS

Loss of Signal. No T3 signal detected on the port interface.

Red

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T3 cannot be frame-synchronized. A
Red Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

Blue

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) or Blue Alarm. Receiving AIS in the T3 payload
from far-end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

Yellow

Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from
far-end equipment indicating the far-end equipment is in Red Alarm.

FE Alarms

Displays received alarms from the far-end equipment.

Rx Framing

Indicates whether Rx framing is being used on the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*)
indicates the presence of Rx framing and a dash (-) indicates no Rx framing
present.

DS3 Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.231-1993 for DS3 interfaces.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES_L

(Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive zeros, LOS, or
BPVs, not due to line code substitutions.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

141

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS3 Performance 15Min

SES_L

(Severely Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive zeros,
LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code substitutions above a predetermined
threshold.

LOSS_L

(Loss of Signal Second - Line) Count of seconds of LOS condition.

CV_P

(Code Violation - Path) For the M13 applications, an accumulation of P-bit
parity errors. For the C-bit parity application, an accumulation of CP-bit parity
errors.

ES_P

(Errored Second - Path) An accumulation of seconds during which any one of
the following conditions exist: parity errors, severely errored frame, or AIS
signal received.

SAS_P

(SEF/AIS Second) An accumulation of seconds during which severely errored
frame or AIS signal is received.

SES_P

(Severely Errored Seconds - Path) An accumulation of seconds during which
parity errors, severely errored frames, or AIS signal is received.

UAS_P

(Unavailable Seconds - Path) An accumulation of one-second intervals during
which the DS3 path is unavailable; i.e., 10 contiguous SES_Ps.

DS3 Performance 15Min
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS3 Performance Current for a
detailed description of these fields.

DS3 Performance 24Hr
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS3 Performance Current for a
detailed description of these fields.

DS3 Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the T3 interface.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number

Port Name

Enter any text up to 15 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the DS3
Option Module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

142

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS3 Test

Frame

Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit. Selections are M13 or C-BIT.

Tx Clock

Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock. The following options are available:

Options

Description

Recovered

Unit derives transmit T3 timing from the receive T3.

Internal

Unit derives transmit T3 timing from the internal ±20 PPM crystal source.
Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one
INTERNAL transmit clock. Failure to configure these clocks will
result in T3 clock slips.

LBO

Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

Short

0 to 100 feet of cable

Long

100 to 450 feet of cable

DS3 Test
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Executes loops and indicates test status.
Prt

Read security: 5
Indicates the T3 port under test.

Loopback

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates the present loopback selected. The following options will
display:

Options

Description

None

No loopback in effect

Line

T3 line loopback active

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

143

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Remote LB

T3 Option Module
DS1 Alarm Status

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and
may be used to execute remote loopbacks on the far-end T3 equipment. The
following options are available:

Options

Description

None

No remote loopbacks are activated

DS3 Line

T3 line loopback active

DS1 #1... DS1 #28

Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated

DS1 All Line

Remote T1 line loopbacks for all 28 T1s is activated

Remote Status

Options

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks. The following options
will display:
Description

Line Loopback Active Remote line loopback is active.
No Loops Active

Remote line loopbacks are inactive.

DS1 Alarm Status
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates T1 alarm status.
Prt

Read security: 5
Indicates the number of the T1 circuit (1-28).

Alarms

Read security: 5
Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits. An asterisk (*) indicates
the presence of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms
are monitored:

Alarms

Description

Red

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T1 cannot be frame-synchronized. A
Red Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

144

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS1 DS0 Status

Alarms

Description

Yellow

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end
equipment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

Blue

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the
T1 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

DS0 Alarm

Displays per-DS0 alarm status; that is, at least one DS0 channel is in alarm if an
asterisk (*) appears. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the
protocol that has been configured for the DS0.

DS1 DS0 Status
Read security: 5

Displays by port the status of all 24 DS0s, as follows:
Character

Description

- (dash)

Unallocated

. (period)

Inactive

+

Signaling mismatch

A

Active B channel

D

Active D channel

M

Maintenance

N

Dedicated (nailed)

O

Offhook-originate (RBS)

R

Ringing (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

W

Waiting for dialtone

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

145

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS1 DS0 Alarm

DS1 DS0 Alarm
Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These alarms usually indicate the failure to
receive the protocol that has been configured for the DS0.
Character

Description

-

No Alarm DS0

D

D Channel Alarm (ISDN)

F

Frame Alarm (packet)

T

TBOP Alarm (packet)

P

PPP Alarm (packet)

DS1 Sig Status
Read security: 5

Read-only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DS0s for each T1 in the T3 circuit. The A/B bits for Rx
(receive) and Tx (transmit) DS0s are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 and ESF framing. Dashes
display for those DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being transferred by the ATLAS 800
Series.

DS1 Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for the T1/PRI port. Except for
CLR, these fields are all read-only.
Prt

Displays the T1 number (1-28).

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected T1.

ES

Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR one or more
Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

BES

Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but less than 320
error events.

SES

Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error events OR
one or more Out Of Frame events.

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive
errored framing patterns.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

146

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 Option Module
DS1 Performance 15Min

LOFC

Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern
could not be obtained.

CSS

Controlled Slip Second.

UAS

Unavailable Second

PCV

Path Code Violation.

DS1 Performance 15Min
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS1 Performance Current on page
141 for a detailed description of these fields.

DS1 Performance 24Hr
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS1 Performance Current on page
141 for a detailed description of these fields.

DS1 Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate
ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the T1 number.

Port Name

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each T1 in the T3 circuit

Frame

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is
connected, available from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

Tx Yel

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Controls the transmission of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

Tx Prm

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the
facility data link (FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT
PRM is turned off (possible only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

147

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

LB Accept

T3 Option Module
DS1 Test

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined
in ANSI T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

DS1 Test
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the T1 number.

Loc LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Causes loopback on near-end (local) port. See Figure 3 on page 143. The
following options are available:

Options

Description

None

No loopback is active.

Line

Loopback without regenerating framing.

Payld

Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated.

Remote LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Sends loopback code to remote CSU. The following options are available:

Options

Description

AT&T Inband line

Works in ESF and D4 mode

ANSI FDL Line

Requires ESF mode

ANSI FDL Payload

Requires ESF mode

Inband NIU

Works in ESF and D4 mode

Pattern

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

Options

Description

None

No test pattern transmitted

All ones

Framed ones

All zeros

Framed zeros

QRSS

Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

148

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

QRSS/RLB Results

T3 Option Module
DS1 Test

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks
and test patterns. When displaying test pattern status, the display string is
composed of pattern sync status and errored seconds.

Status

Description

None

No sync.

LOS

Sync has been lost.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

Clr

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

Inj

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

T3 Module
T1 Payload Loopback

T1 Framer #1
T3 Line Loopback

M13
Mux

T3
Front
End

T1 Framer #28

Figure 11. Network Loopback Tests

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

149

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module

T3 D&I OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 with Drop and Insert Option
Module (P/N 1200225L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as DS3 D&I). To see the menus for the
T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES
menu and press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the
menus discussed in this section.

DS3 Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
DS1s Dropped
DS1 Framer Revision
M13 Rev

DS3 Test
Prt
Loopback
Remote LB
Remote Status

DS1 Performance
Current (15M, 24H)
Prt
Clr
ES
BES
SES
SEFS
LOFC
CSS
UAS
PCV

61200780L1-1C

Mux Configuration
DS1 Disposition
DS1s Dropped
DS1s Passed Thru
DS1 Pair 1-2 through
DS1 Pair 27-28

DS1 Alarm Status

DS3 Alarm Status
Prt
Alarms
FE Alarms
Rx Framing

DS1 DS0 Status

DS3 Performance
Current (15M, 24H)
Prt
Clr
ES_L
SES_L
LOSS_L
CV_P
ES_P
SAS_P
SES_P
UAS_P

DS1 DS0 Alarm

DS3 Configuration
Prt
Port Name
Frame
Tx Clock
LBO

DS1 Sig Status

Prt
Alarms

DS1 Configuration
Prt
Port Name
Frame
Tx Yel
Tx Prm
LB Accept

DS1 Test
Prt
Loc LB
Remote LB
Pattern
QRSS/RLB
Results
Clr
Inj

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

150

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS3 Info

DS3 Info
Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Option Module.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the option module.

Serial Number

Displays the module’s serial number.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the module.

DS1s Dropped

Displays the number of T1 circuits configured for use in the ATLAS 800 Series
system and not passed through to the drop and insert interface.

DS1 Framer Revision

Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module.

M13 Rev

Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module.

Mux Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows users to define which T1s should be dropped for use in the ATLAS 800 Series system or passed on
to the drop and insert interface. T1s are dropped in pairs.
DS1 Disposition

Read security: 5
This field has 28 letters, each corresponding (from left to right) to T1s 1-28
delivered on the T3 primary interface. The following letters will display:

Characters

Descriptions

D

Dropped (available for use in the ATLAS 800 Series system)

P

Pass through to the drop and insert (secondary) T3 interface

DS1s Dropped

Read security: 5
This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit (in the primary
interface) that are available for use in the ATLAS 800 Series system.

DS1s Passed Thru

Read security: 5
This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit (in the primary
interface) that are being passed out the drop and insert (secondary) interface to
other equipment.

DS1 Pair 1-2 through
DS1 Pair 27-28

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
These fields indicate which pairs of T1s of the T3 circuit connected to the
primary interface are selected to be dropped or passed through to the secondary
interface.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

151

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS3 Alarm Status

DS3 Alarm Status
Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status of the primary and secondary T3 interfaces.
Prt

Read security: 5
Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Read security: 5
Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the
presence of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are
monitored:

Alarm

Description

LOS

Loss of Signal. There is no T3 signal detected on the port interface.

Red

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T3 cannot be frame-synchronized. A
Red Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

Blue

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the
T3 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

Yellow

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end
equipment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

FE Alarms

Read security: 5
Displays received alarms from the far-end equipment.

Rx Framing

Indicates whether Rx framing is being used on the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*)
indicates the presence of Rx framing and a dash (-) indicates no Rx framing
present.

DS3 Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.231-1993 for DS3 interfaces.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES_L

(Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive zeros, LOS, or
BPVs, not due to line code substitutions.

SES_L

(Severely Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive zeros,
LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code substitutions above a predetermined
threshold.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

152

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS3 Performance 15Min

LOSS_L

(Loss of Signal Second - Line) Count of seconds of LOS condition.

CV_P

(Code Violation - Path) For the M13 applications, an accumulation of P-bit
parity errors. For the C-bit parity application, an accumulation of CP-bit parity
errors.

ES_P

(Errored Second - Path) An accumulation of seconds during which any one of
the following conditions exist: parity errors, severely errored frame, or AIS
signal received.

SAS_P

(SEF/AIS Second) An accumulation of seconds during which severely errored
frame or AIS signal is received.

SES_P

(Severely Errored Seconds - Path) An accumulation of seconds during which
parity errors, severely errored frames, or AIS signal is received.

UAS_P

(Unavailable Seconds - Path) An accumulation of one-second intervals during
which the DS3 path is unavailable; i.e., 10 contiguous Sysop.

DS3 Performance 15Min
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS3 Performance Current on
page 145 for a detailed description of these fields.

DS3 Performance 24Hr
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS3 Performance Current on
page 145 for a detailed description of these fields.

DS3 Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the T3 interface.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number

Port Name

Enter any text up to 15 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the DS3
Option Module.

Frame

Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit. Selections are M13 or C-BIT.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

153

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Tx Clock

T3 D&I Option Module
DS3 Test

Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock. The following options are available:
Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one
INTERNAL transmit clock. Failure to configure these clocks will
result in T3 clock slips.

Formats

Description

Internal

The ATLAS 800 Series will derive transmit T3 timing from the internal ±20
PPM crystal source.

Recovered

The ATLAS 800 Series will derive transmit T3 timing from the receive T3.

LBO

Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter. The following options are
available:

Options

Description

Short

0 to 100 feet of cable

Long

100 to 450 feet of cable

DS3 Test
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Executes loops and indicates test status.
Prt

Read security: 5
Indicates the T3 port under test.

Loopback

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates the present loopback selected. The following options will
display:

Options

Description

None

No loopback in effect

Line

T3 line loopback active

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

154

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Remote LB

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 Alarm Status

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and
may be used to execute remote loopbacks on the far-end T3 equipment. The
following options are available:

Options

Description

None

No remote loopbacks are activated

DS3 Line

T3 line loopback active

DS1 #1... DS1 #28

Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated

DS1 All Line

Remote T1 line loopbacks for all 28 T1s is activated

Remote Status

Options

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks. The following options
will display:
Description

Line Loopback Active Remote line loopback is active.
No Loops Active

Remote line loopbacks are inactive.

DS1 Alarm Status
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates T1 alarm status.
Prt

Read security: 5
Indicates the number of the T1 circuit (1-28).

Alarms

Read security: 5
Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits. An asterisk (*) indicates
the presence of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms
are monitored:

Alarm

Description

Red

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T1 cannot be frame-synchronized. A
Red Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

Yellow

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end
equipment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

155

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 DS0 Status

Alarm

Description (Continued)

Blue

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the
T1 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

DS0 Alarm

Displays per-DS0 alarm status; that is, at least one DS0 channel is in alarm if an
asterisk (*) appears. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the
protocol that has been configured for the DS0.

DS1 DS0 Status
Read security: 5

Indicates usage on a DS0 basis for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These options are read-only:
Character
-

Description

Unallocated

. (period) Inactive
+

Signaling mismatch

A

Active B Channel

D

Active D Channel

M

Maintenance

N

Dedicated (nailed)

O

Off hook - originate (RBS)

R

Ringing (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

W

Waiting dial tone

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

156

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 DS0 Alarm

DS1 DS0 Alarm
Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These alarms usually indicate the failure to
receive the protocol that has been configured for the DS0.
Character

Description

-

No Alarm DS0

D

D Channel Alarm (ISDN)

F

Frame Alarm (packet)

T

TBOP Alarm (packet)

P

PPP Alarm (packet)

DS1 Sig Status
Read security: 5

Read-only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DS0s for each T1 in the T3 circuit. The A/B bits for Rx
(receive) and Tx (transmit) DS0s are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 and ESF framing. Dashes
display for those DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being transferred by the ATLAS 800
Series.

DS1 Performance Current
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key
performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for the T1/PRI port. Except for
CLR, these fields are all read-only.
Prt

Displays the T1 number (1-28).

Clr

Clears performance information for the selected T1.

ES

Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR one or more
Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

BES

Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but less than 320
error events.

SES

Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error events OR
one or more Out Of Frame events.

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive
errored framing patterns.

LOFC

Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern
could not be obtained.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

157

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 Performance 15 Min

CSS

Controlled Slip Second.

UAS

Unavailable Second

PCV

Path Code Violation.

DS1 Performance 15 Min
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS1 Performance Current for a
detailed description of these fields.

DS1 Performance 24Hr
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS1 Performance Current for a
detailed description of these fields.

DS1 Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate
ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the T1 number.

Port Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each T1 in the T3 circuit

Frame

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is
connected, available from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

Tx Yel

Controls the transmission of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

Tx Prm

Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the
facility data link (FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT
PRM is turned off (possible only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

LB Accept

Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined
in ANSI T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

158

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 Test

DS1 Test
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the T1 number.

Loc LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Causes loopback on near-end (local) port. See Figure 9 on page 152. The
following options are available:

Options

Description

None

No loopback is active.

Line

Loopback without regenerating framing.

Payld

Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated.

Remote LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5 - Sends

loopback code to remote CSU. The

following options are available:
Options

Description

AT&T Inband line

Works in ESF and D4 mode

ANSI FDL Line

Requires ESF mode

ANSI FDL Payload

Requires ESF mode

Inband NIU

Works in ESF and D4 mode

Pattern

Write security: 4; Read security: 5 - Test

pattern to be transmitted out the port.

The following options are available:
Options

Description

None

No test pattern transmitted

All ones

Framed ones

All zeros

Framed zeros

QRSS

Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

159

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

QRSS/RLB Results

T3 D&I Option Module
DS1 Test

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks
and test patterns. When displaying test pattern status, the display string is
composed of pattern sync status and errored seconds.

Options

Description

None

No sync.

LOS

Sync has been lost.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

T3 (D&I) Module
T1 Payload Loopback

T1 Framer #1
T3 Line Loopback

M13
Mux

T3
Front
End

T1 Framer #28

Figure 12. Network Loopback Tests
Clr

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

Inj

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

160

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dual Video Option Module
Info

DUAL VIDEO OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 830 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Dual Video Option Module
(P/N 4200773Lx) when it is installed in the system. To see the menus for this module via the terminal
menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press  to access the module choices.
The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus discussed in this section.
Info

Alarm Status

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

DTE Status

Prt
Alarms

PLL/FIFO

Prt
DTE Status

Configuration

Port
PLL/FIFO

Test

Prt
Name
Clk +/Data
CTS
DCD
DSR
DTR
0 Inh

Prt
Loopback
Loopback Status
511
511 Result
CLR
Inject

Data Rate
Port
Rate

DTE Interface
Prt
DTE Interface Mode
Current DTE Type

Info
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number, and board revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module. (Read-only.)

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module. (Read-only.)

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module. (Read-only.)

Alarm Status
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status of the DTE interface.
Prt

61200780L1-1C

Indicates the port number.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

161

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Alarms

Dual Video Option Module
DTE Status

Displays an alarm condition on the DTE interface.

Alarm

Description

SLIP

A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network-side clock (as
set by DS0 assignment).

PLL

The Video Module DTE port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the
network interface.

ZERO

The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network
interface.

No Ext Clk

The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock. This alarm displays only if
the Video Module DTE port is configured to get its transmit clock from the
DTE.

DTE Status
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a
hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.
Prt

Operating port number.

DTE Status

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

Options

Description

RTS

Request to send from DTE.

CTS

Clear to send to DTE.

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE.

DSR

Data set ready to DTE.

DCD

Data carrier detect to DTE.

RI

Ring indicate to DTE.

TD

Transmit data from the DTE.

RD

Receive data toward the DTE.

EC

External clock present.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

162

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dual Video Option Module
Data Rate

Data Rate
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays data rate at which each port is currently operating.
Port

Indicates port number.

Rate

Displays the data rate at which each Video Module DTE port is currently
operating. A port’s data rate is determined by the number of B channels
assigned to it and the rate per channel associated with the active call.

PLL/FIFO
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and FIFO status.
Port

Indicates the operating port.

PLL/FIFO

Displays the PLL and FIFO status.

Options

Description

Lock

PLL is locked (This is required to transfer data.)

RXE

Receive data FIFO empty.

RXF

Receive data FIFO full.

TXE

Transmit data FIFO empty.

TXF

Transmit data FIFO full.

Configuration
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Describes the configurable parameters which apply to the individual Video Module DTE ports.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Name

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each DTE port on the Video Module.

Clk +/-

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 800 Series to accept the transmit (TX)
data from the DTE. This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is long,
causing a phase shift in the data, the clock can be set to INVERTED. This switches
the phase of the clock, which compensates for a long cable.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

163

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dual Video Option Module
Configuration

Data

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Controls the inverting of the DTE data. This inversion can be useful when
operating with a high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol (often used as a
means to ensure 1s density). Select either NORMAL or INVERTED. Data inversion
configuration must match at both ends of the circuit.

CTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. If set to NORMAL,
CTS will follow the value of Request To Send (RTS). If set to FORCED ON, CTS
will always be asserted.

DCD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, also called
RLSD on V.35 interfaces. If set to NORMAL, DCD will generally be asserted
when the interface is capable of passing data. If set to FORCED ON, DCD will
always be asserted.

DSR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal. If set to NORMAL,
DSR will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data. If
set to FORCED ON, DSR will always be asserted.

DTR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the response to DTR transitions. Table 4 lists the configuration options
for the DTR parameter with respect to the current configuration for the module
in the Dial Plan.

Table 4. DTR Descriptions
Dial Method (Dial Plan) DTR Setting

Dial on DTR

Recognize DTR Call is dialed when DTR is high and disconnects when DTR
goes low.
Ignore DTR

RS-366

Call is dialed regardless of DTR state and must be
disconnected manually.

Recognize DTR Call is dialed if DTR is already high and disconnected when
DTR goes low.
Ignore DTR

61200780L1-1C

Call will never connect.

Recognize DTR Call is dialed if DTR is already high and disconnected when
DTR goes low.
Ignore DTR

Manual

Description

Call is dialed regardless of DTR state and must be
disconnected manually.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

164

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

0 Inh

Dual Video Option Module
Test

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
When the port detects an uninterrupted string of 0s being transmitted for more
than one second, setting this parameter to On will cause the ATLAS 800 Series
to send 1s toward the network.

Test
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Prt

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Indicates the port number.

Loopback

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
The Video Module supports both local and remote loopbacks. The following
options are available:

Options

Description

No Loopback

No active loopback.

Local Loopback

Activates both a local loopback (back toward the DTE) and a port loopback
(toward the network).

Remote Loopback

Initiates a local loopback request sent to the remote Video Module. This allows
for end-to-end circuit test.

The REMOTE LOOPBACK option is only supported for Dual Video
Module to Dual Video Module applications.

Loopback Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
This read-only option indicates a port’s current loopback status by displaying
any of the following status messages:
No Loopback Active
Looping Up Remote Unit
Remote Unit Looped Back
Looping Down Remote Unit
Remote Loop-Up Failed
Port Looped From Remote Source
Port Loopback Active

511

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector. The 511
pattern is generated inward through the ATLAS system.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

165

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

511 Result

Dual Video Option Module
DTE Interface

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the results of the 511 test. This option is read-only. Clear these results
by pressing  when CLR is selected.

Results

Description

None

Pattern is not synchronized.

LOS

At one point the pattern was synchronized, but is currently not synchronized.

Sync

Pattern is synchronized.

ES

Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

Inject

Write security: 4; Read security: 4
Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

DTE Interface
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Configures the DTE port of the Video Module for the appropriate interface type. Select the parameters
matching the interface cable being used.
Prt

Displays the port number.

DTE Interface Mode

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the DTE port interface type. The following options are available:

Options

Description

Auto

The ATLAS 800 Series will automatically detect the interface type. The cable
must be connected before the interface can be determined.

EIA-530

Configures the interface for EIA-530 use.

V.35

Configures the interface for V.35 use.

RS-449

Configures the interface for RS-449 use.

Loopback

Configures the interface to emulate a connected loopback cable.

Current DTE Type

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 5; Read security: 3
Displays the current configuration of the Video Module DTE Interface.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

166

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
Info

NXT1 HSSI OPTION MODULE
The NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module (P/N 1200771L1) system controller automatically detects the presence of
the NxT1 HSSI Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as NXT1 HSSI). To see the menus
for the NxT1 HSSI Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES
menu and press  to access the module choices. V.35 is available when using the optional adapter
cable (ADTRAN P/N 3125I081). The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus discussed in
this section. (Some of the following menus do not apply when configured for V.35 mode.)
Info

T1 Enable

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision

T1 Menus
Alarm Status
Performance (Curr, 15 min, 24 hr)
Configuration
Test

IMUX Menus
Status
Port Status
Config
Test
Port Test

HSSI/V.35 Menus
Status
Config
Test

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number, and board revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the firmware revision of the installed module.

T1 Enable
Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Configures the NxT1 HSSI Option Module to activate the module’s four built-in T1 interfaces. When
configuring the module to use more than four T1s from other installed T1/T3 modules, set this field to
DISABLED.
The NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module’s four built-in T1 interfaces are activated collectively as a
bundle. Setting the T1 ENABLE menu to ENABLED allows you to map any/all of the
built-in T1 ports to the HSSI interface. Setting the T1 ENABLE menu to DISABLED
requires ALL of the T1s mapped to the HSSI interface to be from other installed T1/T3
modules.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

167

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
T1 Menus

T1 Menus
Read Security: 5

The following T1 Menus provide information about the four T1 interfaces located on the NxT1 HSSI
Option Module. These menus are available only when T1 ENABLE is enabled.
Alarm Status

Read security: 5
Displays the current T1 alarm status.

Submenus

Description

Prt

Indicates the port number.

Alarms

Read security: 5
Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 550 unit. Press  to access
this menu item. Descriptions of the alarms follow:
LOS

Indicates a loss of signal detected on port interface.

Red

Indicates inability to frame data received on the port.
Alternately referred to as Out of Frame (OOF).

Yellow

Receiving remote alarm (RAI) on port.T1 ENABLE.

Rx Level
Performance

Blue

Receiving unframed all ones from the port Alarm Indicator
Signal (AIS).

DS0 Alarm

Displays per-DS0 alarm status; that is, at least one DS0 channel
is in alarm if an asterisk (*) appears. These alarms usually
indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been
configured for the DS0.

(Receive Level) Indicates the strength of the signal (in dB) received on the port.
Write security: 3; Read security: 5
The performance fields (either current, previous 15-minute total, or 24-hour
total) provide status on key performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403
and AT&T TR54016 for the T1/PRI port. All fields except CLR are read-only.
The monitored parameters include the following:

Status

Description

Prt

Displays the port number

CLR

Clears performance information for the selected port

ES

Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR one or more
Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips

BES

Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but less than 320
error events

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

168

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
T1 Menus

Status

Description (Continued)

SES

Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error events OR
one or more Out Of Frame events

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive
errored framing patterns.

LOFC

Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern
could not be obtained.

CSS

Controlled Slip Second

UAS

Unavailable Second

LCV

Line Code Violation

PCV

Path Code Violation

LES

Line Errored Second

Configuration

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is
connected to a Primary Rate ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.

Submenu

Description

Port

Displays the port number.

Port Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the ATLAS 800 Series.

Frame

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is
connected, available from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

Code

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected (this
information is available from the network supplier). Choose either AMI or
B8ZS.

Tx Yel

Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

LBO

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
Selects the Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface. The LBO setting
determines the amplitude of the transmitted signal. For short haul
(intra-building) applications, choose from the ft options. For long haul (out of
plant) applications, choose from the dB options. When you select this item, a
list of choices displays. Select the appropriate option.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

169

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Test

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
IMUX Menus

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

Submenu

Description

Prt

Displays the port number.

Loc LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5Causes loopback on near-end (local) port
(see Figure 13 on page 175). The following options are available:
Line

Metallic loopback

Payld

Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated

IMUX Menus
Read Security: 5

Contains the inverse muxing configuration parameters for the NxT1 HSSI Option Module.
Status
Submenu

Description

Least Dly Port

Link relative delay in milliseconds

Max Diff Dly

Maximum difference in delay in milliseconds

T1: FE State

Far-end state

T1: NE state

Near-end state

T1: FE Fail

Far-end failure state

T1: NE Fail

Near-end failure state

T1: #FE Fail

Number of far-end failures

T1: #NE Fail

Number of near-end failures

# Tx Active

Number of transmit active links

# Rx Active

Number of receive active links

T1: # PM Ticks

Number of PM ticks

T1: TX Cell Rate

Transmit cell rate

T1:Tx Cell Rate

Receive cell rate

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

170

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
IMUX Menus

Port Status
Submenu

Description

Port

Port number

T1: Clr
Link State

Link status: active or inactive.

Link Delay

Link relative delay in milliseconds.

NE Tx State

Link near-end transmit state: Not in Group,

NE Rx State

Link near-end receive state: Not in Group

NE Tx Fail

Link near-end transmit failure state: No failure

NE Rx Fail

Link near-end receive failure state: No failure

# NE Tx Fail

Number of near-end transmit failures

# NE Rx Fail

Number of near-end receive failures

OCD

Out of cell delineation

LOC

Loss of cell delineation

CBO

Cell buffer overflow

UEH

Number of uncorrected errorred headers

CEH

Number of corrected errored headers

Rx cells

Number of received cells

Facility Lpbk

Facility loopback status

Terminal Lpbk (HSSI) Terminal loopback status (HSSI)
Rx Packets

61200780L1-1C

Number of packets received

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

171

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Config

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
IMUX Menus

Read Security: 5; Write Security: 5
Parameters include T1 data streams to the HSSI interface.

Option

Description

Prt

Indicates the port number. Displays the port number for the T1s mapped to the
NxT1 HSSI interface. Ports 1 through 4 are the T1 interfaces located on the
NxT1 HSSI Option Module. Ports 5 through 8 are T1s mapped to the NxT1
HSSI Option Module in the Dedicated Maps.

Grp Assoc

Associates T1s (either mapped to this card and/or the on-board T1s) with the
HSSI interface data stream. To add the T1 to the data stream, select the GROUP1
option.

Scramble

Enabling the SCRAMBLE option configures the NxT1 HSSI Module to prevent
ones density violations when transmitting ADTRAN IMUX headers on a T1
circuit with AMI line coding. (See note on following page.)
Use extreme caution when disabling the SCRAMBLE option. ADTRAN recommends
enabling the SCRAMBLE option for normal use.

Test

Submenu

Description

Port

HSSI/V.35 port number (1 on 800 series modules)

Facility Lpbk

Port facility local loopback: On or Off

Terminal Lpbk (HSSI) Port TC terminal loopback:
Port Test
Submenu

Description

Port

T1 resource numbers

Facility Lpbk

Port facility local loopback: On or Off

Terminal Lpbk (HSSI) Port TC terminal loopback: On or Off

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

172

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
HSSI/V.35 Menus

HSSI/V.35 Menus
Read Security: 5

Provides status, configuration, and testing parameters for the 50-pin SCSI-II HSSI interface.
Status

Read Security: 5
Displays the current loopback status of the HSSI interface.

Submenus

Description

Port

Indicates the port number.

Ifce Type

Interface type depends on the module’s current status and/or the type of cable
connected to its DTE interface.

Loopback

Displays the current loopback status of the HSSI interface. See Figure 13 on
page 175.:

LA and LB

Local DTE

A local DTE loopback occurs at the DTE port of the DCE, and
is used to test the link between the DTE and DCE (NxT1HSSI
module).

Local Line

A local line loopback occurs in the IMUX engine and is used to
test functionality between the DTE and the IMUX engine.

Remote Line

A remote line loopback occurs at the T1 interface and is used to
test functionality between the DTE and the T1 interfaces.

Displays the status of the loopback circuit A and B signals. LA and LB are
asserted by the DTE to enable a loopback on the DCE and its associated data
communications channel. The options include the following:
LA LB

Loopback

Off Off

No Loopback Active

On

On

Local DTE Loopback is Active

On

Off

Local Line Loopback is Active

Off

On

Remote Line Loopback is Active

Displays the status of the data Terminal equipment AVAILABLE signal. TA will be
asserted by the DTE (independently of CA) when the DTE is prepared to both
send and receive data to and from the DCE. Valid data transmission should not
commence until CA has also been asserted by the DCE. If the data
communications channel requires a keep alive data pattern when the DTE is
disconnected, then the DCE shall supply this pattern while TA is de-asserted.
When using the NxT1 HSSI Module (1200346L2 only) in V.35 mode, TA
displays the status of the Request to Send (RTS) signal. When RTS is active in a
V.35 configuration, Clear to Send (CTS) is also active.
T1:# Rx Chan

61200780L1-1C

HSSI port number of channels in use

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

173

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
HSSI/V.35 Menus

Submenus

Description (Continued)

T1:#Tx Chan

HSSI port number of channels in use

Rx Rate

Displays the current average receive data rate on the HSSI interface.

Tx Rate

Displays the current average transmit data rate on the HSSI interface.

Config

Read Security: 5
Provides configuration parameters for the HSSI interface including data
clocking.

Submenu

Description

Port

Indicates port number.

Port Name

Select port name from drop-down list.

Tx Clk

Controls the clock used by the NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Module to accept the transmit
(TX) data from the DTE. This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is
long, causing a phase shift in the data, the clock can be set to INVERTED. This
switches the phase of the clock, which compensates for a long cable.

CTS (V.35)

Clear to send: Normal, Forced On

DSR (V.35)

Data set ready: Normal, Forced On, Remote DTR

Ifce Auto Deact

Interface auto deactivation: Off, On

DCD (V.35)

Data carrier detect: Normal, forced On, Remote RTS

CA (HSSI)

(Not applicable in V.35 mode.) Asserts the data Communications equipment
AVAILABLE signal from the DCE. CA will be asserted by the DCE,
independently of TA, when the DCE is prepared to both send and receive data to
and from the DTE. This indicates that the DCE has obtained a valid data
communications channel. Data transmission should not commence until TA has
also been asserted by the DTE.

LC

(Not applicable in V.35 mode.) Enables the Loopback Circuit C signal from the
DCE. LC is an optional loopback request signal from the DCE to the DTE,
requesting the DTE provide a loopback path to the DCE.
When using the NxT1 HSSI/V35 Module in V.35 mode, Data Set Ready (DSR) and Data
Carrier Detect (DCD) are always active.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

174

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Test

NxT1 HSSI Option Module
HSSI/V.35 Menus

Select test by port.

Options

Description

Local Lpbk

None, Local Line, T1 Framer, Local DTE

Remote Lpbk (HSSI) None, External DTE

Remote Line Loopback

Local Line Loopback

Local DTE Loopback

NxT1 HSSI

T1 Interfaces

IMUX

DTE

Figure 13. HSSI Interface Loopback Test Diagram

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

175

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal FXS Option Module
Info

OCTAL FXS OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Octal FXS Option
Module (P/N 1200338L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as FXS-8). To see the menus for the
Octal FXS Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

Status

Test

Port
Status
Rx ABCD
Tx ABCD

Port
Test 2W
1kHz Tone
Loopback

Config
Port
Port Name
Rx Gain
Tx Gain
2W Impedance
Coding Scheme

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the assembly revision.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays the status of each of the FXS ports.
Port

Indicates the port number.

Status

Displays the call status of each voice port. This field may display the following:

Status Options

Description

Inactive

The port is preconfigured, but the FXS module is not present.

Disabled

The FXS module is present, but the port is not mapped.

Idle

The FXS port is in an idle state for LS configurations.

Tip-Open

The FXS port tip conductor is high impedance.

Off Hook

The FXS port has detected an off hook condition (loop current flowing).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

176

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal FXS Option Module
Test

Status Options

Description

Reverse Battery

The FXS port has reversed T/R polarity.

Test

This generic FXS port test indicator is used when multiple tests are being run or
the test is not a 2W test.
Active

Active test is currently running.

Off Hook

Active/Reverse Battery test is running, but an off hook
condition is detected.

Rev. Bat

Reverse Battery test is currently running.

Ringing

Ringing test is currently running

Tip Open

Tip Open test is currently running.

Ring GND

Tip Open test is currently running, but ring ground is detected.

(-R) Trip

Ringing test is currently running, but an off hook condition is
detected

Rx ABCD

Receive Signaling bits have local significance only, and represent signaling
between the ATLAS 800 Series Controller and the voice port if the port is
configured in the DIAL PLAN. The bit pattern is formatted ESF RBS.

Tx ABCD

Transmit Signaling bits have local significance only, and represent signaling
between the ATLAS 800 Series Controller and the voice port if the port is
configured in the DIAL PLAN. The bit pattern is formatted ESF RBS.

Test
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Port

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the operating port.

Test 2W

Activates 2W (FXS) tests on a per-port basis. Options include OFF, ACTIVE, TIP
OPEN, REV. BATTERY, DISABLED, and RINGING. The 2W tests will disrupt the
active call on the selected FXS port. Table 5 on page 178 displays the state of
the 2W conductors during each test.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

177

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

TX ABCD

Octal FXS Option Module
Test

Forces the Transmit Robbed Bit Signaling (Tx RBS) to a specified value. Values
include OFF, 0000, 0101, 1010, or 1111.
Calls may be affected when activating the Tx ABCD test. This test is
not valid when the port is used in the DIAL PLAN.

1kHz Tone

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Sends a 1kHz tone into the following locations, based on test selection: Near
sends the tone out the FXS port, while Far sends the tone into the digital PCM
stream of the ATLAS 800 Series controller. These tests are useful for verifying a
voice path.

Loopback

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Activates loopback tests on a per-port basis.

Option

Description

Off

Normal operation.

Analog

Loops the 2W test on itself.

Digital

Loops digital data entering the FXS from the ATLAS controller on itself.

Both

Processes both analog and digital loopback tests.

Loopback tests disrupt the call in progress on the selected FXS port.

Table 5. FXS 2W State Table
Test

Tip Output

Ring Output

Off

No test active

No test active

Active

Ground

Supervision voltage

Tip Open

High impedance

Supervision voltage

Rev. Battery

Supervision voltage

Ground

Disabled*

High impedance

High impedance

Ringing

Ringing voltage

Ringing voltage

* Disables the output of the FXS port; it does not disable the test.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

178

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Octal FXS Option Module
Config

Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual FXS ports.
Port

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Port Name

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Octal FXS Option Module.

Rx Gain

Adjusts the (+)Gain and (-)Attenuation of the relative signal received by the
FXS. The range includes (in dB) +6 (loudest), 3, 0, -3, and -6 (softest).

Tx Gain

Adjusts the (+) Gain and (-) Attenuation of a digital signal transmitted by the
FXS into the digital PCM stream. The range includes (in dB) +6 (loudest), +3,
0, -3, and -6 (softest).
When the digital signal is connected through the PSTN, use a setting of -3 dB.

2W Impedance

Read security: 5
2-wire input impedance is set to 600 ohms +2.16 µF. This is a read-only field.

Coding Scheme

Read security: 5
Displays the current PCM coding scheme. Currently only µ-Law is supported.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

179

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

VCOM Option Module
Info

VCOM OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Voice Compression
(VCOM) Resource Module when it is installed in the system (listed as VCOM-X where X is 8 for
1200221L1, 16 for 1200221L2, 24 for 1200221L3, and 32 for 1200221L4). To see the menus for the
VCOM Resource Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision

Status
Device
Status
Algorithm
Silence
Connection
Frame Type

Config
Configure VCOM Devices
Gain Settings
Current Fax Status
Reset Module

Statistics
Device
Usage Time
ATLAS Frms
ATLAS Drop
VCOM Frms
VCOM Drop
Clear
Reloads

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the current firmware revision of the selected module.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays the status of each of the voice compression resources.
Device

61200780L1-1C

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed. On the
ATLAS 800 Series, packet voice devices are numbered 1-32.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

180

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Status

VCOM Option Module
Status

Read security: 5
Indicates the condition of the individual packet voice device. This field may
display the following:

Options

Description

N/A

This device is not populated on the selected VCOM Resource Module.

Available

This resource is available for voice compression and functioning properly. If a
VCOM-8 Option Module is installed, 8 voice compression resources will be
AVAILABLE and the rest will display N/A. The same principle applies to the
VCOM-16, 24, and 32 Option Modules.

Pending

This resource is currently changing state.

Busy

This resource is currently in use.

Testing

This resource is currently being tested and is not available for use.

Failed

This resource has failed testing and is not available for use.

Reloaded

This resource was reinitialized after excessive errors.

Algorithm

Read security: 5
Denotes the voice compression algorithm being used by the packet voice
device. Any packet voice device can use any available compression algorithm.
When ATLAS 800 Series chooses a packet voice device for a particular call, the
voice compression algorithm is set to match the dial plan endpoint
configuration. Refer to the Frame Relay menu section of this manual for more
information.

Options

Description

N/A

This device has not been assigned a voice compression algorithm.

G.723.1

CCITT G.723.1 compression; 6.3 kbps bandwidth.

Netcoder

Proprietary NETCODER compression; 6.4 kbps bandwidth.

Silence

Voice endpoints continue to originate frame relay traffic during periods of
relative silence. The ATLAS 800 Series expects to receive such silence frames;
therefore, silence compression is DISABLED by default. Some voice endpoints
can be configured so that no silence frames are transmitted during periods of
relative silence. For compatibility with these devices, the ATLAS 800 Series
can be configured to expect that silence suppression is ENABLED; thus, no frame
relay traffic is generated during periods of silence. Both voice endpoints must
agree on the silence suppression setting.

Connection

Read security: 5
Helps identify a suspect packet voice device if a particular call reports poor
quality. The displayed packet identifier and the dial plan endpoint identify the
call using this packet voice device.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

181

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Frame Type

VCOM Option Module
Status

Read security: 5
Displays the kind of frame the ATLAS 800 Series receives from the frame relay
endpoint connected to the VCOM channel, allowing users to monitor the kind of
data being carried on the network and processed by the ATLAS 800 Series. (The
ATLAS 800 Series interprets the most-recently received frame from the
endpoint.)
During a voice connection, the frame type displays as VOICE. For a FAX
connection, a variety of frame types display. Initially, VOICE displays indicating
that although the call has completed, the answering FAX machine has not yet
announced its 2100 HZ tone. After completing the 2100 Hz, both FAX
endpoints repeat a V.21 cycle for each page of the FAX document.
Each packet the ATLAS 800 Series receives from its connected frame relay
endpoint is classified into one of the following groups:

Frame Options

Description

Blank

No frame has yet been received from the endpoint, or a FAX connection is
between protocol states.

DTMF

Dual-tone, multi-frequency (DTMF) digit received.

Voice

Receiving voice frames. A connection to a FAX endpoint shows a VOICE status
until the FAX protocol is established.

2100 Hz Tone

FAX single-frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX session.

V.21

FAX single-frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX page.

V.27ter (2400 bps)

FAX data reception of 2400 bps using protocol V.27ter.

V.27ter (4800 bps)

FAX data reception of 4800 bps using protocol V.27ter.

V.29 (7200 bps)

FAX data reception of 7200 bps using protocol V.29.

V.29 (9600 bps)

FAX data reception of 9600 bps using protocol V.29.V.33 (12000 bps)

V.33 (1200 bps)

FAX data reception of 12000 bps using protocol V.33.

V.33 (14400 bps)

FAX data reception of 14400 bps using protocol V.33
Some voice compression standards may be used only under specific licensing
arrangements due to existing patents. The ATLAS 830 provides complete management
of these licensed resources; therefore, users are not required to take additional steps to
ensure conformance with licensing provisions. For example, the ATLAS 830 manages
its resources so users never exceed the maximum licensed number of simultaneous
connections.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

182

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

VCOM Option Module
Config

Config
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Provides diagnostic tools for suspected problems; under normal operation, users do not configure the
packet voice devices.
Configure VCOM
Devices

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Contains configuration parameters for individual VCOM devices.

Submenu

Description

Device

Read security: 5 - Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device
listed. On the ATLAS 800 Series, packet voice devices are numbered 1-32

State

Write security: 4; Read security: 5 - Controls the configuration state of the
individual packet voice device. The ATLAS 800 Series determines the initial
configuration state of each device. ATLAS uses this configuration information
to determine which packet voice devices are functional and may be used, which
are defective and should not be used, or which are not present on the module
and should not be used. Users who suspect an individual packet voice device of
improper operation can manually disable that device to prevent ATLAS from
attempting to use it. The possible states are defined as follows:

61200780L1-1C

Deferred

Devices which fail built-in testing are automatically marked as
DEFERRED, indicating that the ATLAS 800 Series declines to
use the device.

Available

The device is properly functioning and can be used when
required. The ATLAS 800 Series automatically marks devices
that pass built-in testing as AVAILABLE.

Disabled

Marking a device as DISABLED prevents the ATLAS 800 Series
from attempting to use it. You can mark a device currently in
use as disabled without disturbing the connection, but the
device will not be eligible for use in future calls until you
re-mark it as AVAILABLE. This is helpful if you suspect that a
particular device is malfunctioning and do not want any calls
routed to it.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

183

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Gain Settings

VCOM Option Module
Statistics

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Contains the configuration for output and input gain for the VCOM Resource
Module.

Submenu

Description

Output Gain

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Output gain is applied in the receive direction. Choices range from +12 dB
(loudest) to -12 dB (softest) in 3 dB increments. This setting takes affect
immediately.

Input Gain

Write security: 3; Read security:
Input gain is applied in the transmit direction. Choices range from -12 dB
(softest) to +12 dB (loudest) in 3 dB increments. This setting does not affect
currently active calls.

Current Fax Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Enables or disables fax over packet capability using the voice compression
module.

Reset Module

Returns the module to its default settings (only available on the ATLAS 890).

Statistics
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Device

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed. On the
ATLAS 800 Series, packet voice devices are numbered 1-32.

Usage Time

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Measures the total elapsed time that a packet voice device has the status BUSY.
The time is expressed with millisecond precision. Available packet voice
devices are assigned new connections using a round-robin technique where all
other available packet voice devices must be used before a given device is
assigned a new connection. This scheme tends to use all packet voice devices
evenly. If a given device shows significantly less elapsed usage time than other
packet voice devices on the same ATLAS 800 Series, that device may be faulty.

ATLAS Frms

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
(ATLAS Frames) Counts every frame that the ATLAS 800 Series sends to or
receives from the packet voice device. This count indicates activity but does not
indicate the actual amount of frame relay data exchanged. The total number of
frames handled by the packet voice device is given by the following equation:
Frames ATLASTotal = Frames ATLAS + Frames ATLASDropped

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

184

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

VCOM Option Module
Statistics

See ATLAS Drop on page 171 for a description of the term: Frames ATLASDropped
ATLAS Drop

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
A counter that measures each frame that is dropped or discarded during
communication between the ATLAS 800 Series and the packet voice device;
i.e., ATLAS Frames Dropped. The exchange protocol is designed so that no
frames should be discarded during this operation. A consistent pattern of
dropped frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet
voice device or an overloaded ATLAS 800 Series system.
The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network-level performance
management, but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 830 unit.
Persistently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 830 unit or the
Voice Compression Resource Module.

VCOM Frms

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Counts every frame successfully sent to or received from the ATLAS 800 Series
system controller. This is an indication of activity but does not indicate the
actual amount of packet data exchanged. The following equation gives the total
number of frames handled for this packet voice device by the ATLAS 800
Series:
Frames VCOMTotal = Frames VCOM + Frames VCOMDropped

See VCOM Drop on page 172 for a description of the term: Frames VCOMDropped
VCOM Drop

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Counter that measures each frame dropped or discarded by ATLAS 800 Series
during communication with the ATLAS 800 Series system controller about a
packet voice device. The exchange protocol is designed so that no frames
should be discarded during this operation. A consistent pattern of dropped
frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet voice device
or an overloaded ATLAS 800 Series system.
The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network-level performance
management but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 830 unit.
Persistently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 830 unit or the
VCOM module.

Clear

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Resets the elapsed usage time and frame counters for this packet voice device.
Ordinarily, users won’t reset these performance measurements. However, this
feature can be useful when testing that a suspected problem has been resolved
and when zeroing the various counters would make observing future events
easier.
Resetting these performance counters has no effect on the performance values
accessible via the SNMP network management interface.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

185

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Reloads

61200780L1-1C

VCOM Option Module
Statistics

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Number of times since module reboot that this device has been reloaded due to a
failure.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

186

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module
Info

NX 56/64 BONDING RESOURCE MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Nx 56/64 BONDing
Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as IMUX). To see the menus
for the Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the
MODULES menu and press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the
hierarchy of the menus discussed in this section.
Info

Status

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision

Status
NumB Channels
Data Rate
Bonded EP

Configuration
TXINIT Timer (sec)
TXFA Timer (sec)
TXADD01 Timer (sec)
TXDEQ Timer (sec)
TANULL Timer (sec)
TCID Timer (sec)
Call Stagger

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the current firmware revision of the Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource
Module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

187

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module
Status

Status
Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of a particular BONDING session.
Status

Displays the current status of the BONDING session.

Options

Description

Idle

Indicates the number of Idle BONDING resources for a particular BONDING
engine.

Reserved

BONDING resources reserved for a BONDING session that is in the process of
coming up.

Negotiating

A single channel is connected and negotiating the BONDING call for a
particular BONDING session.

Add Channels

The initial BONDING negotiation was successful, and the ATLAS 800 Series is
in the process of adding channels to the BONDING session.

BONDING

The remaining channels were brought up successfully, and the BONDING
session is now ready to pass data.

Terminated

The BONDING session has been terminated for some reason and is in the
process of freeing BONDING resources.

NumB Channels

Displays the number of bearer channels used in this BONDING session. When
the number is displayed in the format X/Y, Y is the number of BONDING
resources reserved for this session, and X is the number of calls belonging to
this session that are up. If just a number is displayed, then all calls are up, and
the number displayed is the number of BONDING resources in use for this
session.

Data Rate

Displays the data rate for this BONDING session. The number in the
parenthesis is the data rate of the individual bearer channels.

Bonded EP

Displays the slot and port of the terminating endpoint that is using this
BONDING session.

Configuration
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module. In most
applications the default values will be correct.
TXINIT Timer (sec)

61200780L1-1C

Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect the
BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint before deciding the
BONDING call has failed.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

188

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module
Configuration

TXFA Timer (sec)

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the BONDING
frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the BONDING call has
failed. When interoperating with other manufacturers' BONDING equipment, it
may be necessary to change this time so that it matches TXADD01.

TXADD01 Timer (sec)

Specifies the length of time both endpoints wait for additional calls to be
connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the BONDING call has
failed. The factory default setting is sufficient for most calls to connect,
although when dialing overseas it may be necessary to lengthen this timer to
allow for slower call routing.

TXDEQ Timer (sec)

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the network
delay between the bearer channels before deciding the BONDING call has
failed.

TANULL Timer (sec)

Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect the
BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint before deciding
the BONDING call has failed. It may be necessary to shorten this timer if the
DTE equipment using the BONDING module also has timer constraints for
completing non-BONDING parameter negotiation.

TCID Timer (sec)

Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an agreeable
value for bearer channels and channel capacities before deciding the BONDING
call has failed.

Call Stagger

Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing BONDING
sessions. The following call stagger values are available:

Option

Description

No Stagger

There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

500 ms

Wait approximately ½ second between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

1 sec.

Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

2 sec.

Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

189

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

HDLC Resource Module
Info

HDLC RESOURCE MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the HDLC Option Module
(P/N 1200222L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as HDLC-128). To see the menus for the HDLC
Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press
 to access the module choices.The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info

Status

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision

DS0s Available
Channels

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays the submenus for available resources on the HDLC Option Module.
DS0s Available

61200780L1-1C

Read security: 5
Displays the total number of DS0s currently available for allocation on the
HDLC Option Module. The maximum value is 128.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

190

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Channels

HDLC Resource Module
Status

Write security: 4; Read security: 5
Displays status information about the resources that have been allocated on the
HDLC Option Module.

Options

Description

Channel ID

Read security: 5- Indicates the resource number of the allocated resource listed.
If a number does not appear in the list, that resource is not currently allocated.

DS0s

Read security: 5 - Displays the number of DS0s that are being used by the
resource. This value multiplied by the DS0 Rate yields the bandwidth that has
been assigned to the resource.

56/64K

Read security: 5 - Displays the per DS0 rate that is being used by the resource.
This value multiplied by the number of DS0s yields the bandwidth that has been
assigned to this resource.

Tx Frames

Read security: 5 - Displays the number of frames that have been transmitted by
this resource.

Rx Frames

Read security: 5 - Displays the number of frames that have been received by this
resource.

Errors

Read security: 5 - Displays the total number of errors received by the resource.
Press  on this field to view the number of Total Errors, CRC Errors,
Aborted Frames, and Invalid Frames.

Clear Counters

Write security: 4; Read security: 5 - Resets all counters for the resource channel.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

191

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Info

MODEM-16 RESOURCE MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Modem-16 Resource
Module (P/N 1200181L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as M56K-16). To see the menus for the
Modem-16 Resource Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info

Status

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision

Configuration

Analog Rscr Session Status
Analog Rscr Connections Stats
Analog Rsrc I/O Stats
Digital Rscr Session Status
Digital Rscr Connection Stats
Digital Rsrc I/O Stats

Analog Rsrc
Digital Rsrc

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmware on the installed module.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays the status submenus for both analog and digital resources available on the Modem-16 Option
Module.
Analog Rscr
Session Status

This submenu displays the session status information for the analog resources
available on the Modem-16 Option Module.
System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the
SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability
information for each resource type, including hourly average available, minimum
available, and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

192

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Submenus

Description

Resource (Rscr)

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Status

Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays
new activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below.

Modulation

n/a

Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog call
resource. This may be done automatically by the system if a
given analog resource does not initialize properly.

Displays the modulation scheme being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

Rx Bit Rate

Displays the receive bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If
the analog resource is not in use, this field will display N/A.

Tx Bit Rate

Displays the transmit bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If
the analog resource is not in use, this field will display N/A.

Error Correction

Displays the error correction mode being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

Data Compression

Displays the data compression mode being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

Last Disconnect
Reason

Displays the reason for the previous disconnect which occurred on this analog
resource. If no disconnect has occurred on this analog resource, this field will
display N/A.

Line Parameters

Displays technical details about the analog resource for the currently active call.
This information may be used when troubleshooting modem connection
problems with the Modem-16 Option Module. See Table 6 on page 194for a
complete listing.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

193

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Table 6. Analog Resource Session Status Line Parameters
Submenu

Description

Resource Status

This field indicates the current status of the analog resource. The
following states are valid.
n/a

Module is not able to determine the status of the analog
resource

Available

This resource is available for use as an analog call
resource

In Use

This resource is currently being used in an analog call

Testing

This resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use

Disabled

This resource has been disable for use as an analog call
resource

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio (in decibels) on the modem’s receive signal.

Rx Mean Square Error

Mean square error of the received signal.

Round Trip Delay (ms)

Delay between the near and far end modem devices.

Rx Level (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal received by the
resource.

Tx Level (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal transmitted by
the resource.

Near End Echo (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal received
by the resource.

Far End Echo (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal
transmitted by the resource.

Retrains Requested by Remote

Number of Retrain Requests sent to the resource.

Retrains Granted to Remote

Number of Retrain Requests granted by the resource.

Retrains Granted to Local

Number of Retrains granted to the resource.

Renegotiations Requested by
Remote

Number of Renegotiation Requests sent to the resource.

Renegotiations Granted to
Remote

Number of Renegotiation Requests granted by the modem card.

Renegotiations Granted to Local Number of Renegotiation Requests granted to the modem card

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

194

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Analog Rscr
Connections Stats

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
This menu option displays the connection statistics for the analog resources
available on the Modem-16 Option Module.

Submenu

Description

Rsrc

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Attempts

Displays the number of connections attempted for this analog resource since the
last reset.

Completed

Displays the number of successful connections for this analog resource.

Failures

Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this analog resource. It is
defined as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful
connections.

Reset Stats

Resets the connection statistics for the given analog resource. This option resets
the connection attempts, connection completions, and the connections failures
fields for the analog resource.

Rate Stats

Displays connection rate statistics for selected data rates for the given analog
resource. The number of connections at a rate or range of rates is displayed.

Analog Rsrc I/O Stats

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the input and output statistics for the analog resources available on the
module. All statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call
becomes disconnected.

Submenu

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Tx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the analog resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes received by the analog resource from the
client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is
disconnected.

Tx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the analog resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

195

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Submenu

Description (Continued)

Rx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames received by the analog resource from the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Ovrns

Read security: 5
Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the analog
resource during the current call. A receiver overrun occurs when the client
modem transmits data too fast for the analog resource to keep up. This causes
data to be lost. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-Prty

Read security: 5
Displays the number of bytes received by the analog resource from the remote
client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is
disconnected.

Rx-Frme

Read security: 5
Displays the number of framing errors detected by the analog resource during
the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-CRC Bad

Read security: 5
Displays the number of received PPP frames by the analog resource from the
remote client modem during the current call. This is used only when the analog
resource is performing Sync-to-Async PPP conversion. This parameter is reset
once the call is disconnected.

Reset Stats

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource. This option
resets the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

196

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Digital Rscr
Session Status

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the session status information for the digital resources available on the
Modem-16 Option Module.

Submenus

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Status

Read security: 5
Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource. The status
display values are listed below.

Bit Rate

61200780L1-1C

N/A

Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call
resource.

Displays the bit rate of the digital resource for a currently active call. If the
digital resource is not in use, this field displays N/A.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

197

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Digital Rscr
Connection Stats

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the connection statistics for the digital resources available on the
Modem-16 Option Module.

Submenus

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Attempts

Read security: 5
Displays the number of connections attempted for this digital resource since the
last reset.

Completed

Read security: 5
Displays the number of successful connections for this digital resource.

Failures

Read security: 5
Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this digital resource. It is
defined as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful
connections.

56K Connects

Read security: 5
Displays the number of successful connections at 56 kbps for this digital
resource.

64K Connects

Read security: 5
Displays the number of successful connections at 64 kbps for this digital
resource.

Reset Stats

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Resets the connection statistics for the given digital resource. This option resets
the connection attempts, connection completions, and the connections failures
fields for the analog resource.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

198

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Digital Rsrc I/O Stats

Modem-16 Resource Module
Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the input and output statistics for the digital resource available on the
Modem-16 Option Module. All statistics are for the current active call and are
reset once the call becomes disconnected.

Submenus

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Tx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the digital resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames received by the digital resource from the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Tx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the digital resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes received by the digital resource from the
client modem curing the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is
disconnected.

Rx-Ovrns

Read security: 5
Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the digital resource
during the current call. A receiver overrun occurs when the client modem
transmits data too fast for the digital resource to keep up. This causes data to be
lost. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-CRC Bad

Read security: 5
Displays the number of frames of data received by the digital resource with an
invalid CRC. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-Aborted

Read security: 5
Displays the number of aborted receive frames detected by the digital resource
during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Reset Stats

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource. This option
resets the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

199

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Configuration

Configuration
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration submenus available for both analog and digital resources available on the
option module.
Analog Rsrc

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the configuration parameters for the available analog resources.

Submenus

Description

RSRC

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Status

Read security: 5
Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays
new activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below:

61200780L1-1C

n/a

Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog call
resource. This may be done automatically by the system if a
given analog resource does not initialize properly.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

200

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Configuration

Submenus

Description

Operation

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the mode of operation for the particular analog call resource. The
following selections are permissible:
Enabled

Indicates the selected analog resource is available for use as an
analog call resource in the system.

Disabled

Indicates this resource is not available for use as an analog call
resource in the system. If a call is active on this resource when
changing the operation to DISABLED, it will be immediately
terminated.

Auto Disabled Indicates this resource will not be available for use as an analog

call resource once the current call has been completed.
Hardware ResetWrite security: 3; Read security: 5

Reset a specific analog resource on the modem module. Any calls
currently active will be dropped.
Digital Rsrc

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the configuration parameters for the digital resources available on the
option module.

Submenus

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN
resources are numbered 17-32.

Status

Read security: 5
Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource. The status
display values are listed below.

61200780L1-1C

N/A

Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call
resource.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

201

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-16 Resource Module
Configuration

Submenus

Description

Operation

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the mode of operation for the particular digital call resource. The
following selections are permissible.
Enabled

Indicates the selected digital resource is available for use as an
analog call resource in the system.

Disabled

Indicates this resource is not available for use as a digital call
resource in the system. If a call is active on this resource when
changing the operation to DISABLED, it will be immediately
terminated.

Auto Disabled Indicates this resource will not be available for use as a digital

call resource once the current call has been completed.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

202

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Info

MODEM-24 RESOURCE MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Modem-24 Option
Module (P/N 1200782L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as MODEM-24). To see the menus for the
Modem-24 Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
.

Info
Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision

Status
Analog Resource (Rscr)
Session Status
Resource (Rscr)
Status
Modulation
Rx Bit Rate
Tx Bit Rate
Error Correction
Data Compression
Last Disconnect Reason
Line Parameters

Analog Resource (Rscr)
Connections Stats
Rsrc
Attempts
Completed
Failures
Reset Stats
Rate Stats

Configuration
Analog Rsrc I/O Stats
Rsrc
Tx-Bytes
Rx-Bytes
Tx-Frames
Rx-Frames
Rx-Ovrns
Rx-Prty
Rx-Frme
Rx-CRC Bad
Reset Stats

Analog Rscr
RSRC
Status
Operation
Hardware Reset

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the firmware revision of the installed module.

Status
Read security: 5

Displays the status submenus for analog resources available on the Modem-24 Option Module.
Analog Resource
(Rscr) Session Status

61200780L1-1C

This submenu displays the session status information for the analog resources
available on the Modem-24 Option Module.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

203

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Status

System resource usage for analog call resources can be viewed under the SYSTEM STATUS
menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability information for each
resource type, including hourly average available, minimum available, and number of times
there were no available resources of a particular type.

Menu Options

Description

Resource (Rscr)

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-24
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-24.

Status

Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays
new activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below.

Modulation

n/a

Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog
call resource. This may be done automatically by the system if
a given analog resource does not initialize properly.

Displays the modulation scheme being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

Rx Bit Rate

Displays the receive bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If
the analog resource is not in use, this field will display N/A.

Tx Bit Rate

Displays the transmit bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If
the analog resource is not in use, this field will display N/A.

Error Correction

Displays the error correction mode being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

204

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Status

Menu Options

Description

Data Compression

Displays the data compression mode being used by the analog resource for a
currently active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display
N/A.

Last Disconnect
Reason

Displays the reason for the previous disconnect which occurred on this analog
resource. If no disconnect has occurred on this analog resource, this field will
display N/A.

Line Parameters

Displays technical details about the analog resource for the currently active call.
This information may be used when troubleshooting modem connection
problems with the Modem-24 Option Module. See Table 7 for a complete
listing.

Table 7. Analog Resource Session Status Line Parameters
Submenu

Description

Resource Status

This field indicates the current status of the analog resource. The
following states are valid.
n/a

Module is not able to determine the status of the
analog resource

Available

This resource is available for use as an analog call
resource

In Use

This resource is currently being used in an analog call

Testing

This resource is in a test mode and may be
unavailable for use

Disabled

This resource has been disable for use as an analog
call resource

Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio (in decibels) on the modem’s receive signal.

Rx Mean Square Error

Mean square error of the received signal.

Round Trip Delay (ms)

Delay between the near and far end modem devices.

Rx Level (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal received by the
resource.

Tx Level (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal transmitted by
the resource.

Near End Echo (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal received
by the resource.

Far End Echo (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal
transmitted by the resource.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

205

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Status

Table 7. Analog Resource Session Status Line Parameters (Continued)
Submenu

Description

Retrains Requested by Remote

Number of Retrain Requests sent to the resource.

Retrains Granted to Remote

Number of Retrain Requests granted by the resource.

Retrains Granted to Local

Number of Retrains granted to the resource.

Renegotiations Requested by
Remote

Number of Renegotiation Requests sent to the resource.

Renegotiations Granted to
Remote

Number of Renegotiation Requests granted by the modem card.

Renegotiations Granted to Local Number of Renegotiation Requests granted to the modem card

Analog Resource (Rscr)
Connections Stats
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

This menu option displays the connection statistics for the analog resources
available on the Modem-24 Option Module.
Submenu

Description

Rsrc

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-24
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-24.

Attempts

Displays the number of connections attempted for this analog resource since the
last reset.

Completed

Displays the number of successful connections for this analog resource.

Failures

Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this analog resource. It is
defined as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful
connections.

Reset Stats

Resets the connection statistics for the given analog resource. This option resets
the connection attempts, connection completions, and the connections failures
fields for the analog resource.

Rate Stats

Displays connection rate statistics for selected data rates for the given analog
resource. The number of connections at a rate or range of rates is displayed.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

206

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Analog Rsrc I/O Stats

Modem-24 Resource Module
Status

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Displays the input and output statistics for the analog resources available on the
module. All statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call
becomes disconnected.

Analog Rsrc I/O
Stats Submenus

Description

Rsrc

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-24
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-24.

Tx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the analog resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Bytes

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data bytes received by the analog resource from the
client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is
disconnected.

Tx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the analog resource to the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Frames

Read security: 5
Displays the number of data frames received by the analog resource from the
remote client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the
call is disconnected.

Rx-Ovrns

Read security: 5
Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the analog
resource during the current call. A receiver overrun occurs when the client
modem transmits data too fast for the analog resource to keep up. This causes
data to be lost. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-Prty

Read security: 5
Displays the number of bytes received by the analog resource from the remote
client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is
disconnected.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

207

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Configuration

Analog Rsrc I/O
Stats Submenus

Description (Continued)

Rx-Frme

Read security: 5
Displays the number of framing errors detected by the analog resource during
the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

Rx-CRC Bad

Read security: 5
Displays the number of received PPP frames by the analog resource from the
remote client modem during the current call. This is used only when the analog
resource is performing Sync-to-Async PPP conversion. This parameter is reset
once the call is disconnected.

Reset Stats

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource. This option
resets the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource.

Configuration
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Analog Rscr

Displays the analog resource configuration submenus available for the option
module.

Submenus

Description

RSRC

Read security: 5
Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-24
Option Module, analog resources are numbered 1-24.

Status

Read security: 5
Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays
new activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below:

61200780L1-1C

n/a

Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call
resource.

Available

Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

In Use

Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

Testing

Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable
for use.

Disabled

Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog
call resource. This may be done automatically by the system if
a given analog resource does not initialize properly.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

208

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Modem-24 Resource Module
Configuration

Submenus

Description (Continued)

Operation

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the mode of operation for the particular analog call resource. The
following selections are permissible:
Enabled

Indicates the selected analog resource is available for use as an
analog call resource in the system.

Disabled

Indicates this resource is not available for use as an analog call
resource in the system. If a call is active on this resource when
changing the operation to DISABLED, it will be immediately
terminated.

Auto
Disabled
Hardware
Reset

61200780L1-1C

Indicates this resource will not be available for use as an analog
call resource once the current call has been completed.

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Reset a specific analog resource on the modem module. Any calls currently
active will be dropped.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

209

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Info

ASYNC-232 OPTION MODULE
The ATLAS 800 Series system controller automatically detects the presence of the Async-232 Option
Module (P/N 1200182L1) when it is installed in the system (listed as ASYNC232). To see the menus for the
Async-232 Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and
press  to access the module choices. The following menu tree shows the hierarchy of the menus
discussed in this section.
Info

Signal Status

Part Number
Serial Number
Board Revision
Firmware Revision
Firmware Revision

Session Status
Prt
Mode
Call Dir
Rsc
Last Disconnect
Hangup

I/O Status

Port
DTE Signals

Configuration

Port
Tx Bytes
Rx Bytes
Overruns
PrtyErrs
FrmErrs
Rst Stats

Test

Prt
Port Name
Bit Rate
Flow Ctr
Fmt
Call Dir
In Ctrl
Dialout
Modem

Port
DTE Local Loopback

Info
Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.
Part Number

Displays the part number of the module.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the module.

Board Revision

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

Firmware Revision

Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmware on the installed module.

Processor ID

Displays the identification of the processor for the installed module.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

210

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Signal Status

Signal Status
Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a
hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.
Port

Operating port number.

DTE Signals

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

Submenu

Description

DTR

Data terminal ready from DTE

DSR

Data set ready to DTE

RTS

Request to send from DTE

DCD

Data carrier detect to DTE

RI

Ring indicate to DTE

I/O Status
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the input/output statistics for the Async-232 ports.
Port

Displays the port number.

Tx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes transmitted by the DTE.

Rx Bytes

Displays the number of bytes sent to the DTE.

Overruns

Displays the received overrun errors from the DTE. A receiver overrun occurs
when the DTE performs data transmission too fast for the Async-232 port to
keep up, therefore causing data to be lost. An overrun may indicate the need to
turn on hardware flow control.

PrtyErrs

Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained parity
errors.

FrmErrs

Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained framing
errors.

Rst Stats

Clears the current stored I/O statistics for each port.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

211

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Session Status

Session Status
Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a
hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.
Prt

Displays the port number.

Mode

Indicates the session mode for the port. The following modes are available:

Submenu

Description

Unassigned

Port not assigned to a phone number in the Dial Plan.

Idle

Port assigned but no call is active.

Loopback

Loopback is turned on in the test menu.

Modem Ring

Incoming analog modem call is ringing on port. Async-232 port will toggle RI.

Modem Answer

The DTE has answered an incoming analog modem call.

Modem Dial

The DTE is using the Async-232 port to make an outgoing analog modem call.

Modem Connected

An analog modem call has been established.

ISDN PPP Ring

Incoming ISDN PPP call is ringing on the port. Async-232 port will toggle RI.

ISDN PPP Answer

The DTE has answered an incoming ISDN PPP call.

ISDN PPP Dial

The DTE is using the Async-232 port to make an outgoing ISDN PPP call.

ISDN PPP
Connected

An ISDN PPP call has been established.

Call Dir

Read security: 5
Displays the current call direction as INCOMING or OUTGOING. If there is no
active call, IDLE will display.

Rsc

Read security: 5
This field indicates the slot and device number allocated for a call to or from
this port. If no call is active, it will indicate NONE. The allocated resource will be
either an analog modem, or an ISDN digital call resource.

Last Disconnect

Read security: 5
This field indicates the reason for the last call disconnect or dialout failure for
this port. If no call has been attempted for the given port, this field will indicate
NONE. This information is also available in the system log if Async-232 module
events are enabled.

Hangup

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Activator used to hangup the current active call on the port.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

212

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Configuration

Configuration
Write security: 5; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual Async-232 ports.
Prt

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

Port Name

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 15 characters long, to uniquely identify
each port on the Async-232 Option Module.

Bit Rate

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the fixed DTE port bit rate. Changing this field hangs up an active
call and requires confirmation. Options include the following: 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, and 115.2K.

Flow Ctr

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the flow control for the Async-232 port. Options are:

Submenus

Description

Hardware

Hardware flow control monitors RTS from the DTE and controls CTS to
indicate flow control status. Hardware flow control should be used in all cases
except when it is not supported by the attached DTE equipment.

Software

Software flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream to
control flow.

None

No flow control selected for this port.

Fmt

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Configures the asynchronous character format options for the Async-232 port.

Submenus

Description

Data Bits

Number of data bits per character.

Parity

Parity method used for transmit and receive characters.

Stop Bits

Number of stop bits per character.

Call Dir

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the Async-232 port to answer incoming calls and/or originate
outgoing calls. The following options are available: IN ONLY, OUT ONLY, and IN
& OUT.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

213

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

In Ctrl

Async-232 Option Module
Configuration

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the method by which incoming calls are indicated to and controlled by
the DTE. Options include the following:

Submenus

Description

At Cmds

AT commands and responses indicate and control calls. AT commands also
support port and allocated modem or ISDN resource configuration.

DTR-DCD

An activated data carrier detect (DCD) signal indicates that an incoming call is
answered from the Async-232 Module port. Upon call hang-up, the DCD
becomes inactive. The data terminal ready (DTR) signal must be active from the
DTE for an incoming call to be answered. If the port is part of a group assigned
in the DIAL PLAN, then the first idle port with DTR active will answer the call. If
the DTE drives DTR inactive, the Async-232 Module port hangs up an active
call.

Dialout

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Includes all options that affect dialing outgoing calls. The record field indicates
the values of the key dialout subfields.
AT/MDM

Indicates that AT dialing of a modem is selected.

DTR/MDM

Indicates that DTR dialing of a modem is selected.

AT/ISDN

Indicates that AT dialing of an ISDN resource is selected.

DTR/ISDN

Indicates that DTR dialing of an ISDN resource is selected.

Submenus

Description

Dialout Method

Write security: 3, Read security: 5
Selects the method by which outgoing calls may be initiated by the DTE.

61200780L1-1C

DTR Dial

When DTR is enabled by the DTE and a number has been entered
in the DTR DIAL NUMBER field, an outgoing call attempt is made.
The call is hung up when DTR is dropped. If the call does not
connect, the call will continue to be retried as long as DTR
remains active.

AT Dial

When enabled, AT commands may be used to dial outgoing calls.
Port an allocated modem or ISDN resource configuration is also
supported via AT commands. The DTR signal must be active
from the DTE to dial out. The call is hung up when DTR is
dropped or when the escape-to-command mode sequence (+++)
and ATH are issued. When the call is connected, the Async-232
port enables DCD.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

214

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Configuration

Submenus

Description (Continued)

DTR Dial Number

This field is only active when outgoing calls are enabled and DIALOUT METHOD
is set to DTR DIAL. If a phone number is entered here, it will be dialed when
DTR goes active.

Callout Protocol

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This field determines what type or resource will be allocated and the data
protocol that will be used for an outgoing call attempt for the port. The
following selections are available:
Analog ModemAn outgoing call attempts to allocate a modem resource and

make an analog call. Asynchronous data is passed unmodified between the
Async-232 Module port and the allocated modem. The analog modem resource
is freed when the call is hung up.
ISDN PPP

Out ISDN Call Type

61200780L1-1C

An outgoing call attempts to allocate an ISDN resource and make
a digital call. Both ends of the call must be using PPP as the
protocol to communicate across the link. The Async-232 Module
port performs PPP Async-to-Sync conversion between the
asynchronous DCE port and the synchronous ISDN link.
ADTRAN and other manufacturers use this conversion as the
standard method of transporting PPP frames available in ISDN
Terminal Adapters. The PPP Async-to-Sync protocol complies
with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 1662. For
the ISDN call to be routed outside ATLAS 800 Series, a PRI or
BRI interface must be connected to the system and be correctly
configured

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
When CALLOUT PROTOCOL has been set to ISDN PPP, this field determines what
type of ISDN call will be made when a call is attempted. The value must match
the network services provisioned for the PRI or BRI interface that the call will
be carried on. This field is not present and ignored when the CALLOUT
PROTOCOL is ANALOG MODEM.
Data 64K

Directs the call control software to request an unrestricted
64 kbps circuit. The default call type for ISDN service is Data 64
kbps.

Data 56K

Directs the call control software to request a 64 kbps data circuit
that is rate-adapted to 56 kbps. It is intended for use in
circumstances where interoperability with Switched 56 service is
desired.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

215

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Configuration

Submenus

Description (Continued)

Out ISDN Call Type
(continued)

Audio

Directs the call control software to request a 3.1 kHz audio circuit
as the bearer capability for outgoing calls. The Audio option is
used with an ISDN line configured for voice service. Selecting an
Audio call type guarantees a digital end-to-end ISDN connection.

Speech

Speech direct the call control software to request a µ-Law speech
circuit as the bearer capability for outgoing calls. The Speech
option is used with an ISDN line configured for voice service. A
Speech call type does not guarantee and end-to-end digital
connection with some local and long distance providers.

Modem

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures an allocated modem for incoming and outgoing analog modem calls.
Selected options are issued to the modem when it is allocated to answer an
incoming call or initiate an outgoing call. Some options imply a negotiation
with the remote modem. These modem options may also be specified through
the AT command interface if enabled.

Submenus

Description

Highest Tx Bit Rate

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the highest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to
the remote modem. Modulation scheme is automatically selected based on the
connection speed.

Lowest Bit Rate

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Selects the lowest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to
the remote modem. If the lowest bit rate or higher cannot be negotiated with the
remote modem, the call is disconnected. Modulation scheme is automatically
selected based on the connection speed.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

216

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Test

Submenus

Description

Error Correction

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Configures the error correction for the allocated modem. The following options
are available:
Disabled

No error correction is requested. If the remote modem refuses to
support the option, the call is disconnected. Although no error
correction is used, this mode still allows speed matching, data
buffering, and flow control.

Auto-Reliable
Link Mode
Modem will attempt to negotiate LAPM, MNO, or no error

correction with the remote modem. This is the default setting.
Force LAPM
Mode
Modem will attempt to negotiated LAPM error correction with

the remote modem. If it cannot, the call is disconnected.
Force MNP
Mode
Data Compression

Modem will attempt to negotiate MNO error correction with the
remote modem. If it cannot, the call is disconnected.

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Error correction must be enabled to use data compression; data compression is
automatically disabled if error correction is disabled. The following data
compression options are available:
Disabled

Both MNP5 and V.42bis data compression methods are disabled.

MNP5

MNP5 data compression is enabled.

V.42bis

V.42bis data compression is enabled.

V.42bis and
MNP5

Both MNP5 and V.42 bis data compression are enabled. This is
the default setting.

Test
Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.
Port

Read security: 5
Displays the port number.

DTE Local Loopback

Loopback can be Enabled or Disabled for a port with this field. When Enabled,
all data received from the DTE by the Async-232 Module port is transmitted
back to the DTE. Loopback state is not saved in the module configuration; and,

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

217

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Async-232 Option Module
Test

if the card is hot swapped or the ATLAS 800 Series system is restarted,
loopback is disabled on all ports. It is not necessary to have a Dial Plan entry for
a port to enable loopback.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

218

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

8.

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

PACKET MANAGER

The PACKET MANAGER submenus define and configure all Layer 2 connections, including Frame Relay
endpoints (see Figure 14). These submenus include PACKET ENDPNTS, PACKET CNCTS, CNCTS SORT, and
FRAME RELAY IQ.

Figure 14. Packet Manager Menu

Packet Endpnts
Read security: 5

Defines, monitors, and tests a packet endpoint. Submenus include STATUS, PERFORMANCE, CONFIG, TEST,
ENDPNT COUNT, and ENDPNTS SORT.
Status

Read security: 5
Displays the status of each packet endpoint.

Status Submenus

Description

Endpnt Name

Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the menu Packet
Endpnts/Config.

Protocol

Displays the Layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint. FR indicates this packet
endpoint is configured for Frame Relay, TBOP for Transparent Bit Oriented
Protocol (TBOP), and PPP for Point-to-Point Protocol.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

219

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Status Submenus
Sig Role

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Description (Continued)

Displays the Frame Relay signaling role for this packet endpoint. These settings
are not applicable for PPP.

Sig Type

Sig State - Frame
Relay

61200780L1-1C

User

Indicates the user side of the User to Network Interface (UNI).

Network

Indicates the network side of the UNI.

Both

Indicates the packet endpoint is operating in Network to
Network Interface (NNI) mode.

Off

Indicates no LMI signaling is generated or expected. All
DLCI’s are considered active.

Displays the Frame Relay signaling type used on this packet endpoint. These
settings are not applicable for PPP.
Annex A

Signaling using ITU-T Q.933-A.

Annex D

Signaling using ANSI T1.617-D.

LMI

Signaling using Group of Four.

Indicates the Frame Relay signaling state on this packet endpoint.
Up

Indicates that there is active Frame Relay signaling on this
endpoint. The packet endpoint must be defined by the Frame
Relay configuration settings to show active Frame Relay
signaling.

Down

The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical
line is down.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

220

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Status Submenus

Description (Continued)

Sig State - PPP

Indicates the status of the PPP negotiation.
Initial

This is the first state of LCP negotiation. If the packet endpoint
is connected to a physical port in the DEDICATED MAP, this state
will usually transition to the STARTING state to begin the PPP
negotiation.

Starting

The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical
line is down.

Req - Sent

The packet endpoint has sent an LCP configuration request to
the peer and is waiting for an “acknowledge.”

Ack - Recvd

The packet endpoint has received an “acknowledge” from the
peer for the sent configuration request.

Ack - Sent

The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer’s configuration
request, but the peer has not acknowledged us.

Opened

LCP negotiation on the packet endpoint has finished;
authentication, if enabled, occurs now.

Closing

The packet endpoint has sent the peer a “terminate” request and
is waiting for the peer’s acknowledgement.

Closed

The packet endpoint has received the peer’s acknowledgement
to the sent terminate request; this is followed by the initial state.

Stopping

The packet endpoint has received a terminate request from the
peer.

Stopped

The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer’s terminate
request.

Not Connected The packet endpoint is not connected to the router in the
PACKET CNCTS menu.
Current Port

Performance

Displays the connections for the packet endpoint. The letter U in this field
indicates that this packet endpoint is used in the PACKET CNCTS map. The
remainder of the field indicates the physical port this packet endpoint is
connected to in the DEDICATED MAP. If the port is a channelized interface such as
a T1, the DS0 assignment is also provided

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Displays performance information for each packet endpoint including the
endpoint name, the protocol used, link stats, and sublink stats.

Performance
Submenus

Description

Endpnt Name

Read security: 5
Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the PACKET ENDPNTS/CONFIG menu
(see also Config on page 213).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

221

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Performance
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Protocol (Prot)

Read security: 5
Displays the Layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint. FR indicates this packet
endpoint is configured for Frame Relay. TBOP indicates this packet endpoint is
configured for Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol (TBOP). PPP indicates this packet
endpoint is configured for the Point-to-Point Protocol.

Link Stats - Frame Displays Layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for Frame Relay reflect
Relay
the total count since last cleared.
Tx Packets

Total number of Frame Relay packets transmitted through this
packet endpoint, including both user data (on all PVCs) and
signaling.

Rx Packets

Total number of Frame Relay packets received through this packet
endpoint on all PVCs.

State Changes Total number of times that Frame Relay signaling has gone active

or inactive.
Signaling Errors

Total number of signaling frames received with PVC signaling
protocol violations.
Signaling Timeouts

Number of times signaling polls were not received in the time
specified in T391 in the PACKET ENDPTS/CONFIG menu.
Async Status Tx

Full status not transmitted during the normal full status cycle. An
asynchronous status message is used to quickly activate a link.
Async Status Rx

Full status not received during the normal full status cycle. An
asynchronous status message is used to quickly activate a link.
Full Status Tx Number of full status polls transmitted by this packet endpoint.
Full Status Rx Number of full status polls received by this packet endpoint.
Link Integrity Status Tx

Number of link integrity polls transmitted by this packet endpoint.
Link Integrity Status Rx

Number of link integrity polls received by this packet endpoint.
Clear Counters

Clears all values in this submenu.Number of link integrity polls
transmitted by this packet endpoint.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

222

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Performance
Submenus

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Description (Continued)

Link Stats - TBOP Displays Layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for TBOP reflect the

total count since last cleared.
Tx Packets

Total number of HDLC packets transmitted through this packet
endpoint.

Rx Packets

Total number of HDLC packets received through this packet
endpoint.

Clear Counters Clears all values in this submenu.
Link Stats - PPP Displays Layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for PPP reflect the total

count since last cleared. The available statistic information is discussed below.
LCP State

Displays the current state of the LCP negotiations.

IPCP

Displays the UP if PPP IP control has successfully negotiated.

Tx Packets

Number of packets transmitted over this link.

Rx Packets

Number of packets received over this link.

Clear Counters Resets the Tx and Rx packet counts.
Sublink Stats Frame Relay

Displays Frame Relay performance statistics for supported packet endpoint
sublinks. These statistic fields reflect the total count since cleared. These settings are
not applicable for PPP or TBOP.
Name

User-defined name of a sublink (PVC).

DLCI

Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier.

State

Indicates if this particular sublink (PVC) has been defined as active
by a full status poll, and also indicates if the PVC is in backup
mode. Possibilities include
Active

PVC is active.
Inactive

PVC is inactive.
Active/BU

PVC is active, but in backup mode.
Inactive/BU

PVC is inactive and in backup mode.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

223

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Performance
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Sublink Stats Frame Relay
(continued)

Tx Pckts

Total number of Frame Relay user data packets transmitted over
this PVC.

Rx Pckts

Total number of Frame Relay user data packets received over this
PVC.

Statistics

Provides additional information on the individual sublink.
Reset Counters

Resets all sublink counters.
FECN Count

The total number of FECN bits received on this PVC.
BECN Count

The total number of BECN bits received on this PVC.
DE Discard Count

Active Flag

Config

The total number of discard eligible (DE) bits that have been
received on this PVC.
For ADTRAN use only.

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Creates and configures packet endpoints.

Config
Submenus

Description

Endpnt Name

User-definable name (such as the name of the Frame Relay provider or the
circuit ID).

Protocol (Prot)

Defines the protocol operating on this port. Frame Relay configures this packet
endpoint for Frame Relay signaling. TBOP configures this endpoint as transparent
bit oriented protocol. PPP configures this packet endpoint as point-to-point protocol.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

224

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Config
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Config - Frame
Relay

Contains the configuration parameters for this packet endpoint.
Signaling Role Displays the Frame Relay signaling role for this packet endpoint.

The following options indicate the signaling role of this packet
endpoint.
Off

The remote device does not support Frame Relay signaling.
Auto

Detects the role of the device on the other end of the circuit and
automatically sets this packet endpoint to the appropriate value.
Both

Operates in NNI mode.
Network

Acts as the network side of the UNI interface.
User

Acts as the user side of the UNI interface.
Signaling Type Displays the Frame Relay signaling type for this packet endpoint.

The following options indicate the signaling type for this packet
endpoint.
Auto

Detects the signaling type of the device on the other end of the
circuit and automatically sets this packet endpoint to the same
signaling type.
Annex A

Transmits and responds to ITU-T Q.933-A standards.
Annex D

Transmits and responds to ANSI T1.617-D standards.
LMI

Transmits and responds to Group of Four specifications.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

225

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Config
Submenus
Config - Frame
Relay
(continued)

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Description (Continued)

For most applications, leave the following configuration parameters in the default state. Use
caution when changing these parameters: User Poll timer, User Polls Per Status, User Bad
Event Threshold, and User Event Window Size.
User Poll Timer (T391)

Sets the polling interval to the network in seconds.
User Polls Per Status (N391)

Controls how many link integrity polls occur between full status
polls.
User Bad Event Threshold (N392)

Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be
declared down in N393 polls.
User Event Window Size (N393)

Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window.
To prevent erratic behavior, ensure that this timer (T392) is greater than the T391 on the
user side of the UNI.

If the number of bad polls reaches N392 in any N393 period, the link will be declared down.
When N393 good polls are received, the link will be declared active again.
Net Poll Response Timeout (T392)

Determines how long this packet endpoint will wait without
receiving a poll before declaring the poll bad.
Net Polls Per Status (N391)

Sets the number of link integrity polls before a full status is
transmitted.
Net Bad Events Threshold (N392)

Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be
declared down in N393 polls.
Net Event Window Size (N393)

Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

226

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Config
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Config - PPP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Displays the configuration for this packet endpoint.
Authentication Contains the authentication parameters for this endpoint:
Rx Method

These are methods the ATLAS uses to authenticate the peer. None
is selected when you do not want to authenticate the peer. PAP,
CHAP, or EAP is selected when you will allow the peer to be
authenticated with one of the listed authentication protocols. In this
case, the most secure method will be used first (EAP, then CHAP,
then PAP). CHAP or EAP is selected when you will authenticate
the peer only using one of the encrypted authentication protocols.
EAP is selected when you will authenticate the peer only using the
EAP authentication protocol.
Rx Authentication

Selects the different types of authentication used to authenticate the
peer. To use the local username and password for this port, select
LOCAL.
Rx Username

The username ATLAS uses to authenticate the peer.
Rx Password

The password ATLAS uses to authenticate the peer.
Tx Method

This field displays a list of the methods that we will allow the peer
to authenticate us with. This is of use when a peer wants to do PAP
just to get your password. None is selected when you do not want to
be authenticated by the peer. PAP, CHAP, or EAP is selected when
you will let the peer use one or all of the authentication protocols.
CHAP or EAP is selected when you will let the peer use only one of
the encrypted authentication protocols. EAP is selected when you
will let the peer use only the EAP authentication protocol.
Tx Username

The username that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS.
Tx Password

The password that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS.
Reset Session Resets PPP negotiation with the peer.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

227

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Config
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Config - PPP
(continued)

Debug Log

The following events can be viewed in the event log when PPP
events have been turned to INFO.
LCP Debugging

This turns on LCP negotiation debugging.
IPCP Debugging

This turns on IPCP negotiation debugging.
BCP Debugging

This turns on BCP negotiation debugging.
Authentication Debugging

This turns on authentication debugging.
Unknown Protocol Debugging

This turns on debugging for unknown protocols.

61200780L1-1C

Max Config

This value is the number of unanswered configuration requests that
should be transmitted before giving up on negotiation. The default
value is 10.

Max Timer

This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered
configuration requests. The default value is 2 seconds.

Max Failure

Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed
upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of
configuration-NAKs that should occur before an option is
configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed that
might otherwise fail. The default value is 5.

Keepalive

Configures the ATLAS to send keepalive frames on PPP
connections that are not currently in use for data.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

228

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Config
Submenus

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Description (Continued)

Sublinks - Frame Contains the configuration parameters for individual sublinks, or PVCs. The
Relay
following parameters are available.

Usage

Name

User-definable name for the DLCI.

DLCI

Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier.

QOS

Quality of service. These values can be used to assign a guaranteed
amount of bandwidth available for this connection. The sum of all
QOS values for the sublink should not exceed the Committed
Information Rate (CIR).

Burst

Sets the burst rate used by this virtual circuit for data traffic. A
value of zero means that the burst rate is not limited. The value is in
kilobits/second. If voice traffic is flowing on ANY sublink on the
port carrying THIS sublink, you should enter a value for this
setting. Otherwise, leave this field set to default (zero). If the
service provider has supplied a 'Be' value, enter that value in this
field. The burst rate defines the amount that this virtual circuit is
allowed to exceed the CIR. If the service provider has not supplied
an excess burst rate, enter the wire speed in this field.

Config

Allows configuration of parameters for each DLCI. See also Table
8 on page 229.

Read security: 5
This field displays a 7-character summary of the references to this link. Each
position is populated with a dash (-) or a character indicating the resource
represented. The characters are as follows:
1
Packet connection in the first dedicated map
2
Packet connection in the second dedicated map
3
Packet connection in the third dedicated map
4
Packet connection in the fourth dedicated map
5
Packet connection in the fifth dedicated map
–
Reserved and currently not is use
s
Used as a Packet Endpoint in the switched dial plan
u
Used by one or more packet switch connections or packet voice entries

Table 8. DLCI Configuration Parameters
Submenu

Description

Fragmentation
Threshold

Max packet size allowed on this PVC. A zero value disables fragmentation.
Fragmentation is used to improve the quality of voice transmission. A good value is
R/300, where R is the smallest of the ATLAS 830 link rates or the far end link rate in
bits per second. For example, if a DLCI comes from an FSU 5622 running on a 56K
DDS line and is delivered to the ATLAS 830 on a full T1, the lower rate is 56000 and
the value is 186 or 187. Entered values between 1 and 127 are adjusted upward.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

229

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Table 8. DLCI Configuration Parameters (Continued)
Submenu

Description

DLCI State

Controls how the state of this DLCI is reported to any packet connections within
ATLAS attempting to send or receive data on this DLCI.
Auto

Passes the state as reported by the frame relay switch. Set DLCI
State to Auto for normal operation.

Force Active

This DLCI disregards the status as reported from the switch and
reports Active to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 830.

Force Inactive Reports status as Down to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 830.
Diagnostic Mode

Controls operation of PVC testing options. To allow the far end to measure delay,
select Echo Far-End Loopbacks. To continuously measure in-band delay, select
In-band delay Measurement. To turn off continuous diagnostic functions, select
Pass-through Diagnostic Packets.
Echo Far-End Loopbacks

Generates and transmits a response on this DLCI to the remote
equipment if an ADTRAN proprietary diagnostic message is
received on this DLCI.
In-Band Delay Measurement

Generates a diagnostic packet to measure delay through the frame
relay network. This process requires that the equipment at the
remote site be ADTRAN IQ compatible.
Pass-Through Diagnostic Packets

Used when ATLAS is acting as a frame relay switch. Transmits a
diagnostic packet out the packet endpoint connected to this DLCI, if
a diagnostic packet is received on this packet endpoint.
Primary | Backup
Selection

Allows you to define a sublink as a primary or a backup sublink. Primary defines a
normal sublink and includes the menus ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT, BACKUP PACKET
ENDPT, and BACKUP SUBLINK. Backup defines a backup sublink and includes the
menus PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT and PRIMARY SUBLINK.
Enable Backup Support

Visible only if the sublink type is PRIMARY. YES displays the backup
menus. NO hides the backup menus.
Backup Packet Endpt

Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES. Selects the
BACKUP PACKET ENDPT that contains the BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied
to this sublink.
Backup Sublink

Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES. Selects the
BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

230

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Table 8. DLCI Configuration Parameters (Continued)
Submenu

Description

Primary | Backup
Selection
(continued.

Primary Packet Endpt

Visible only if BACKUP is selected. Selects the PRIMARY PACKET
ENDPT that contains the PRIMARY SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink.
Primary Sublink

Visible only if BACKUP is selected. Selects the PRIMARY SUBLINK to
be tied to this sublink.
Backup Mode

Provides the following switching options: AUTO, FORCED, and
DISABLED. AUTO provides normal operation; FORCED forces a switch
to backup; and DISABLED disables backup switching.
Switch on Sublink Inactive

Provides switching options if the sublink goes down. Select Yes to
switch to backup if the primary sublink goes down, otherwise select
No.
Switch on LMI Down

Provides switching options for LMI signaling. Select Yes to switch
to backup if LMI signaling is inactive on the primary link, otherwise
select No.
Switch on Backup Active

Provides switching options if the backup sublink goes active. Select
Yes to switch to backup if the backup sublink goes active, otherwise
select No.
Backup Delay in Seconds

The amount of time within which any of the enabled switch criteria
must be met before service is switched to the backup circuit.
Restore Delay in Seconds

The amount of time within which the criteria for switching to
backup are reached before service is returned to the primary circuit.

The following fields display if PRIMARY (with BACKUP SUPPORT) or BACKUP is
enabled:
Backup Mode
Switch on Sublink Down
Switch on LMI Inactive
Switch on Backup Active
Backup Delay in Seconds
Restore Delay in Seconds.
Test

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Provides menus for controlling options and setting for packet endpoints.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

231

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Submenus

Description

Endpnt Name

Displays the name of the packet endpoint.

Protocol

Displays the protocol running on the packet endpoint.

Sublink Frame Relay

Displays test menus for the packet endpoint sublinks. The menus vary
depending on the protocol. Testing is not supported on TBOP or PPP.
Name

Displays the user-defined name for the DLCI.

DLCI

Displays the local address for each PVC as assigned by the
carrier.

Test

Displays the test mode for the PVC.
Start

The fixed duration that Test is not running and the DLCI is not
configured for continuous in-band delay measurement. To
change this option, set DIAGNOSTIC MODE to IN-BAND DELAY
MEASUREMENT (also see In-Band Delay Measurement on page
218).
ContDly

The fixed duration TEST is not running and the DLCI is
configured for continuous in-band delay measurement. The
following RESULTS menu accumulates these measurements.
Stop

The fixed duration TEST is running. The following DURATION
field shows the time remaining in the current test.
Duration

61200780L1-1C

Shows the duration in seconds for the fixed-duration test.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

232

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Endpnts

Submenus

Description (Continued)

Sublink Frame Relay
(continued)

Results [MN/AV/MX Dly]

Displays the minimum, average, and maximum delay for the
delay-measurement test. To display the additional test results,
place the cursor over this field and press  on the
keyboard. The displayed times are in milliseconds.
Echo Pkt Tx

Displays the total number of test packets that have been
transmitted.
Echo Pkt Rx

Displays the total number of test packets that have been
received.
Echo Pkt Dropped

Displays the total number of packets lost in the receiving
direction (traveling from the remote ADTRAN Frame Relay
device to the ATLAS).
Rmt Pkt Dropped

Displays the total number of packets lost in the transmit
direction (traveling from the ATLAS to the remote ADTRAN
Frame Relay device).
Min Delay

Displays the minimum round trip delay for the current test
period.
Max Delay

Displays the maximum round trip delay for the current test
period.
Avg Delay

Displays the average round trip delay for the current test.
Reset Counters

Resets the counters.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

233

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Packet Cncts

Endpt Count

Read security: 5
Displays the total number of packet endpoints configured.

Endpts Sort

Provides sorting options for the packet endpoints. Sorting By Name sorts packet
endpoints alphabetically by name. If you do not want to sort packet endpoints,
set this option to Off.

Packet Cncts
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

After packet endpoints are defined, they are connected in the packet connects (PACKET CNCTS) map.
PACKET CNCTS connects upper layer protocols from packet endpoint to packet endpoint. You can think of it
as a dedicated map for virtual ports rather than physical ports.
From: PEP

Selects one packet endpoint for the packet connection. Packet endpoints created
in the packet endpoint configuration are visible on a pull-down menu which
includes the ROUTER option. This router is the internal ATLAS 800 Series router
and can be used multiple times within the PACKET CNCTS menu.

Sublink

If the packet endpoint selected in FROM: PEP supports sublinks, they are
available in this menu. In Frame Relay, this is the PVC from which you are
selecting to groom data.

To: PEP

Selects the other packet endpoint for the packet connection. Refer to FROM: PEP
above for more detail.

Sublink

If the TO: PEP packet endpoint supports sublinks, the available sublinks are
shown within this menu, which includes the ROUTER option.

Protocol

Selects the protocols for this packet connection. Selecting the protocols on each
individual connection allows the mixing of data from multiple sources onto a
single PVC. Available protocols include the following: ALL, IP, BRIDGE IP,
PACKET VOICE, SNA, SNAP, and TRANSPARENT PROTOCOLS (TBOP and
TASYNC).
If ALL is selected, additional connections from that PVC are not allowed.
If ROUTER is selected as one packet endpoint, IP is automatically set as the PROTOCOL.
If a TBOP packet endpoint is selected as one packet endpoint, TRANSPARENT is
automatically set as the PROTOCOL.

Config

Determines data source and destination. The protocol selected determines which
of the following options are available:

Config Submenus

Description

Conflict

Indicates DLCI mismatch.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

234

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Cncts Sort

Config Submenus

Description

From

Indicates data source.

To

Indicates data destination.

Cncts Sort
Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Determines the order in which connections are displayed within PACKET CNCTS. Options include FROM
PKT ENDPT/SUBLINK, TO PKT ENDPT/SUBLINK, CONNECTION PROTOCOL, and OFF.

Frame Relay IQ
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Gathers and stores statistical information in the submenus ENABLE IQ STATS, PORT ENABLES, CONFIG, and
VIEW IQ STATISTICS.
Enable IQ Stats

Globally enables and disables IQ statistics gathering. IQ statistics are only
gathered when this option is enabled. This field defaults to the original setting
of [15 MIN, 7 DAYS, 96 INTS] when re-enabled.

Port Enables

Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for each port. Use the submenus
NAME, ENABLE, ALL SUBLINKS, and SUBLINKS to configure the individual ports.

Submenus

Description

Name

Displays the port number and name.

Enable

Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for the port identified in NAME.

All Sublinks

Provides an easy way to enable or disable IQ statistics gathering on all sublinks.
When this activator reads DISABLE, pressing  disables IQ statistics
gathering on all sublinks. When it reads ENABLE, pressing  enables IQ
statistics gathering on all sublinks.

Sublinks

Identifies the PVC to be polled. Indicates the number of sublinks that
ATLAS 800 Series will collect IQ data for within the given link.

61200780L1-1C

Name

Displays the user-designated name of the sublink (up to 15
characters).

DLCI

Displays the Data Link Connection Identifier (circuit number).

Enable

Indicates collection of IQ data for the target DLCI.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

235

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Config

Packet Manager
Frame Relay IQ

Sets the parameters for IQ statistics gathering.

Submenus

Description

Current PIVs

Identifies resources used by IQ statistics storage. A PIV is a port or PVC per
interval. ATLAS can track up to 10,000 PIVs. Think of it as a resource meter.
The PIV number is derived from the MAX DAYS and MAX INTERVALS selected by
the user. Changing one affects the other.
Interval Period Sets the period for IQ statistics gathering. Options are 5, 10, 15,

20, and 30 minutes.
Max Days

Defines the number of history day intervals to keep. Maximum
entry is dependent on the MAX INTERVALS setting.

Max Intervals Defines the number of history intervals to keep. Maximum
entry is dependent on the MAX DAYS setting.

View IQ Statistics

Displays statistical information gathered for intervals and days on a port and for
intervals and days on sublinks (PVCs or DLCIs).

View IQ Statistics
Submenus

Description

Interval and Day

Contains the statistics available in the INTERVAL or DAY:
Rx Frames

The number of frames the port received for the interval or day.

Rx Bytes

The number of bytes the port received for the interval or day.

Max Rx Thru

The maximum throughput the port received for the interval or
day.

Avg Rx Thru

The average throughput the port received for the interval or
day.

Max Rx Util% The maximum utilization the port received for the interval or

day.

61200780L1-1C

Avg Rx Util%

The average utilization the port received for the interval or day.

Tx Frames

The number of frames the port transmitted for the interval or
day.

Tx Bytes

The number of bytes the port transmitted for the interval or day.

Max Tx Thru

The maximum throughput the port transmitted for the interval
or day.

Avg Tx Thru

The average throughput the port transmitted for the interval or
day.

Max Tx Util%

The maximum utilization the port transmitted for the interval or
day.

Avg Tx Util%

The average utilization the port transmitted for the interval or
day.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

236

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

View IQ Statistics
Submenus

Packet Manager
Frame Relay IQ

Description (Continued)
Port UA Time Time, in seconds, the port is unavailable due to physical or

Frame Relay outage.
Sig Down Time Time, in seconds, the signaling state has been down.
Signal Error

The number of PVC signaling frames received with protocol
violations.

Signal T/O

The number of PVC signal time-outs. Either T391 seconds
elapsed without receiving a response to a poll or T392 seconds
elapsed without receiving a poll.

Sig State Chg The number of state changes for the PVC signaling protocol.

This number includes transitions from down state to up state
and vice-versa.
Rx Full Stat

The number of PVC-signaling, full-status frames received.

Tx Full Stat

The number of PVC-signaling, full-status frames transmitted.

Rx LI only

The number of PVC-signaling, link integrity only frames
received.

Tx LI only

The number of PVC-signaling, link integrity only frames
transmitted.

Async Status The number of single PVC status frames received.
Discard Frame The number of frames discarded by the IQ unit.
Aborts

The number of frames received without proper flag
termination.

CRC Error

The number of frames received with CRC errors.

Octet Align

The number of frames received with a bit count not divisible by
eight.

Length Error

The number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes or
greater than 4500 bytes.

EA Violation

The number of frames received with errors in the EA field of
the Frame Relay header.

Inactive DLCI The number of frames received while the PVC is in the inactive

state.
Invalid DLCI

61200780L1-1C

The number of frames received with a DLCI value less than 16
or greater than 1007, not including PVC signaling frames.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

237

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Packet Manager
Frame Relay IQ

View IQ Statistics
Submenus

Description (Continued)

Sublink

Provides statistics available for a particular DLCI or PVC by Interval or Day.
Rx Frames

The number of frames the PVC received for the interval or day.

Rx Bytes

The number of bytes the PVC received for the interval or day.

Max Rx Thru

The maximum throughput the PVC received for the interval or
day.

Avg Rx Thru

The average throughput the PVC received for the interval or
day.

Max Rx Util% The maximum utilization the PVC received for the interval or

day.
Avg Rx Util% The average utilization the PVC received for the interval or day.

61200780L1-1C

Tx Frames

The number of frames the PVC transmitted for the interval or
day.

Tx Bytes

The number of bytes the PVC transmitted for the interval or
day.

Max Tx Thru

The maximum throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval
or day.

Avg Tx Thru

The average throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval or
day.

Max Tx Util%

The maximum utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval
or day.

Avg Tx Util%

The average utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval or
day.

PVC IA Time

Time, in seconds, the PVC has been in the inactive state for the
interval or day.

Rx FECN

The number of FECNs the PVC has received for the interval or
day.

Tx FECN

The number of FECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval
or day.

Rx BECN

The number of BECNs the PVC has received for the interval or
day.

Tx BECN

The number of BECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval
or day.

Rx DE

The number of DEs the PVC has received for the interval or
day.

Tx DE

The number of DEs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or
day.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

238

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

View IQ Statistics
Submenus

Packet Manager
Frame Relay IQ

Description (Continued)
Rx CR

Number of CRs the PVC has received for the interval or day.

Tx CR

Number of CRs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day.

Lost Frames

Number of lost frames on the PVC for the interval or day.

Rmt Lost Frms Number of remote lost frames on the PVC for the interval. Only
applies if IN-BAND SEQUENCE NUMBER is ENABLED on the PVC.
Rx Burst Sec Number of bursty seconds the PVC received for the interval or

day.
Tx Burst Sec

Number of bursty seconds the PVC transmitted for the interval
or day.

Min Rx Frame Minimum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.
Max Rx Frame Maximum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.
Avg Rx Frame Average frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.
Min Tx Frame Minimum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or

day.
Max Tx Frame Maximum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or

day.
Avg Tx Frame Average frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.
Min Frame Dly Minimum delay in milliseconds on the PVC IN-BAND DELAY
MEASUREMENT is ENABLED (see Sublinks - Frame Relay on page
216, the IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT option) for the PVC or

if PVC diagnostics are being performed.
Max Frame Dly Maximum delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or
day. Only applies if IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED
(see Sublinks - Frame Relay on page 216, the IN-BAND DELAY
MEASUREMENT option) for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are

being performed.
Avg Frame Dly Average delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or
day. Only applies if IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED
(see Sublinks - Frame Relay on page 216, the IN-BAND DELAY
MEASUREMENT option) for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are

being performed.
PVC State
Change

61200780L1-1C

Number of state changes for this PVC for the interval or day.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

239

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

9.

Router (IP)
Static Routes

ROUTER (IP)

The ATLAS 800 Series router uses the integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port to transmit local area network
(LAN) traffic over the wide area network (WAN) to a remote LAN. By integrating the router into the
network access device, you benefit from the cost savings of not requiring an external router. All routing
functions within the ATLAS are configured and monitored from the ROUTER menu (see Figure 15).

Figure 15. Router Menu (IP Selected)

Static Routes
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2
The STATIC ROUTES menu manages static IP routes. Use this menu to create, modify, and delete routes.
IP Address

Defines the IP address of the host or network device being routed to.

Netmask

Determines the number of bits used in the above-defined IP address for routing.
If a host address is desired for the IP address, this field must be set to
255.255.255.255.

Gateway

Defines the IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet.

Interface

Defines the interface to which IP packets with this address will be routed. These
are either Ethernet or frame relay DLCIs.

Hops

Defines the number of router hops required to get to the network or host.
Maximum distance is 15 hops.

Enabled

Adds a static route to the router.

Advertise

When set to YES, this static route is advertised over all interfaces on which a
route advertisement protocol (e.g., RIP) is enabled. When set to NO, this is a
private route.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

240

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
ARP Cache

ARP Cache
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2
The ARP CACHE menu displays the contents of the ATLAS Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. All
resolved cache entries time out after 20 minutes. Unresolved entries time out in 3 minutes.
IP Address

Read Security: 2
Displays the IP address used for resolving MAC address.

MAC Address

Read Security: 2
Resolves Ethernet address. If set to all zeros, there is no resolution for that
address.

Time

Read Security: 2
Displays the minutes since the entry was last referenced.

Type

Read Security: 2
Defines this entry as DYNAMIC or STATIC.

Interface

Read Security: 2
Displays the interface upon which this entry was found.

Tx Pending

Read Security: 2
Displays the number of transmit packets pending a reply.

Routes
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2
The ROUTES menu displays the contents of the ATLAS routing table. All static and discovered routes are
displayed from this menu.
IP Address

Read Security: 2
Displays the IP address of the destination host or network.

Netmask

Read Security: 2
Displays the subnet mask applied to the destination address.

Gateway

Read Security: 2
Displays the IP address of the next-hop router or host receiving the forwarded
IP packet.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

241

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Interface

Router (IP)
Routes

Read Security: 2
Displays the next-hop router or host interface through which IP packets are
routed, as defined here:

Submenu

Description

Local

Forwards the packet directly to the ATLAS router.

EN0 IP

Forwards the packet through the ATLAS Ethernet port.

Endpoint Name

Forwards the packet using the DLCI number.

Used

Read Security: 2
Displays the number of times the router has referenced this route.

Clr

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2
Clears the USED menu and resets the value to zero.

Flags

Read Security: 2
Indicates the properties of this routing table entry, composed of the following
letters:

Character

Description

H

route is a host route

G

route is a gateway route

DR

route learned dynamically from RIP

I

route learned from an ICMP redirect

A

route learned from IARP

P

route is private and is not advertised with RIP

T

route is to a triggered port (updated only when table changes)

Hops

Read Security: 2
Displays the number of router hops required to get to the network or host.
Ranges from 0 to 16. If set to 16, the route is defined as infinite and cannot be
used.

TTL

Read Security: 2
Displays the number of seconds until the address is removed from table. A value
of 999 means the route is static.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

242

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Interfaces

Interfaces
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The INTERFACES menu configures and monitors all interfaces connected to the ATLAS router. These
include the Ethernet and frame relay DLCIs connected in the PACKET MANAGER/ PACKET CNCTS.
Network Name

Read Security: 2
Displays the name of the interface connected to the ATLAS router, as follows:

Interface

Description

EN0 IP

ATLAS Ethernet port

Endpoint Name

DLCI Number

Address

Defines the individual interface IP address. If this field is left as 0.0.0.0, it is
treated as an unnumbered interface.

Subnet Mask

Defines the subnet mask applied to the address defined for this link. If the
interface IP address is unnumbered, leave as 0.0.0.0.

IARP

(FR NI only)
The Inverse ARP (IARP) menu is only present when this interface is a
frame-relay network interface. ATLAS sends Inverse ARP packets to determine
the IP address on the other end of the virtual circuit. ATLAS always responds to
Inverse ARP requests with its IP address for the requested DLCI.

Option

Description

Enable

Causes ATLAS to dynamically send Inverse ARP packets to determine the IP
address on the other end of the virtual circuit. When an Inverse ARP packet is
not responded to, no route is placed in the IP route table. If the Inverse ARP
packet is responded to, a route is placed in the IP route table.

Disable

Instructs ATLAS not to generate Inverse ARP request packets. In this case, the
FAR-END ADDRESS parameter may be used to statically assign a route address

(see the following, Far-End Address).
Far-End Address

(FR NI only)
This menu is only present for frame-relay network interfaces, and it is only
selectable when IARP is disabled. Use this menu to specify the IP address of the
device on the other end of the virtual circuit. If that IP address is non-zero, a
static route to the far-end network will be added using the interface
SUBNET-MASK. If 0.0.0.0 has been specified for the SUBNET-MASK, a default
subnet mask is used, based on the class of the Far-End Address.

MTU

Defines maximum number of bytes in a datagram transmitted over this interface
(Maximum Transmit Unit).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

243

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Interfaces

Configures routing information protocol (RIP) on this interface.

RIP
Submenu

Description

Mode 1

Allows RIP to be enabled or disabled on a per-interface basis, as follows:
Tx Only

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted, but are not
listened to on this virtual circuit.

Rx Only

RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this virtual circuit, but
they are listened to.

Tx and Rx

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened
to on this virtual circuit.

Protocol 2

Sets the version of RIP being used on this interface. The options are RIP V1 and
RIP V2. If RIP V2 is used, a new menu, AUTHENTICATION, opens.

Method

Defines the method used to send RIP route advertisements, as follows:
None

All routes in the router table are advertised through this interface
with no modification of the routing metric.

Split Horizon Only advertises routes not learned through this interface.
Poison
Reverse
Updates

All routes are advertised, but the routes learned through this
interface are “poisoned” with an infinite route metric.

Defines when RIP advertisements are transmitted.
Periodic

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted.

Triggered

RIP advertisements are transmitted only when new routes are
learned, and learned routes do not age.

Authentication

Defines the secret used to advertise routes when using RIP V2.

Redistribute Default
Gateway

Enables or disables the transmission of the Default Gateway to be sent with RIP
on a per interface basis.

1

If RIP/MODE is off, PROTOCOL, METHOD, and UPDATE will not be visible.

2

If RIP V2 is used, a user-defined secret may have to be created.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

244

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Proxy ARP

Router (IP)
Global

Enables or disables Proxy ARP on this interface. Allows the network portion of
a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments.
When ENABLED, and an ARP (address resolution protocol) request is received
on the Ethernet port, the address is looked-up in the IP routing table. If the
forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route,
the router answers the request with its own hardware address. When DISABLED
(default), the router only responds to ARP request received for its own address.
The ARP protocol itself provides a way for devices to create a mapping between
physical (i.e., Ethernet) addresses and logical IP addresses. PROXY ARP uses the
mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a “proxy” for
the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request
then correctly assumes that it can reach the requested IP address by sending
packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively
hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted.

Global
Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port. The following menus are available for
review and editing:
Default Gateway

Defines or changes the default gateway. Enter the default gateway address by
entering a decimal number into the appropriate field and then pressing 
to move to the next field. You will need a default gateway if the LAN contains
multiple segments. This address is composed of four decimal numbers, each in
the range of 0 to 255, separated by periods. This value is set to 0.0.0.0 by
default. Contact your LAN administrator for the appropriate address.

Default Metric

Defines the default gateway metric. Enter the default gateway metric by
pressing  and entering a decimal number.

Default Gateway Cost

Defines the default gateway cost. Enter the default gateway metric by pressing
 and entering a decimal number.

Ping
Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to devices accessible via the network. Only one ping session
can be active at a time.

IP Address

Specifies the IP address to ping.

Count

Specifies the number of pings to send. The maximum value is 99.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

245

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Telnet Client

Size

Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request. The default
value is 64 bytes, and the maximum size is 1024 bytes.

Timeout

Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out.
The default timeout is three seconds, and the maximum timeout value is ten
seconds.

Round trip min

Displays the minimum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current
set of pings.

Round trip avg

Displays the average round trip time of the ping request/reply of the cur-rent set
of pings.

Round trip max

Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the cur-rent
set of pings.

Tx Stats

Displays the number of ping requests transmitted (n txed), the number of ping
replies received (n rxed) and the number of ping requests that were lost (n lost).

Reset Stats

Resets all ping statistics to zero. Stops an active ping client.

Start/Stop

If the ping client is currently idle, this menu sends pings to the specified
address. If the ping client is active, the menu stops sending pings.

Telnet Client
Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 800 Series route table.
Address

Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to.

Escape Char

Defines the Telnet client escape character. Typing the combination characters
will close the active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS
field.

Option

Keystroke

^]

 + ]

^\

 + \

^[

 + [

^^

 +  + 6

^_

 +  + -

Port

61200780L1-1C

Defines the port used in the remote login session. Default (for Telnet) is 23.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

246

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Statistics

Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the
ADDRESS field.

Connect

Statistics
Write Security: 2; Read security: 2
All of these statistics are taken from the MIB-II variables in RFC 1156. To clear the accumulated statistics,
press  on CLEAR. See the following tables:
•
•
•
•
•

Table 9., IP Statistics, on page 247
Table 10., ICMP Statistics, on page 249
Table 11., TCP Statistics, on page 250
Table 12., UDP Statistics, on page 251
Table 13., IP Fast Cache Statistics, on page 251

Clear
Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Clears current statistics in the IP, ICMP, TCP, UDP, and IP Fast Cache statistics tables.

Table 9. IP Statistics
Name

Description

Forwarding

The indication of whether this ATLAS 800 Series is acting as an IP gateway in
respect to the forwarding of datagrams received by, but not addressed to, this
ATLAS 800 Series. IP gateways forward datagrams; hosts do not (except those
Source-Routed via the host).

Default TTL

The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams
originated at this ATLAS 800 Series, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the
transport layer protocol.

InReceives

The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those
received in error.

InHdrErrors

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including
bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live
exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, etc.

InAddrErrors

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's
destination field was not a valid address to be received at this ATLAS 800 Series.
This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported
Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the
destination address was not a local address.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

247

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Clear

Table 9. IP Statistics (Continued)
Name

Description

ForwDatagrams

The number of input datagrams for which this ATLAS 800 Series was not their final
IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward
them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this
counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this
ATLAS 800 Series, and the Source-Route option processing was successful.

InUnknownProtos The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded

because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
InDiscards

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to
prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer
space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while
awaiting re-assembly.

InDelivers

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols
(including ICMP).

OutRequests

The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP)
supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include
any datagrams counted in FORWDATAGRAMS.

OutDiscards

The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to
prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for
lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in
FORWDATAGRAMS if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

OutNoRoutes

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit
them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in
FORWDATAGRAMS which meet this “no-route” criterion, as well as any datagrams
which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.

ReasmTimeout

The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are
awaiting reassembly at this ATLAS 800 Series.

ReasmReqds

The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this
ATLAS 800 Series.

ReasmOKs

The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

ReasmFails

The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever
reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded
IP fragments since some algorithms (notably RFC 815s) can lose track of the
number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

FragOKs

The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this
ATLAS 800 Series.

FragFails

The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be
fragmented at this ATLAS 800 Series but could not be, e.g., because their “Don't
Fragment” flag was set.

FragCreates

The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of
fragmentation at this ATLAS 800 Series.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

248

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Clear

Table 9. IP Statistics (Continued)
Name

Description

Clear

Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 10. ICMP Statistics
Name

Description

InMsgs

The total number of ICMP messages which the ATLAS 800 Series received.
Note that this counter includes all those counted by INERRORS.

InErrors

The number of ICMP messages which the ATLAS 800 Series received but
determined as having errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.)

InDestUnreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

InTimeExcds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

InParmProbs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

InSrcQuenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.

InRedirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

InEchos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

InEchoReps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

InTimestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.

InTimestampReps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.

InAddrMasks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

InAddrMaskReps

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

OutMsgs

The total number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 800 Series attempted to
send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by ICMPOUTERRORS.

OutErrors

The number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 800 Series did not send due
to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should
not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP
to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types
of error which contribute to this counter's value.

OutDestUnreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

OutTimeExcds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

OutParmProbs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

OutSrcQuenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.

OutRedirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent.

OutEchos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

OutEchoReps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

OutTimestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

249

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
Clear

Table 10. ICMP Statistics (Continued)
Name

Description

OutTimestampReps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.

OutAddrMasks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.

OutAddrMaskReps

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.

Clear

Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 11. TCP Statistics
Name

Description

RtoAlgorithm

The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting
unacknowledged octets.

RtoMin

The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission
timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type
depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In
particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the
semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

RtoMax

The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission
timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type
depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In
particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the
semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

MaxConn

The limit on the total number of TCP connections the ATLAS 800 Series can
support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this
object should contain the value -1.

ActiveOpens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the
SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.

PassiveOpens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the
SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.

AttemptFails

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the
CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the
number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN
state from the SYN-RCVD state.

EstabResets

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the
CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state.

CurrEstab

The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either
ESTABLISHED or CLOSE-WAIT.

InSegs

The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This
count includes segments received on currently established connections.

OutSegs

The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but
excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

250

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)
UDP Relay

Table 11. TCP Statistics (Continued)
Name

Description

RetransSegs

The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP segments
transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.

Clear

Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 12. UDP Statistics
Name

Description

InDatagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.

NoPorts

The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at
the destination port.

InErrors

The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons
other than the lack of an application at the destination port.

OutDatagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this ATLAS 800 Series.

Clear

Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 13. IP Fast Cache Statistics
Name

Description

Hits

Total number of times the ATLAS 800 Series went into the Fast Cache and
successfully retrieved an IP address.

Misses

Total number of times the ATLAS 800 Series went into the Fast Cache and failed
to retrieve an IP address.

Clear

Clears the accumulated statistics.

UDP Relay
Write Security: 2; Read security: 2
Allows the router to act as a relay agent for UDP (User Datagram Protocol) broadcast packets. Normally, a
router will not forward UDP broadcast packets. However, many network applications use UDP broadcasts
to configure addresses, host names, and other information. If hosts using these protocols are not on the
same network segment as the servers providing the information, the client programs will not receive a
response without enabling the UDP relay agent.
Enable

Enables/disables the router to act as a relay agent.

Relay Table

Lists up to four relay destination servers (RELAY TABLE 0 - 3). Each server can
be configured using the following menus: ENABLE, IP, and UDP.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

251

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Router (IP)

Submenu

Description

Enable

Enables this field (select either STANDARD or SPECIFIED). DISABLE is not used.
Standard

(Default) Relays any of the following standard UDP protocols:
DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123),
NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server, port 137), NBDG (Net BIOS
Datagram, port 138), and BootP.

Specified

Specifies the UDP port (1 to 65,535) in the UDP Port columns
(maximum of three per server).

IP

Defines the IP address of the server that receives the relay packet.

UDP Ports 1 - 3

Specifies the UDP ports to relay. These fields are active only when ENABLE is
set to SPECIFIED.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

252

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Activate Map

10. DEDICATED MAPS
The DEDICATED MAPS menu assigns dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS 800
Series. This section describes the DEDICATED MAPS menu items (see Figure 16). These options are
module-dependent; that is, the menu items available depend on the module selected.

Figure 16. Dedicated Maps Menu

Activate Map
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Activates a dedicated map—automatically or manually. You can have up to five different dedicated maps,
each with an optionally specified name. The configuration choices are:
Auto

Automatically activates a particular dedicated map at the time and day specified
in the ACTIVATE TIME field.

Maps 1 through 5

Allows you to manually activate a specific dedicated map. To manually activate
a dedicated map, highlight the ACTIVATE MAP field and press . Choose
the desired dedicated map from the popup menu list.

Current Map
Read security: 5

Displays the name of the currently active dedicated map (read-only).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

253

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps

Create/Edit Maps
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Creates new maps and defines settings, as well as edits existing maps. To add a new map, position the
cursor in the index column and press . ATLAS 800 Series automatically names the maps in the
sequence in which they are created. You can change the names with MAP NAME.
#

Displays the index number of the available maps.

Map Name

Displays the name of the dedicated map. The name can contain up to 57
alpha-numeric characters, including spaces and special characters. To edit the
name, press  and type in the new name.

Sort To/From

Specifies sort order based on the end points set in CONNECTS/FROM CONFIG and
CONNECTS/TO CONFIG. You can also turn OFF this option. The sort feature is
helpful when you are attempting to find a particular connection in a large
connection list.

Connects

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press  to activate the submenus.
You must return to DEDICATED MAPS in the MAIN MENU for changes to take
effect. Some of the CONNECTS options change depending on the type of modules
selected in the FROM or TO fields. For more information on these submenus,
refer to the individual module discussions:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Create/Edit Maps: T1/PRI Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 256
Create/Edit Maps: E1/PRA Connects Menu -To/From Config on page 257
Create/Edit Maps: V35Nx Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 258
Create/Edit Maps: USSI Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 258
Create/Edit Maps: Octal BRI Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 258
Create/Edit Maps: DS3 and DS3 D&I Connects Menu - To/From Config on

page 259
•
•
•
•

61200780L1-1C

Create/Edit Maps: NxT1 HSSI Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 259
Create/Edit Maps: FXS-8 Connects Menu - To/From Config on page 260
Create/Edit Maps: Connects Menu - Pkt Endpt on page 262
Create/Edit Menus: Connects Menu - Pkt Voice on page 262

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

254

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps

Submenu

Description

From Slt

Specifies the slot to use for the FROM connection. When you select this option, a
list of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays. Select the
appropriate slot and press .

Port

Specifies the port to use for the From connection. when you select this option, a
list of ports and module types appears. Select the appropriate port and module
type, and press .

To Slot/Service

Specifies the slot to use for the second end of a connection. Select this option,
and a list of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays. Pick
the appropriate slot and press . A PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint may
also be selected as the service for the connection.

Port

Specifies the port to use for the second end of a connection. When you select
this option, a list of ports and module types appears. Select the appropriate port
and module type, and press . If a PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint is
selected for the TO SLOT/SERVICE field, the available packet endpoints or packet
voice endpoints will display in the drop down menu after pressing .

From Config

Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection. The selections displayed in
this field are based on the type of module selected in the FROM SLT option. For
detailed information on submenus for a particular module type, please refer to
the DEDICATED MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or
resource module.

To Config

Specifies the configuration for the TO connection. The selections displayed in
this field are based on the type of module selected in the TO SLT option. For
detailed information on submenus for a particular module type, please refer to
the DEDICATED MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or
resource module.

SIG

Specifies whether the ATLAS 800 Series uses active RBS on the connection.
Selecting ON allows the ATLAS 800 Series to preserve signaling bits between
the two endpoints of the connection. Selecting OFF ignores the signaling bits of
the connection. This selection is automatically set to OFF when RBS does not
apply. For example, a T1-to-Nx connection is set to OFF.

Activate Time

Sets the time when the map becomes active if you have selected AUTO in the
ACTIVATE MAP field. Enter this time in hh:mm:ss 24-hour format.

Enbl Day

Specifies which days of the week the map is active.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

255

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: T1/PRI Connects Menu - To/From Config

Create/Edit Maps: T1/PRI Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections may apply to the Quad
T1/PRI Option Module, depending on the application:
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for a T1 port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this
connection. You can enter the DS0s in several ways. For example, to enter DS0s
one through five, enter 1-5. For DS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

DS0 Available

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 are assigned. DS0 assignment is based on the
following items.

Item

Description

Digit 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the
DS0 number.

*

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet activated for this
port.

!

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

s

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connection.

n

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

N

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this connection.

DS0 Rate

T1 Trunk Conditioning
Service

61200780L1-1C

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps. This field is only valid for T1 ports
mapped to a PKT ENDPNT.
Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing DS0s
which are cross-connected to a T1 port experiencing alarms.
The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2.5 second transmission (indicating
call termination), followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final
condition as chosen by the user. This selection is only valid for T1 ports having
RBS set to ON.
This option defines to ATLAS 800 Series the type of signaling being used on
the trunk: E&M, LS/GS NETWORK OR USER, SW56, or CUSTOM.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

256

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

T1 Trunk Conditioning
State

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: E1/PRA Connects Menu -To/From Config

Defines the final fault signaling state.

Submenu

Description

Idle

Used for one-way trunks; that is, for outgoing or incoming calls only – not both.

Seized

Used for two-way trunks. Prevents connected equipment from attempting to use
a failed trunk for an outgoing call.

T1 Fault Signaling

Displays the final fault signaling state of the AB bits. This field is read-only
unless CUSTOM is chosen for the T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE option.

T1 Trouble Code Value Displays the Hex value of the 2.5 second pre-alarm transmission.
:

Create/Edit Maps: E1/PRA Connects Menu -To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections may apply to the Quad
E1/PRA Option Module, depending on the application:
TS0 Selection

Defines TS0s for an E1 port. Use this field to define the TS0s for this
connection. You can enter the TS0s in several ways. For example, to enter TS0s
one through five, enter 1-5. For TS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

TS0 Available

Indicates which TS0s of the E1 are assigned. TS0 assignment is based on the
following items:

Item

Description

Digit 0-9

This TS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the
TS0 number.

*

This TS0 has been requested for this connection, but the TS0 is not yet activated for this
port.

!

This TS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

s

This TS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This TS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLANand conflicts with this connection.

n

This TS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

N

This TS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this connection.

TS0 Rate

61200780L1-1C

Sets the TS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps. This field is only valid for E1 ports
mapped to a PKT ENDPNT.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

257

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

E1 Trouble Code
Service

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: V35Nx Connects Menu - To/From Config

Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing TS0s
which are cross-connected to a E1 port experiencing alarms. The trunk
conditioning process consists of a 2.5 second transmission (indicating call
termination), followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final
condition as chosen by the user. Set the E1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE field to OFF
or VOICE.

T1 Trouble Code Value Displays the Hex value of the 2.5 second pre-alarm transmission.

Create/Edit Maps: V35Nx Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection. The following selections may apply to the Quad Nx
56/64 Option Module, depending on the application:
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for an Nx port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this
connection. This field only applies to Nx-to-Nx or Nx-to-Pkt Endpt
connections.

DS0 Rate

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

Create/Edit Maps: USSI Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections may apply to the Quad
USSI Option Module, depending on the application:
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for an USSI port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this
connection. This field only applies to USSI-to-USSI, USSI-to-Nx or
USSI-to-Pkt Endpt connections.

DS0 Rate

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

Create/Edit Maps: Octal BRI Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections may apply to the Octal
BRI Option Module, depending on the application:
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for an BRI port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this
connection. This field only applies to BRI-to-BRI, BRI-to-USSI, BRI-to-Nx or
BRI-to-Pkt Endpt connections.

DS0 Rate

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

258

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: DS3 and DS3 D&I Connects Menu - To/From Config
NT/LT

Configures the BRI U interface to be network termination or line termination.

Create/Edit Maps: DS3 and DS3 D&I Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The following selections apply to the T3 and the T3 with Drop and Insert modules, depending on the
application:
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for a specific T1 in the T3 circuit. Use this field to define the
DS0s for this connection. You can enter the DS0s in several ways. For example,
to enter DS0s one through five, enter1,5. For DS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

DS0 Available

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 are assigned. DS0 assignment is based on the
following items:

Item

Description

Digit 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the
DS0 number.

*

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet activated for this
port.

!

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

s

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connection.

n

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

N

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this connection.

Create/Edit Maps: NxT1 HSSI Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

The following selection applies to the NxT1 HSSI Option Module when connected to a port on a T1
Module. This is the only valid application for the NxT1 HSSI Option Module.
DS0 Selection

Defines DS0s for the T1 port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this
connection.
Any entry in the DS0 selection field that is less than 24 DS0s is disregarded. The NxT1
HSSI Module requires the use of all 24 DS0s on a T1 for proper operation.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

259

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: FXS-8 Connects Menu - To/From Config

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 are assigned. DS0 assignment is based on the
following items:

DS0s Available

Item

Description

Digit 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the
DS0 number.

*

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet activated for this
port.

!

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

s

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connection.

n

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

N

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this connection.

Create/Edit Maps: FXS-8 Connects Menu - To/From Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

# Ports

Defines ports to be used for this connection.

Ports Available

Indicates which ports of the module are assigned. Port assignment is based on
the following items:

Item

Description

Digit 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the
DS0 number.

*

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet activated for this
port.

!

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

s

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connection.

n

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

N

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this connection.

Signaling Method

61200780L1-1C

Defines the mode of operation of the selected voice port. The signaling on the
T1 mapped to this voice port must match. The options include LOOPSTART,
GROUNDSTART, and PLAR.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

260

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: FXS-8 Connects Menu - To/From Config

Answer Supervision

Configures answer supervision for the appropriate voice port. Answer
supervision (when the far end answers the call) is indicated by using reverse
battery polarity. This is valid for an outbound call only. On an FXS interface
type we respond to LSAS (Line Side Answer Supervision) signaling on the T1.
Our response is to reverse battery polarity on (T-R). Telco must configure their
T1 for LSAS if this is not a point-to-point T1.

E&M Conversion

Configures the selected voice port for E&M signaling conversion. By enabling
this option, other selections become available that are E&M trunk specific. This
option is sometimes referred to as TANDEM conversion. The following
submenu items become visible when E&M CONVERSION is ENABLED:

Submenu

Description

E&M Supervision

Configures the E&M trunk as either Immediate start or Wink start. This
configuration is for the Rx and Tx direction. When DNIS delay is set, this
option only configures the Rx direction.

Dial Tone

Configures the ATLAS 830 to generate Dial Tone out the selected FXS port in
response to the 2W going off hook (outgoing call). Generally, dial tone is
provided by the Class 5 switch delivering the T1, but in some instances, the
switch cannot provide dial tone.

Ringback

Configures the ATLAS 830 to generate ringback tone to the far end while the
selected FXS port is ringing. Generally, ringback is provided by the Class 5
switch delivering the T1, but in some instances, the switch cannot provide
ringback tones.

DNIS

DelayDefines the time we delay after transmitting a wink in response to the 2W
going off hook (after ringing) before we send off hook in the RBS signaling.
This field is only valid for E&M conversion. The timing is as follows:
Rx AB
Tx AB

DNIS Wink Timeout

W

DNIS Delay

Off Hook

When DNIS DELAY is ENABLED, a wink will be returned to the originating switch
after 5 seconds if the FXS does not detect an off hook. This option, when
DISABLED, allows the FXS port to ring without winking until the call is
answered.
Trunks can be taken out of service by telco if there is No wink. Use caution when
disabling this option.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

261

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Maps: Connects Menu - Pkt Endpt

Create/Edit Maps: Connects Menu - Pkt Endpt
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

To assign a packet endpoint to a physical port, select the port in the FROM SLOT/PORT field and configure
the TO SLOT/PORT as follows:
To Slot/Service

Select PKT ENDPNT to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO
PORT field.

To Port/PEP

Press  and select the appropriate packet endpoint to assign the endpoint
to a physical port.

To/From Config

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following
selections apply to the packet endpoint:

Submenu

Description

Transmit Idle Code

Configures the ATLAS 800 Series to send idle code on the packet endpoint with
marks or flags.

Receive Idle Code

Defines the idle code (either marks or flags) the ATLAS 800 Series should
expect on the selected packet endpoint.

Create/Edit Menus: Connects Menu - Pkt Voice
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

To Slot/Service

Select Pkt Voice to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO PORT
field.

To Port/PEP

Press  and select the appropriate packet endpoint from the drop-down
list.

To/From Config

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following
selections apply to the PKT VOICE connections:

Submenu

Description

DLCI

Press  and select the appropriate DLCI from the drop-down list.

Voice Port

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. Express units support ports
1 and 2. A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

Conflict Report

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or
Voice port already in use.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

262

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dedicated Maps
Create/Edit Menus: Connects Menu - Pkt Voice

Submenu

Description

Voice Compression

Configures the compression algorithm used on the selected packet voice
endpoint. Older FSUs use G.723.1 at 6.3kbps, and newer FSUs use 6.4K
Netcoder. The compression algorithm must match at both endpoints.

Silence Suppression Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending

frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both
endpoints must agree to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression
is ENABLED to prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total
system bandwidth.
Signaling

61200780L1-1C

Signaling method on the packet voice endpoint. Both endpoints must agree
about the compression algorithm choice.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

263

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Circuit Status
From

11. CIRCUIT STATUS
The CIRCUIT STATUS menu allows the user to view the status of all circuits configured for dedicated circuit
backup (see Figure 8).

Figure 17. Circuit Status Menu

From
Read security: 5

Indicates the slot, port, and name of the endpoint configured for backup.

MAN (Manual Backup)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This activator forces a link in/out of backup. Select FB to force a backup and FR to force a restore.

BKUP Status (Backup Status)
Read security: 5

The displayed string indicates the current status of the dedicated line. The following selections are
available for the BACKUP STATUS menu item.
FB

Backup was forced through the interface menu.

FR

Restore was forced through the interface menu.

Primary

The link is active.

Dialing

Attempting to dial the backup link.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

264

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Circuit Status
Line Status

Backup Failed

Exceeded MAX NUM REDIALS.

Retry Dial [num]

Will retry backup dialing in [num] seconds.

Primary Down

The link is in error and waiting on backup.

Answering

The link is answering a backup endpoint.

Backup

The link is in backup.

Line Status
Read security: 5

Displays the overall status of the connection. The following selections are available for the LINE STATUS
menu item.
Unknown

Endpoints do not support (or are not configured) for monitoring.

Active

The connection is up and running.

Inactive

The connection is down due to configuration (i.e., DTR is down).

Data Alarm

The FROM endpoint is in data alarm.

Network Alarm

The TO endpoint is in network alarm.

Net/Data Alarm

Both the FROM endpoint and the TO endpoint are in alarm.

Data Unknown

The status of the FROM endpoint is unknown.

Delay
When present, this indicates that one ATLAS 800 Series has detected a change in state and is counting
down to delay/restore.

Test
Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Contains a test activator and test status displays for dedicated dial backup circuits.
Last Run Time

Read security: 5
Displays the date and time of the last test call made through this dedicated dial
backup circuit. (Not seen until circuit is tested.)

Next Run Time

Read security: 5

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

265

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Circuit Status
Test

Displays the date and time of the next schedule test call to be made through this
dedicated dial backup circuit. (Not seen unless TEST CALL is configured for
something other than manual in the INTERFACE CONFIG for the CIRCUIT BACKUP
ENDPOINT.)
Last Test Status

Read security: 5
Displays the status of the last test call made through this dedicated dial backup
circuit. The following status messages may display:

Message

Description

Idle

No current test call on this dedicated dial backup circuit

Passed

Passed last manual or scheduled test

Failed

Failed last manual or scheduled test

Pass: Fail

Read security: 5
Displays the number of successful and unsuccessful test calls made through this
dedicated dial backup circuit.

Test Now

Write security: 5; Read security: 5
Press to initiate a test call on the dedicated dial backup circuit.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

266

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan

12. DIAL PLAN
The DIAL PLAN submenus set global ATLAS 800 Series switch parameters as well as individual parameters
for each ATLAS 800 Series port handling a switched call (see Figure 18). The individual ports are
separated into two port types: network and user. Network ports terminate a connection from the network.
User ports terminate incoming calls and, in turn, may be connected to user equipment.
In applications where two ATLAS 800 Series units are used in a point-to-point configuration, a port in the
ATLAS 800 Series at one end would act as the network (user termination), while the ATLAS 800 Series at
the opposite end would be terminating a network connection (network termination).

Figure 18. Dial Plan Menu
Network Term
Slot/Svc
Port/PEP
Sig
Out#Accept
Ifce Config
Subst Templ

User Term

Global Param

Slot/Svc
Port/PEP
Sig
In#Accept
Ifce Config
Subst Templ

Ifce Config - Module

End of Number Timeout
Country Code
Area or City Code
Nbr Complete Templates
Submenus
Automatic Routeback Rejection
Collision Response
Global Tone Type

T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRI)
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term- Ifce Config (RBS)
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (PRI)
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (RBS)
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)
E1/PRA: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRA)
E1/PRA: User Term - Ifce Config (PRA)
V35Nx: User Term - Ifce Config
USSI: User Term - Ifce Config
Octal BRI/U: Network Term - Ifce Config
Octal BRI/U: User Term - Ifce Config
Octal BRI S/T: User Termination
FXS-8: User Term - Ifce Config
Async232: User Term - Ifce Config
Pkt Endpt: User Term - Ifce Config
Ckt Backup: User Term - Ifce Config
Pkt Voice: Network Term - Ifce Config
Pkt Voice: User Term - Ifce Config

Figure 19. Hyperlinked Dial Plan Menu Tree (Partial)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

267

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Network Term

Network Term
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from the
network.
Slot/Svc

Selects the ATLAS 800 Series slot or service that terminates a network
connection.

Port/PEP

Selects the ATLAS 800 Series port or packet endpoint that terminates a network
connection.
More than one “endpoint” can be associated with a particular port. If a T1 is
connected to the PSTN, some DS0s may be used for long distance, while others
are-mb3 used for local calls. These would constitute two “endpoints” (trunks)
over a single physical port.
Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection (endpoint). Select
RBS for a T1 using Robbed Bit Signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN
interface. Select NFAS for a non-facility associated signaling interface or NONE
for OSC when bonding DS0s. This selection is only necessary if a T1/PRI is
selected as the SLOT/PORT type.

Sig

One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint.
Out#Accept

The following OUT#ACCEPT submenus define the parameters for the outgoing
calls that the ATLAS 800 Series sends to the network:

Submenus

Description

Src ID

Identifies the call source ID from which this endpoint accepts calls. This field
simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call. SRC ID may be entered with the usual wild card entries (except $).
X = Any digit 0 through 9
[1,3,5] = Any of these digits
0 = Default value
The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0. This results in
all calls being routed based on the dialed number.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

268

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Network Term

Submenus

Description (Continued)

Accept Number

Designates which numbers this endpoint passes on toward the network. The
accept list may consist of multiple entries. The numbers are defined using the
following wild cards:
X = Any single digit
N = Any single digit 2 through 9
$ = Any number of digits of any value
9 = This specific number
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
For example, 1-800-$ only permits toll-free, long distance calls to 1-800. If this
were used, then a second accept number permitting local numbers to be dialed
would need to be specified (NXX-XXXX).
Any specific entry takes precedence over a wild card. For example, if endpoint A is
designated as $ while endpoint B accepts 963-800X, then an incoming call to 963-800X
will only be accepted by endpoint B.

Search

Instructs ATLAS 800 Series in which order to search for an accept number
match. Normally, all searches are set to primary. The secondary search selection
forces ATLAS 800 Series to only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary
endpoints are unavailable.
Primary Search

All long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC
(MCI, ATT, etc.). Local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC. It
may be desirable to place long distance calls on the local
exchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable (busy or in
alarm). In this case, the primary accept number for the local
exchange would be N$, and the secondary accept would be 1$.
Secondary Search

The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches
as for primary searches.
Data 64K, Data 56K, Reflects the bearer capability the network has provisioned for this line. If the
Audio, Speech
ISDN lines were purchased with different services provisioned, then

ATLAS 800 Series would send the call out of the port which supports the type
of service the call requires.
For example, the network termination is on a pair of BRIs (with the same phone
number) with one provisioned for data and the other for voice. By enabling data
in one and not the other, ATLAS 800 Series ensures that calls bearing data will
be sent out the proper BRI interface.
Treat Call As

61200780L1-1C

Allows the incoming call to be treated as the selected call type, regardless of the
actual incoming call type. The default selection, As Received, effectively
disables the feature by using the actual call type. Other options include DATA
64K and DATA 56K.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

269

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Out#Rej

Dial Plan
Network Term

Defines parameters for outgoing calls that ATLAS 800 Series will not send to

the network.
Submenus

Description

Reject Number

Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network. The
reject list may consist of multiple entries. The reject list may be used to more
easily specify the call filtering desired. The wildcards are identical as in
OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268).
The reject list takes precedence over the accept list. For example, 1-900-$ rejects all
1-900 long distance calls, and 1-$ rejects all long distance calls.

Data 64K, Data 56K, Rejects outgoing calls based on call type. For example, setting the reject number
Audio, Speech
to $, Digital 56/64 to ENABLED, and Audio and Speech to DISABLED will reject

all digital calls, but accept analog calls.
This list may remain blank if the accept list meets desired filtering.

Ifce Config

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint. The selections
displayed in this field are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT/SVC
option. For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type,
please refer to the dial plan interface configuration menu discussion for the
appropriate network, option, or resource module.
Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules
selected in the SLT/SVC or PRT/PEP fields. For more information on these submenus,
refer to the individual module interface configuration discussions in this section.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

270

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Subst Templ

Dial Plan
Network Term

The following substitution template submenus allow the ATLAS 800 Series to
select calls (based on telephone number) and substitute a user-defined number
for the received digits after the call has been processed by the switchboard.
Substitution templates are created for each entry in the Dial Plan.

Submenus

Description

Original#

Designates the number(s) to be the search criteria for the substitution template.
The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as part of the
number specification.
X
N
$
9
[1,2,3...]

=
=
=
=
=

Any single digit
Any single digit 2 through 9
Any number of digits of any value
This specific number
A single digit in this group

Example: 963-812[012] would be 963-8120 to 963-8122.
Substituted#

Designates the number to be substituted for the number(s) defined in the
ORIGINAL# field. The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used
as a part of the number specification.
X
N
$
9
[1,2,3...]

=
=
=
=
=

Any single digit
Any single digit 2 through 9
Any number of digits of any value
This specific number
A single digit in this group

Punctuation characters ( ) - + are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a .5
second pause in the dial string.
For example, the ORIGINAL# field contains $ and the SUBSTITUTED# field
contains ,256$. All calls routed out this connection will be delayed .5 seconds
and contain a 256 prefix.
Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED# field are only valid when used in the same
position (relative to the end of the digit string) as the ORIGINAL# field.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

271

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
User Term

User Term
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows you to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from user
equipment. In this case, ATLAS 800 Series is acting as the network.
In applications where two ATLAS 800 Series units are used in a point-to-point configuration, a port in the
ATLAS 800 Series at one end would act as the network (user termination), while the ATLAS 800 Series at
the opposite end would be terminating a network connection (network termination).
Slot/Svc

Selects the ATLAS 800 Series slot or service that terminates a user connection.

Port/PEP

Selects the ATLAS 800 Series port or packet endpoint that terminates a network
connection. More than one “endpoint” can be associated with a particular port.
If a T1 is connected to the PSTN, some DS0s may be used for long distance,
while others are used for local calls. These would constitute two “endpoints”
(trunks) over a single physical port.

Sig

Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection (endpoint). Select
RBS for a T1 using robbed bit signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN
interface. Select NFAS for a non-facility associated signaling interface or NONE
for OSC when bonding DS0s. This selection is only necessary if a T1/PRI is
selected as the SLOT/PORT type.
One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint.

In#Accept

The following IN#ACCEPT submenus define the parameters for the incoming
calls that ATLAS 800 Series accepts from the network.

Submenus

Description

Src ID

Identifies the call source ID from which this endpoint accepts calls. This field
simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call. SRC ID may be entered with the usual wild card entries (except $).
X = Any digit 0 through 9
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
0 = Default value
The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0. This results in
all calls being routed based on the dialed number

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

272

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
User Term

Submenus

Description (Continued)

Accept Number

Designates which numbers this endpoint will accept (terminate) from the
network. The accept list may consist of multiple entries. The numbers are
defined using the following wildcards:
X = Any single digit
N = Any single digit 2 through 9
$ = Any number of digits of any value
9 = This specific number
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
For example, 963-8000 would be a specific incoming number that would be
accepted by this endpoint. If this endpoint consisted of a T1 with multiple DS0s,
a “hunt” group for 963-8000 would be formed. The entry $ would accept any
call.
Any specific entry will take precedence over a wildcard. For example, if endpoint A was
designated as $ while endpoint B accepted 963-800X, then an incoming call to
963-800X would only be accepted by endpoint B.

Search

Instructs ATLAS 800 Series in which order to search for an accept number
match. Normally, all searches are set to primary. The secondary search selection
forces ATLAS 800 Series to only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary
endpoints are unavailable.
Primary Search

All long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC
(MCI, ATT, etc.), and local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC.
It may be desirable to place long distance calls on the local
exchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable (busy or in
alarm). In this case, the primary accept number for the local
exchange would be N$, and the secondary accept would be 1$.
Secondary Search

The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches
as for primary searches.
Data 64K, Data 56K, Reflects the bearer capability of the attached user equipment (typically a TA). If
Audio, Speech
the attached TA can only handle digital calls, then a voice call sent to this

endpoint would be rejected.
Treat Call As

61200780L1-1C

Allows the incoming call to be treated as the selected call type, regardless of the
actual incoming call type. The default selection, AS RECEIVED, effectively
disables the feature by using the actual call type. Other options include
DATA 64K and DATA 56K.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

273

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Out#Rej

Dial Plan
User Term

The following OUT#REJ submenus define the parameters for the outgoing calls
that ATLAS 800 Series will not send to the network.

Submenus

Description

Reject Number

Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network. Use
when the outgoing call filter is different for different users sharing this endpoint.
The wildcards are identical as in OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268).
[0,1]-$ rejects all long distance calls, but only for this USER termination. If
permitted in the NETWORK termination endpoint, this user could not dial long
distance numbers while other users could.

Data 64K, Data 56K, Rejects outgoing calls based on call type. For example, setting the reject number
Audio, Speech
to $, Digital 56/64 to ENABLED, and Audio and Speech to DISABLED, rejects all

digital calls while not rejecting analog calls. This list may remain blank if the
accept list meets desired filtering.
Ifce Config

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.The selections displayed
in this field are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT/SVC option.
For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type, please refer
to the dial plan interface configuration menu discussion for the appropriate
network, option, or resource module.
Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of
modules selected in the SLOT/SVC or PORT/PEP fields. For more information on
these submenus, refer to the individual module interface configuration menu
discussions in this section.

Subst Templ

The following substitution template submenus allow the ATLAS 800 Series to
select calls (based on telephone number) and substitute a user-defined number
for the received digits after the call has been processed by the switchboard.
Substitution templates are created for each entry in the Dial Plan.

Submenu

Descriptions

Original#

Designates the number(s) to be the search criteria for the substitution template.
The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as part of the
number specification.
X = Any single digit
N = Any single digit 2 through 9
$ = Any number of digits of any value
9 = This specific number
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
For example, 963-812[012] would be 963-8120 to 963-8122.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

274

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Global Param

Submenu

Descriptions (Continued)

Substituted#

Designates the number to be substituted for the number(s) defined in the
ORIGINAL# field. The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used
as a part of the number specification.
X = Any single digit
N = Any single digit 2 through 9
$ = Any number of digits of any value
9 = This specific number
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
Punctuation characters ( ) - + are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a .5
second pause in the dial string. For example, the ORIGINAL# field contains $ and
the SUBSTITUTED# field contains ,256$. All calls routed out this connection will
be delayed .5 seconds and contain a 256 prefix.
Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED# field are only valid when used in the same
position (relative to the end of the digit string) as the ORIGINAL# field.

Global Param
Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Sets ATLAS 800 Series options which apply to all switched operations, both incoming and outgoing calls.
End of Number
Timeout

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Sets the length of time ATLAS 800 Series waits before assuming the outgoing
dialed number is complete. The default value is six seconds. This timeout will
only be invoked if the dialed number does not match one of the patterns set in
the NUMBER COMPLETE TEMPLATE menu (see Nbr Complete Templates below).

Country Code

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
The country code. Enter your international country code using only digits. For
the United States, enter 1.

Area or City Code

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
The local area code. Use for sending caller ID to the network.

Nbr Complete
Templates

61200780L1-1C

Write security: 3; Read security: 5
Sets completed number patterns for outgoing calls so that ATLAS 800 Series
recognizes when the phone number is complete. Fields include the index
number (#) and PATTERN. For example, a local number will be 7 digits long
while a long distance (1+ area code + number) will be 11 digits long. The

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

275

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Global Param

ATLAS 800 Series defaults cover almost any installation, and these templates
should not require any additional user input – except for unusual circumstances.
The template allows the use of the following wildcard inputs to define numbers:
X = Any single digit
N = Any single digit 2 through 9
911 = This specific number
[1,2,3...] = A single digit in this group
Number Type Templates The following NUMBER TYPE TEMPLATES submenus set call-type patterns. ISDN

interfaces require that a number type be sent over the D channel when a call is
sent or received. A normal RBS trunk does not send a type designator, but uses
prefixes instead. For example, “1 +” prefix is a national long distance call type
while a “011 +” prefix is an international long distance call type. These
templates form a table to permit ATLAS 800 Series to translate the RBS prefix
into a call type for ISDN and vice-versa.
The ATLAS 800 Series default templates should cover all applications and should not
need to be added to by the user except for very rare circumstances.
Submenus

Description

#

Denotes an entry number. The maximum number of entries is 50. Press  to
insert a new entry and  to delete any entry.

Prefix

Sets the prefix for the number type. Only digits 0 and 1 are allowed (maximum
of six characters).

Pattern

Modifies an entry when you press  (maximum of 40 characters). A
pattern for a normal long distance call, for example, would be 1+(NXX) NXX XXXX. Note that the symbols ( ), +, -, and space are not required and are only
used to improve the readability of this example.

Number Type

Lists valid selections when you press . Selections include LOCAL,
NATIONAL, INTERNATIONAL, PRIVATE, and UNKNOWN.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

276

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Automatic Routeback
Rejection

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRI)

Write security: 1; Read security: 5
When enabled, AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION prevents calls entering
through network termination interfaces from being forwarded out another
network interface. Such an event could happen if an incoming call specifies a
number that has no endpoint configured to accept it and another network
interface has a call acceptance entry which could accept it (such as $). Without
automatic rejection, such a call would be forwarded back to the network. The
network would in turn resend the call to the unit until all incoming resources are
consumed.

Use extreme caution when disabling AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION or
COLLISION RESPONSE.

Collision Response

Write security: 0; Read security: 0
When forced, the COLLISION RESPONSE will enable the ATLAS to perform
AUTOMATIC retransmission of SETUP messages when faced with a collision
situation. Forcing this response is not advised.

Global Tone Type

Write security: 1; Read security: 5
Specifies the dialing digit tone encoding to be used throughout the entire
system.T he available options include DTMF (dual-tone-multi frequency) and
MF (multi frequency).

T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRI)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These menus allow the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection from
the network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Switch Type

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following options are available: LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100, NATIONAL
ISDN, and AT&T 4ESS.

First DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s,
starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network.
The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by
OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268) and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on
page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

277

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Outgoing Number
Conversion

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRI)

The following OUTGOING NUMBER CONVERSION submenus convert outgoing
(towards the network) numbers to the selected numbering plan and type option.

Submenu

Descriptions

As dialed

Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type.

ISDN-National
preferred

Regardless of what type of number is received, the outgoing number is
substituted with ISDN-National as the number plan and type. Ten digits are
always sent to the network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the
area code (provisioned under DIAL PLAN/GLOBAL PARAMETERS) is added, if only
seven digits are supplied. This action may be required in areas with ten-digit
local dialing.

ISDN-Subscriber
preferred

Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten-digit
number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in
the global parameters, the number is forwarded to the network as a seven-digit
number defined as ISDN-Subscriber number plan and type. If the incoming
number is ten digits, but with a different area code, it is forwarded to the
network as ISDN-National preferred.

ISDN-National
DMS Reserved
Preferred

Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the
ISDN/Telephony numbering plan and National number type. Ten digits are sent
to the network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code set in
global parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied. This action may be
required in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-National As
Dialed

Sends the digits provided as National number type.
When SWITCH TYPE is set to 4ESS, many installations require the National form where
possible; this may also be the preferred form in 10-digit calling areas.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, AND 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
For example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9
(9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this
option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information

Element is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the
selection should remain set to NORMAL. The list below indicates services that

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

278

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRI)

may be subscribed to from the PSTN. These services require that specific
information (such as a Network Specific Facility Information Element) be sent
to the network during call setup.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Called Digits
Transferred

AT&T SDN (Switched Digital Network)
National ISDN INWATS
AT&T Megacom 800
Nortel Private Network
AT&T Megacom
Nortel InWats
AT&T Accunet
Nortel OutWats
AT&T Long Distance
Nortel Foreign Exchange
AT&T International-800
Nortel Tie Trunk
AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called
number (like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 800 Series to know how
many digits to expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The
default is ALL and would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are
sent, then the PREFIX is defined as follows:
Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the prefix
for the digits received. For example, if the number of digits is four and the
number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the
prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then used to determine which
ATLAS 800 Series user port endpoint should receive the call.

Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls
sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT
PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Source ID

61200780L1-1C

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

279

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term- Ifce Config (RBS)

For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).
Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

B Channel Selection

The following B Channel Selection submenus determine how the ATLAS 800
Series switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The Circular method can be
used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface.
Submenu

Description

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first.

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Busy Option

Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT
USER-BUSY message from the network.

Submenu

Description

Normal

Send a progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

Pass-Thru

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term- Ifce Config (RBS)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These menus allow the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate an RBS T1 connection
from the network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
First DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the first DS0 for this endpoint.The
ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s, starting with this selection, to send and receive
calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which are allowed or
restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268)
and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

280

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

DS0s Available

Signaling Method

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term- Ifce Config (RBS)

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint
(indicated by “! “), in another switched endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a
DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This field is read-only. The following
characters may display in this field:
Characters

Description

0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field
represents the last digit of the DS0 number.

*

This port is requesting this DS0 for this connection, but the DS0
is not yet activated.

!

This DS0 is used by this endpoint.

s

This DS0 is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

n

This DS0 is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

N

This DS0 is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with
this endpoint.

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the type of signaling to be used across this
trunk. The signaling selected needs to match the signaling being provided by the
network (PSTN). The following choices are available: E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M
WINK, LOOP START, GROUND START, and FEATURE GROUP D.
The ATLAS 800 Series converts signaling types between network and user terminations.

FGD Tx Sequence

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the format in which to present the outgoing
digits. Choices: NORMAL if no digits are to be sent; ANI/DNIS to send both ANI
and DNIS; DNIS to send DNIS only; ANI to send ANI only.

FGD Rx Sequence

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the format in which to receive the incoming
digits. Choices: NORMAL if no digits are to be received; ANI/DNIS to receive
both ANI and DNIS; DNIS to receive DNIS only; ANI to receive ANI only.

Wink after ANI/DNIS

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
When enabled, the ATLAS 800 Series will transmit a wink after ANI/DNIS
digits are transmitted.

Digit Suppression

When enabled, no digits will be sent toward the network/PBX after going
off-hook on an outgoing call.

Direct Inward Dialing

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is being
used by the network. If DID is ENABLED, then the following information must be
defined.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

281

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term- Ifce Config (RBS)

DID Digits Transferred

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 800 Series from the network if DID
is used. This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED.

DID Prefix

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the prefix digits which are not received as a
part of the DID number. The ATLAS 800 Series uses the combination of prefix
and DID number to determine the user endpoint that should receive the
incoming call. This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED. If DID is
DISABLED, then you must define the trunk number.
If Feature Group D is used, DID only refers to DNIS digits.

Trunk Number

When the network connection does not provide DID digits, the ATLAS 800
Series must be given a number to use to determine which user endpoint should
receive the incoming call. TRUNK NUMBER displays only when DID is set to
DISABLED.
The trunk number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

For example, to connect an incoming DS0 (trunk) to an endpoint with the accept
number of 963-8615, set the trunk number to 963-8615.
Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for
switching calls
to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

DS0 Alignment

DS0 ALIGNMENT is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain

alignment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode. This scenario
requires DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces (usually on User Term and
on Net Term). An interface that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a
call from the switchboard on the same DS0 that the incoming call was received.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

282

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

For example, the unit receives an incoming call on DS0 17. The switchboard
looks for an interface who has matching accept criteria to the number it
received. A match is found on interface “Z” that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled.
This causes interface “Z” to only process the call if it has DS0 17 available. If
all matching interfaces have DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled and none of those
interfaces have DS0 17 available, then a busy or fast busy will be returned to the
calling party.

T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection from the
network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Secondary Interfaces

The following SECONDARY INTERFACES submenus allow the user to define the
slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the NFAS group.

submenu

Descriptions

#

Displays the entry number.

Slot

Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to.

Port

Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to.

Interface Number

Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface. The configure
ID must match the ID configured by the provider.

Backup D Channel

Disables or enables backup D channel on the interface.
Only one backup D channel is supported in a single chassis.

Switch Type

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following options are available: LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100, NATIONAL
ISDN, and AT&T 4ESS.

First DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s,
starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network.
The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by
OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268) and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on
page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

283

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Outgoing Number
Conversion

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

Converts outgoing (towards the network) numbers to the selected numbering
plan and type option.

Submenu

Description

As dialed

Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type.

ISDN-National
preferred

Regardless of what type of number is received, the outgoing number is
substituted with ISDN-National as the number plan and type. Ten digits are
always sent to the network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the
area code (provisioned under DIAL PLAN/GLOBAL PARAMETERS) is added, if only
seven digits are supplied. This action may be required in areas with ten-digit
local dialing.

ISDN-Subscriber
preferred

Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten-digit
number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in
the global parameters, the number is forwarded to the network as a seven-digit
number defined as ISDN-Subscriber number plan and type. If the incoming
number is ten digits, but with a different area code, it is forwarded to the
network as ISDN-National preferred.

ISDN-National
DMS Reserved
preferred

Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the
ISDN/Telephony numbering plan and National number type. Ten digits are sent
to the network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code set in
global parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied. This action may be
required in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-National As
Dialed

Sends the digits provided as National number type.
When SWITCH TYPE is set to 4ESS, many installations require the National form where
possible; this may also be the preferred form in 10-digit calling areas.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

284

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this
option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information

Element is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the
selection should remain set to NORMAL.
The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN.
These services require that specific information (such as a Network Specific
Facility Information Element) be sent to the network during call setup.
• AT&T Accunet
• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest
• AT&T International-800
• AT&T Long Distance
• AT&T Megacom
• AT&T Megacom 800
• AT&T SDN
• National ISDN INWATS
• Nortel Foreign Exchange
• Nortel InWats
• Nortel OutWats
• Nortel Private Network
• Nortel Tie Trunk
Called Digits
Transferred

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called
number (like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 800 Series to know how
many digits to expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The
default is ALL and would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are
sent, then the PREFIX is defined as follows:
PREFIX displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the

prefix for the digits received. For example, if the number of digits is four and
the number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the
prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then used to determine which
ATLAS 800 Series user port endpoint should receive the call.
Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls
sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT
PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

285

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: Network Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

B Channel Selection

The following B CHANNEL SELECTION submenus determine how the ATLAS 800
Series switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The Circular method can be
used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first

Busy Option

The following BUSY OPTION submenus define the response propagated to the
CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message from the network.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

Pass-Thru

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

286

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (PRI)

T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (PRI)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a PRI connection. Specifies
the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Switch Type

Defines the type of PRI switch that the ATLAS 800 Series emulates. If
connected to another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch
type. The following options are available: AT&T 4ESS, LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN
DMS 100, and NATIONAL ISDN.

First DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the first DS0 for this endpoint.The
ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s, starting with this selection, to send and receive
calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which are allowed or
restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268)
and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9
(9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this
option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information

Element is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the
selection should remain set to NORMAL.
The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN.
These services require that specific information (such as a Network Specific
Facility Information Element) be sent to the network during call setup.
• AT&T Accunet
• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest
• AT&T International-800
• AT&T SDN
• AT&T Long Distance
• AT&T Megacom 800
• AT&T Megacom
• Nortel Foreign Exchange
• Nortel InWats

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

287

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

•
•
•
•
Called Digits
Transferred

Outgoing Caller ID

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (PRI)

National ISDN INWATS
Nortel OutWats
Nortel Private Network
Nortel Tie Trunk

Defines the number of digits to forward from the called number. When attached
to a PBX, the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the
called digits of the incoming call; however, this option would normally be set to
ALL. Choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, or ALL.
Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the Network for outgoing
calls sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF
NOT PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

B Channel Selection

The following B CHANNEL SELECTION submenus determine how the ATLAS 800
Series switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The Circular method can be
used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

288

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Busy Option

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (RBS)

The following BUSY OPTION submenus define the response propagated to the
CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message from the network.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

Pass-Thru

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (RBS)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an RBS T1 connection from
the network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
First DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s,
starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network.
The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by
OUT#ACCEPT (see page 181) and OUT#REJECT (see page 183).

DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

DS0s Available

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint
(indicated by “!”), in another switched endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a
DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This field is read-only. The following
characters may display in this field:

Signaling Method

61200780L1-1C

Character

Description

0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field
represents the last digit of the DS0 number.

*

This port is requesting this DS0 for this connection, but the DS0
is not yet activated.

!

This DS0 is used by this endpoint.

s

This DS0 is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This DS0 is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

n

This DS0 is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

N

This DS0 is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with
this endpoint.

Defines the type of signaling to be used across this trunk. The signaling selected
needs to match the signaling being provided by the network. The following
choices are available: E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M WINK, LOOP START, GROUND
START, and FEATURE GROUP D.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

289

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (RBS)

The ATLAS 800 Series converts signaling types between network and user terminations.

FGD Tx Sequence

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
Defines the format in which to present the outgoing digits. Choices: NORMAL if
no digits are to be sent; ANI/DNIS to send both ANI and DNIS; DNIS to send
DNIS only; ANI to send ANI only.

FGD Rx Sequence

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
Defines the format in which to receive the incoming digits. Choices: NORMAL if
no digits are to be received; ANI/DNIS to receive both ANI and DNIS; DNIS to
receive DNIS only; ANI to receive ANI only.

Wink after ANI/DNIS

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.
When enabled, the ATLAS 800 Series will transmit a wink after ANI/DNIS
digits are transmitted.

Direct Inward Dialing

Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is being used by the network. If
DID is ENABLED, then the following information must be defined.

DID Digits Transferred

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 800 Series from the network if DID
is used. This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED.

DID Prefix

Defines the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID number.
The ATLAS 800 Series uses the combination of prefix and DID number to
determine the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call. This option
only displays if DID is set to ENABLED. If DID is DISABLED, then you must define
the trunk number.
If FEATURE GROUP D is used, DID only refers to DNIS digits.

Caller ID Number

Defines the number the ATLAS 800 Series uses to provide caller ID to the
network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. This item is optional.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Source ID

61200780L1-1C

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

290

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).
Dial on OffHook

Defines a number that is automatically sent to the switchboard when a call on
this endpoint is initiated (goes off hook).
The DIAL ON OFFHOOK number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

DS0 Alignment

DS0 ALIGNMENT is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain

alignment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode. This scenario
requires DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces (usually on User Term and
on Net Term). An interface that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a
call from the switchboard on the same DS0 that the incoming call was received.
For example, the unit receives an incoming call on DS0 17. The switchboard
looks for an interface who has matching accept criteria to the number it
received. A match is found on interface “Z” that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled.
This causes interface “Z” to only process the call if it has DS0 17 available. If
all matching interfaces have DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled and none of those
interfaces have DS0 17 available, then a busy or fast busy will be returned to the
calling party.

T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an NFAS connection.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Secondary Interfaces

The following SECONDARY INTERFACES submenus allow the user to define the
slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the NFAS group.

Submenu

Description

#

Displays the entry number.

Slot

Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

291

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

Submenu

Description (Continued)

Port

Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to.

Interface Number

Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface. The configure
ID must match the ID configured by the provider.

Backup D Channel

Backup D channel is not supported on User Term NFAS interfaces.
Only one backup D channel can be configured per NFAS interface group.

Switch Type

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following options are available: AT&T 4ESS, LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100,
and NATIONAL ISDN.

First DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the first DS0 for this endpoint. The
ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s, starting with this selection, to send and receive
calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which are allowed or
restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268)
and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
Example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$),
and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network
except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this
option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information

Element is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the
selection should remain set to NORMAL.
The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN.
These services require that specific information (such as a Network Specific
Facility Information Element) be sent to the network during call setup.
• AT&T Accunet
• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest
• AT&T International-800
• AT&T Long Distance
• AT&T Megacom 800
• AT&T Megacom

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

292

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Dial Plan
T3 and T3 D&I: User Term - Ifce Config (NFAS)

Nortel InWats
AT&T SDN
Nortel Foreign Exchange
National ISDN INWATS
Nortel OutWats
Nortel Private Network
Nortel Tie Trunk

Called Digits TransferredSome PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called

number (like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 800 Series to know how
many digits to expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The
default is ALL and would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are
sent, then the PREFIX is defined as follows.
Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the number for the ATLAS 800 Series to use to provide Caller ID to the
network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS
PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

293

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

B Channel Selection

Dial Plan
E1/PRA: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRA)

The following B CHANNEL SELECTION submenus determine how the ATLAS 800
Series switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The Circular method can be
used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first.

Busy Option

The following BUSY OPTION submenus define the response propagated to the
CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message from the network.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

Pass-Thru

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

E1/PRA: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRA)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRA connection from
the network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Switch Type

Defines the type of PRA switch to which the port is connected. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following option is available: ETSI/DSS1.

First DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s,
starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network
(PSTN). The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are
set by OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268) and OUT#REJECT (see
Submenus on page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
Example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$),
and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network
except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

294

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
E1/PRA: Network Term - Ifce Config (PRA)

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. Currently not

supported for E1/PRA use.
Called Digits
Transferred

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called
number (like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 800 Series to know how
many digits to expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The
default is ALL and would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are
sent, then the PREFIX is defined as follows:
PREFIX displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the

prefix for the digits received. For example, if the number of digits is four and
the number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the
prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then used to determine which
ATLAS 800 Series user port endpoint should receive the call.
Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls
sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT
PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

295

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

B Channel Selection

Dial Plan
E1/PRA: User Term - Ifce Config (PRA)

Determines how the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses B channels for call
routing. The Circular method can be used for call load balancing among the
available B channels on this interface.

Submenu

Descriptions

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first.

E1/PRA: User Term - Ifce Config (PRA)
Write security: 3; Read security: 5
This

menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a PRA connection.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

Switch Type

Defines the type of PRA switch that the ATLAS 800 Series emulates. If
connected to another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch
type. The following option is available: ETSI/DSS1.

First DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 800 Series uses DS0s,
starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network.
The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by
OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 268) and OUT#REJECT (see Submenus on
page 274).

Number of DS0s

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Network Specific Facility
Voice and Data
Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. Currently not

supported for E1/PRA use.
Called Digits TransferredDefines the number of digits to forward from the called number. When attached

to a PBX, the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the
called digits of the incoming call; however, this option would normally be set to
ALL. Choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, or ALL.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

296

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Outgoing Caller ID

Dial Plan
V35Nx: User Term - Ifce Config

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls
sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT
PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.
With this swap, the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The
accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

B Channel Selection

Determines how the ATLAS 800 Series switchboard uses B channels for call
routing. The Circular method can be used for call load balancing among the
available B channels on this interface

.

Submenu

Description

Normal

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e., for a full PRI channel 23
would be used if available).

Circular

Contiguous channels from last to first.

V35Nx: User Term - IFCE CONFIG
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for V.35 connections. Specifies
the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

297

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Ports Available

Dial Plan
V35Nx: User Term - Ifce Config

Indicates which ports of the selected Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module have been
defined in this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”), in another switched
endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This
field is read-only. The following characters may display in this field:
Characters

Description

0-4

This port is available.

*

This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is
not yet activated.

!

This port is used by this endpoint.

s

This port is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

n

This port is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

N

This port is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with
this endpoint.

Number of Ports

Specifies the number of V.35 ports ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Number to Dial

Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call.

Call Type

Configures the call type (either 56K or 64K) used for outgoing calls from this
endpoint.

Dial Call As

Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type. Options include
DIGITAL (for 56K or 64K data calls), VOICE (for speech calls), and AUDIO (for
3.1kHz audio calls).

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoint and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

298

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
USSI: User Term - Ifce Config

Min DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will
restrict connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of
the specified number of DS0s.

Max DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will
accommodate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g.,
BONDING) of up to the specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of
DS0s presented in the negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls.

USSI: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for USSI interface connections.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Ports Available

Indicates which ports of the selected Quad USSI Option Module have been
defined in this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”), in another switched
endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This
field is read-only. The following characters may display in this field:
Character

Description

0-4

This port is available.

*

This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is
not yet activated.

!

This port is used by this endpoint.

s

This port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan.

S

This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

n

This port is used in one or more dedicated maps.

N

This port is in one or more dedicated maps, and conflicts with this
endpoint.

Number of Ports

Specifies the number of USSI interface ports ATLAS 800 Series uses for this
endpoint.

Number to Dial

Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call.

Call Type

Configures the call type (either 56K or 64K) used for outgoing calls from this
endpoint.

Dial Call As

Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type. Options include
DIGITAL (for 56K or 64K data calls), VOICE (for speech calls), and AUDIO (for
3.1kHz audio calls).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

299

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Octal BRI/U: Network Term - Ifce Config

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Min DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will
restrict connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of
the specified number of DS0s.

Max DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will
accommodate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g.,
BONDING) of up to the specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of
DS0s presented in the negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls.

Octal BRI/U: Network Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a BRI connection from the
network. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Switch Type

Defines the type of BRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following options are available: LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100, and
NATIONAL ISDN.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

300

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

SPID List

Dial Plan
Octal BRI/U: Network Term - Ifce Config

To properly operate with a network ISDN switch, the BRI interface must have
Service Profile Identifiers (SPIDs) and phone number(s) that match the SPID(s)
and phone number(s) programmed into the ISDN switch for this line. Each BRI
may have one or more phone numbers and SPIDs. The SPID LIST submenus
define these parameters to the ATLAS 800 Series.

Submenu

Descriptions

Phone Number

The phone number(s) assigned to this BRI phone line.

SPID Number

This entry must match the SPID number(s) which has been set in the network’s
ISDN switch (or in the PBX) for this BRI line. A SPID must be entered for each
phone number.

Calls

The number of calls (1 or 2) which can be received or sent on this
number/SPID.

D64, D56, Audio,
Speech

These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID. If the BRI was
purchased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs, then the call must
match the services supported.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
Example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$),
and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network
except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

301

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Octal BRI/U: User Term - Ifce Config

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.

Octal BRI/U: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a BRI connection. Specifies
the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Switch Type

Defines the type of BRI switch the ATLAS 800 Series emulates. If connected to
another ATLAS 800 Series, both need to be set to the same switch type. The
following options are available: LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100, and
NATIONAL ISDN.

SPID List

The port, acting as the network, must use a Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and
phone number(s) in order to satisfy the ISDN connection protocol expected by
the user’s terminal adapter (TA).

Submenu

Descriptions

Phone Number

The phone number(s) assigned to this BRI phone line.

SPID Number

Defines the SPID number(s) used for this BRI line. Although the value of the
SPID is not significant, a SPID must be entered for each phone number. For
convenience, the SPID can be set to be identical to the phone number.
The ATLAS 800 Series does not support autoSPID detection software which some
terminal adapters offer.

Calls

61200780L1-1C

For user termination, the number of calls which can be received or sent on this
number/SPID is fixed at 2.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

302

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Octal BRI/U: User Term - Ifce Config

Submenu

Descriptions (Continued)

D64, D56, Audio,
Speech

These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID. If the BRI was
purchased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs, then the call must
match the services supported.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
Example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$),
and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network
except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Swap ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic
Number Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS
(Dialed Number Identification Service) is the called party number.

Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the number for the ATLAS 800 Series to use to provide Caller ID to the
Network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS
PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

303

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Octal BRI S/T: User Termination

Octal BRI S/T: User Termination
The Octal BRI S/T Module acts like the network while interfacing to user equipment (terminal adapters).
When you are working in the network termination section of the DIAL PLAN menu and SLT is defined as a
S/T BRI module, the following interface configuration options are available:
To use the Octal BRI S/T Module on a User Term endpoint, use of a straight-through ISDN S/T
cable.
Switch Type

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
Defines the type of ISDN switch that the port will simulate. If connected to
another ATLAS, both need to be set to the same type. The following options are
available: LUCENT 5E, NORTHERN DMS 100, NATIONAL-ISDN, and EURO-ISDN.

SPID List

Write security: 2; Read security: 5
The port, acting as the network, must use a SPID and a phone number in order
to satisfy the ISDN connection protocol expected by the user’s Terminal
Adapter (TA).

Submenu

Descriptions

Phone Number

The phone number(s) assigned to this BRI phone line.

SPID Number

Defines the SPID number(s) used for this BRI line. Although the value of the
SPID is not significant, a SPID must be entered for each phone number. For
convenience, the SPID can be set to be the same as the phone number. Octal
BRI S/T Module does not support autoSPID detection software which some
terminal adapters offer.
No SPID Number is needed for the Euro-ISDN Switch Type.

Calls

For User terminations, the number of calls is fixed at 2.

D64, D56, Audio,
Speech

These options reflect what the network has provisioned for this SPID. If the BRI
was purchased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs, then the call
must match the services supported.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

304

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
FXS-8: User Term - Ifce Config

FXS-8: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an analog FXS connection
from the Network (PSTN). Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Ports Available

Indicates which ports of the Octal E&M Option Module have been defined in
this switched endpoint (indicated by “! “), in another switched endpoint
(indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This field is
read-only. The following characters may display in this field:
Characters

Description

0-9

This port is available.

*

This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is
not yet activated.

!

This port is used by this endpoint.

s

This port is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

S

This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

n

This port is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

N

This port is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with
this endpoint.

•

This port is the wrong kind of port for this endpoint.

Number of Ports

Specifies the number of ports ATLAS 800 Series uses for this endpoint.

Signaling Method

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series the type of signaling to be used across this
trunk. The signaling selected needs to match the signaling being provided by the
network (PSTN). The choices include LOOP START or GROUND START.
The ATLAS 800 Series converts signaling types between two endpoints (network or user
terms).

Forward Disconnect

In Loop Start applications, FORWARD DISCONNECT configures the length of time
loop current will stop flowing once the far end has terminated the call.
Applications requiring Forward Disconnect are Fax Servers and ACDs.

Direct Inward Dialing

Defines to the ATLAS 800 Series whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is being
used by the network. If DID is ENABLED, then the following information must be
defined:

DID Digits Transferred

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 800 Series from the network if DID
is used. This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

305

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Caller ID Number

Dial Plan
FXS-8: User Term - Ifce Config

Defines the number the ATLAS 800 Series uses to provide caller ID to the
network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. This item is optional.
The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no “wild cards”).

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the Most
Significant Digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. The default ID for all endpoints is 0 and all accept
numbers is 0. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the
dialed number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Dial on OffHook

Defines a number that is automatically sent to the switchboard when a call on
this endpoint is initiated (goes off hook).
The Dial on Offhook number must be specific (i.e., no “wild cards”).

ANI to Caller ID

Use this option to generate (FSK) Caller ID out the FXS user term port to the
subscriber. The ATLAS 800 Series generates Caller ID from the calling party
number (typically when the call is terminated from a PRI). The calling party
number may also come from a Trunk Number on a network term entry, or from
the Caller ID field on a user term entry (if the call comes from one of these
sources). Additional CPE equipment is needed to receiver Caller ID, such as a
Caller ID box. To receive Calling Name information, this equipment must
support Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF).
CALLING NAME will only be delivered (with the number) if a call is received from a PRI
that has been provisioned to provide CALLING NAME information. Otherwise, only the
CALLING PARTY NUMBER will be generated.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

306

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Async232: User Term - Ifce Config

Async232: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for Async-232 connections.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Ports Available

Indicates which ports of the selected Async-232 Option Module have been
defined in this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”) or in another switched
endpoint (indicated by “s”). This field is read-only. The following characters
may display in this field:
Character

Description

0-9

This port is available. The digit that displays in this field
represents the last digit of the port number.

*

This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is
not yet activated.

!

This port is used by this endpoint.

s

This port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan.

S

This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this
endpoint.

Number of Ports

Specifies the number of Async-232 ports ATLAS 800 Series uses for this
endpoint.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

Busy Out

Number of milliseconds that passes before this Async-232 endpoint is set to
permanently busy and will no longer be available for use.

Idle Time

Number of seconds that passes before this Async-232 endpoint is set to idle
status.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

307

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Pkt Endpt: User Term - Ifce Config

Pkt Endpt: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as packet endpoints.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Outdial Number

Defines the number dialed to originate a call.

Outgoing Call Type

Selects the terminating resource type, either DIGITAL 64K or DIGITAL 56K.

Redial Timer

Selects the time delay in seconds between redial attempts.

Randomize Timer

Enables/disables random delay added to the redial timer to avoid glare.

Retry Count

Defines the number of redials to attempt.

Outgoing Caller ID

Defines the presentation of the calling party number for this endpoint.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default value for all endpoints and all accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.
For example, an application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of
the ATLAS 800 Series in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module.
Assign a unique SOURCE ID (e.g., 7) to Port 1 of the module, and then configure
Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique SOURCE ID (7).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

308

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Route Incoming Call

Submenu

Dial Plan
Pkt Endpt: User Term - Ifce Config

Use the three submenus to define a method for associating incoming calls to the
packet endpoints.
Descriptions

Using Incoming Num Endpoint selection based on the incoming number.
Using Calling
Party Num

Selection based on the Caller ID as presented by the calling party. If this option
is selected, the CALL PARTY NUMBER field is made available to the interface
configuration. This number allows you to configure the calling part number
used to select this packet endpoint.

Using DBU
Handshake

Selection based on a proprietary protocol. This option is only available to packet
endpoints with backup sublinks. DBU HANDSHAKE is required to interoperate
with ADTRAN IQ and Express family products. It enables the association of
incoming calls with packet endpoints in cases where there is a single call-in
number (hunt group) and no Caller ID information available.
DBU HANDSHAKE must be disabled for DBU between two ATLAS products.

Support DBU
Handshake

This option is only available when the packet endpoint selected in the
PORT/PEP field has backup sublinks. SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE
enables/disables the generation and acceptance of ADTRAN frame relay
handshake upon connection. If the endpoint is configured to route incoming
calls based on the handshake information, this option is automatically enabled.
If another call routing method is in effect, however, this option can be enabled
to support the use of handshake information at the far end of the link.
The SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE submenu, DLCI TRANSLATION, controls contents
of the ADTRAN frame-relay handshake upon connection of a backup PVC.
Normally this field should be set to AUTO. The FORCED mode is present for
compatibility with older IQ units.

Min DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. A value greater than 1 will
restrict connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of
the specified number of DS0s.

Max DS0’s

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. A value greater than 1 will
accommodate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g.,
BONDING) of up to the specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of
DS0s presented in the negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls.

Call Routing Table

This table is only visible if GROUP is selected in the PRT/PEP field. The table
format changes, based on the selected routing option. For each case, CALL
PARAMS contain OUTDIAL#, CALLER ID, SOURCE ID, and MIN/MAX DS0S, as
described above.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

309

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Ckt Backup: User Term - Ifce Config

Ckt Backup: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as backup endpoints. Specifies
the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
Originate/Answer

The following submenus are available for the ORIGINATE/ANSWER menu item:

Submenus

Description

Originate

The endpoint will originate the backup call.

Answer

The endpoint will answer any incoming calls, but will only go into backup if an
error is detected.

Answer Any

The endpoint will answer any incoming calls and go immediately into backup.

Outgoing Call Type

This only applies to originating endpoints.

Source ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Outdial Number

This only applies to originating endpoints. This is the number dialed when the
endpoint goes into backup.

Force Mode

This forces the backup state of this endpoint. This is a configuration setting, so
it will retain its value until it is changed. To temporarily force an endpoint into
backup, or to force a restore, try the Manual activator.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

310

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Backup Criteria

Dial Plan
Ckt Backup: User Term - Ifce Config

Criteria for automatic backup. Note that this setting affects the available options
for RESTORE CRITERIA.

Submenus

Description

Net/Data Fail

DBU is initiated when either the network fails (possible causes include Red,
Yellow, Blue, or LOS alarms) or when the Nx56/64 module detects a loss of
data transitions on the V.35 interface. If Net/Data Fail is selected, the V.35 Nx
INBAND option must be ON. The remote TSU INBAND option must also be
enabled.
When BACKUP CRITERIA is configured for NET/DATA FAIL, the RESTORE CRITERIA
must be MANUAL ONLY.
Net Fail

DBU is initiated when there is a network failure. Possible
causes include LOS, RED, Yellow, or Blue alarms.

Manual

The ATLAS will never initiate DBU until it is manually set to
do so.

Restore Criteria

This only applies to originating endpoints. These are criteria for automatically
coming out of backup. Note that NETWORK SUCCESS (network is out of alarm) is
only available when a backup criterion is not NET/DATA FAIL. Select MANUAL
ONLY for manual activator.

Startup Delay

The amount of time to wait after creating or changing the endpoint before
allowing backup.

Backup Delay

The amount of time to delay after detecting an alarm before going into backup.
This only applies to originating endpoints. If the circuit comes out of alarm
before this time has expired, the endpoint will not go into backup.

Restore Delay

The amount of time to delay after clearing an alarm before coming out of
backup. This only applies to originating endpoints. If the circuit goes into alarm
before this time has expired, the endpoint will remain in backup.

Max Num Redials

The backup endpoint will attempt this many retries before giving up and
declaring a backup failure. This only applies to originating endpoints.

Redial Timer

The amount of time delayed between a failed backup call and the redial. This
only applies to originating endpoints.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

311

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Enable Schedule

Dial Plan
Pkt Voice: Network Term - Ifce Config

Use these submenus to schedule the times when backup is enabled. The
following selections are available for the ENABLE SCHEDULE menu item.

Submenu

Descriptions

Enable Time

This is the time of day to enable dial backup.

Disable Time

This is the time of day to disable dial backup. If the disable time is earlier than
the enable time, backup monitoring will be active across midnight.

Days Enabled

Use this record to enable/disable backup monitoring on particular days of the
week.

Test Call

This only applies to originating endpoints. Use this menu to schedule regularly
occurring test calls. The following selections are available for the TEST CALL
menu item.

Submenu

Descriptions

Period

How often test calls are to be made

Next Test Time

The date of the next scheduled test call

Min Num DS0s

This option will specify the number of DS0s to use for this switched call. If this
number is 1, all calls will be directed to the endpoint, and not use a BONDING
resource. Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse
multiplex the multiple switched channels together.

Max Num DS0s

This option will specify the number of DS0s to use for this switched call. If this
number is 1, all calls will be directed to the endpoint, and not use a BONDING
resource. Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse
multiplex the multiple switched channels together.

Pkt Voice: Network Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as network packet voice
endpoints. Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
DLCI

Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry.

Voice Port

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. FSU 5622s support ports 1
and 2. A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

Conflict Report

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or
Voice port already in use.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

312

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Dial Plan
Pkt Voice: Network Term - Ifce Config

Voice Compression

Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint. ADTRAN FSU
5622 and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G.723.1 compression at
6.3 kbps. The Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary
NETCODER algorithm at 6.4 kbps. Both endpoints must agree about the
compression algorithm choice.

Silence Suppression

Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending
frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both
endpoints must agree to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression
is Disabled. To prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the
total system bandwidth, ENABLE this feature.

Signaling Method

Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect.
Available options include E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M WINK, and LOOP START.

Direct Inward Dialing

Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is used by the remote equipment.
If DID is enabled, then the following options must be configured:

Submenu

Descriptions

Caller ID

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for
outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Setting this menu item is optional.

Source ID

Defines the SOURCE ID. Setting this menu item is optional.

DID Digits Transferred

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS from the network if DIRECT INWARD
DIALING is ENABLED.

DID Prefix

Defines to ATLAS the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID
number. ATLAS uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine
the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call.

Trunk Number

Determines which user endpoint should receive the incoming call when the
network connection does not provide DID digits. This field only displays if
DIRECT INWARD DIALING is set to DISABLED.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port. For example, a network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with
9 (9$), and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the
network except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

313

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Source ID

Dial Plan
Pkt Voice: User Term - Ifce Config

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and accept
numbers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed
number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Pkt Voice: User Term - Ifce Config
Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as user packet voice endpoints.
Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.
DLCI

Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry.

Voice Port

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. FSU 5622s support ports 1
and 2. A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

Conflict Report

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or
Voice port already in use.

Voice Compression

Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint. ADTRAN FSU
5622 and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G.723.1 compression at 6.3
kbps. The Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary NETCODER
Algorithm at 6.4 kbps. Both endpoints must agree about the compression
algorithm choice.

Silence Suppression

Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending
frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both
endpoints must agree to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression
is DISABLED. To prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the
total system bandwidth, ENABLE this feature.

Signaling Method

Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect.
Available options include the following: E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M WINK, and LOOP
START.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

314

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Direct Inward Dialing

Dial Plan
Pkt Voice: User Term - Ifce Config

Defines whether or not Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is used by the remote
equipment. If DID is enabled, then the following options must be configured:

Submenu

Description

Caller ID

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for
outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Setting this menu item is optional.

Source ID

Defines the SOURCE ID. Setting this menu item is optional.

DID Digits Transferred

Defines the number of digits ATLAS 800 Series send to the user
equipment.This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is ENABLED.

Caller ID Number

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for
outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. This field only displays if DIRECT
INWARD DIALING is set to DISABLED, and USER TERM is selected. Setting this
menu item is optional.

Strip MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most
significant digits (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the
port.
Example: A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$),
and then with STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network
except the leading 9.
STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the
MSDs that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

Source ID

61200780L1-1C

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for
switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated
the call.
• DEFAULT VALUE = 0. The default ID for all endpoints is 0 and all accept
numbers is 0. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the
dialed number.
• Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.
• When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a
dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

315

SECTION 5

DETAIL LEVEL PROCEDURES (DLP)
Provides the detailed instruction for performing various unit functions such as
upgrading firmware.

DLP-1

Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port ...........................................318

DLP-2

System Login and Menu Access .........................................................................................320

DLP-3

Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System ..................................................323

DLP-4

Verifying Communications Over an IP LAN ........................................................................325

DLP-5

User Access and Password Security Levels .......................................................................328

DLP-6

Updating ATLAS Firmware using TFTP ..............................................................................330

DLP-7

Updating ATLAS Firmware using XMODEM .......................................................................333

DLP-8

Saving the Current Configuration using TFTP ....................................................................336

DLP-9

Connecting the ATLAS to an External Modem ...................................................................338

DLP-10

Using the Event Log (Syslog) ..............................................................................................341

DLP-11

Connecting the Alarm Contacts ..........................................................................................345

DLP-12

Connecting to the ATLAS 890 External Input .....................................................................348

DLP-13

Using the Alarm Connections and ACO Button ..................................................................351

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

316

DLP-1 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port
Introduction
This section describes how to connect a VT100 terminal or PC to the ATLAS 800 Series System.
Shelf management and provisioning for the ATLAS 800 Series System is facilitated by a series of intuitive
menus that are viewable on a computer screen. To access to the menus and management features of the
ATLAS 800 Series System, connect the ATLAS either to a VT100 terminal or to a PC emulating a VT100
terminal. Make the connection using one of the following ports:
ATLAS 830

ADMIN port (DB-9 connector) located on the rear of the unit.
CRAFT interface (DB-9 connector) located on the unit faceplate.
ATLAS 890

ADMIN port (RJ-45 connector) located in the middle of the System Controller module.

Prerequisite Procedures
The ATLAS 800 Series System must be powered up for terminal communication to function.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

Data cable to connect a VT100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT100 terminal.
VT100 terminal, or PC configured as a VT100 terminal.

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

317

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Connecting a Terminal to the ATLAS
VT100 Terminal

1. Set the VT100 terminal parameters as follows:
•
•
•
•
•

9600 baud rate
8 data bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control

2. If the terminal has a parallel setting, disable it and use serial port.
3. Plug the male end of the DB-9 (or RJ-45) data cable into the ATLAS.
4. Make the connection to the VT100 terminal as appropriate for your equipment.

PC Emulating a VT100 Terminal

Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will emulate a VT100
terminal—for example, Terminal© or Hyperterminal©.. Many other commercially available software
packages will also allow your PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. However, certain configuration
items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for the ATLAS.
1. Set the VT100 terminal parameters as follows:
•
•
•
•
•

9600 baud rate
8 data bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control

2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate COM port (instead of dial-up connection).
3. Plug the DB-9 (or RJ-45) male end of the data cable into the ATLAS.
4. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for your equipment.
You are now ready to login to ATLAS, as described in DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on page 319.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

318

DLP-2 System Login and Menu Access
Introduction
After connecting to the ATLAS via either a VT100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT100 terminal, you
must login to the system to gain access to the management and provisioning functions (menus). This DLP
provides specific steps for system logon and menu access.
If the IP has been provisioned (see DLP-3, Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System,
on page 322), you can also login to the unit using Telnet.

Prerequisite Procedures
Complete DLP-1, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port, before logging in.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

Data cable to connect to a VT100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT100 terminal.
VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal.

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

319

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Login to the System
1. After connecting to the ATLAS, a blank screen displays on the computer screen. Press any keyboard
key to display the login screen (shown below).

2. From your keyboard, enter the appropriate password at the blinking cursor prompt in the LOGIN field
and press ENTER.
The manufacturer’s default password for the ATLAS system is “password” in lowercase letters. After
initial login, the System Administrator is now able to define levels of access for various users. (See
DLP-5, User Access and Password Security Levels, on page 327 for more details.)
The ATLAS has five levels of access granted to a user. The lowest level of access (Level 5) is
read-only, and allows a user to see, but not change, the current configuration of the system.
The top level of access (Level 0) is read-write and allows the user to see and change system
configuration parameters.
3. Upon entering the correct password, the ATLAS 800 Series System main menu displays. (For
simplicity, only the ATLAS 830 menus are used in this document.)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

320

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

4. You are now logged in to the ATLAS menu system.

If the IP has been provisioned (see DLP-3, Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System,
on page 322), you can also login to the unit using Telnet.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

321

DLP-3 Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System
Introduction
This section describes using the ATLAS SYSTEM CONFIG menu to set IP parameters.
If the ATLAS is connected to an IP network for Telnet, TFTP, or SNMP management, several IP
parameters must be set in order for the ATLAS to communicate with the network.
Please see your Network Administrator for the proper assignment of the following
parameters: IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.

Prerequisite Procedures
This procedure assumes that the ATLAS unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

Data cable to connect to either a VT100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT100 terminal
VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Setting IP Parameters
1. Connect the ATLAS unit to your VT100 system (see DLP-1, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN
or CRAFT Port, on page 317).
2. Login to the system with maximum rights (details for logging in are in DLP-2, System Login and Menu
Access, on page 319).

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

322

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

3. From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, select the ETHERNET PORT option and press .

The next three steps require confirmation after each change.

4. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the IP ADDRESS option and press . Enter
the appropriate IP address.
5. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the SUBNET MASK option and press .
Enter the appropriate Subnet Mask.
6. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the DEFAULT GATEWAY option and press
. Enter the appropriate Default Gateway.
7. Save the changes by pressing the left arrow key to highlight the ETHERNET submenu.
8. Escape out to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and logout by pressing  .

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

323

DLP-4 Verifying Communications Over an IP LAN
Introduction
This procedure outlines the steps for testing the ATLAS, when its Ethernet port is connected to a local area
network (LAN). Testing ensures that the unit is communicating properly over the network.

Prerequisite Procedures
Before beginning this procedure, the unit should be physically connected to the LAN and all provisioning
tasks should be complete (see DLP-3, Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System, on page 322).

Tools and Materials Required
Access to a PC or other computer connected to the LAN

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling
modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic
components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.
When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is
electrically grounded.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

324

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Testing the ATLAS for Proper Network Communication
Obtain IP Address

If you do not already have the IP Address for the ATLAS, do one of the following:
• Obtain the ATLAS IP address from your Network Administrator.
• Manually check for the address in the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET PORT/IP ADDRESS menu of the
Network Management interface.

You must login with maximum rights to modify the IP parameters on the ATLAS.

Ping the ATLAS unit from a remote computer on the network.

Refer to the computer system’s documentation if you are unsure how to perform a Ping command. Most
computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX allow a Ping to be performed
by simply typing “ping ” at a command line prompt. Typically, the Ping program will
respond by indicating that the remote IP Address has responded in a certain amount of time or that no
response was received.
Some versions of Ping will continue running until you explicitly tell them to stop. If the program does not
terminate on its own, type  to stop the program.
1. Using a remote computer system connected to the LAN, perform an ICMP Ping on the IP Address of
the ATLAS. Verify that the unit responds properly; if the ATLAS fails to respond, try the following:
•

Verify that the proper IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are provisioned in the unit
(see DLP-3, Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System, on page 322 for details).

•

Verify that the ATLAS is properly cabled into the LAN and that the Ethernet cable is properly
seated in the Ethernet port (labeled ETHERNET or 10/100BASET on the back of the unit).

•

If the ATLAS is connected to a hub or other network device that provides a carrier sense light for
each port, verify that the carrier sense light for the port to which the ATLAS is connected is lit. If
this light is not on, check the cabling between the hub and the shelf.

•

Verify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on the remote computer system.

2. If none of these steps are successful, contact the LAN Administrator for assistance.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

325

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Telnet to the ATLAS

Telnet is a utility common to many local area networks that allows remote access to another computer or
piece of equipment.
Refer to the computer system documentation if you are unsure how to establish a Telnet session. Most
computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX establish a Telnet session by
simply typing “Telnet  ” at a command line prompt.
1. From the same computer used in the previous step, Telnet to the ATLAS and verify that the Telnet
session is properly opened.
If necessary, refer to DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on page 319 and DLP-3, Setting IP
Parameters for the ATLAS 800 Series System, on page 322 for instructions on logging in to the system and
setting IP parameters.
2. Once the Telnet session is established, press  to logout and close the session.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

326

DLP-5 User Access and Password Security Levels
Introduction
This procedure details the steps for adding and removing user profiles and for assigning password security
levels in the ATLAS.
All menus in the ATLAS are protected by passwords of varying security levels. The ATLAS System
Administrator controls which users can access (to view or change) menus. In addition, the System
Administrator can assign multiple passwords for the same access level. This way, users with the same
access privileges can have individual passwords.

Tools and Materials Required
VT100 terminal or PC with VT100 terminal emulation software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Modifying User Access and Passwords
Connecting to the ATLAS

If you are not already connected to the ATLAS, follow the procedure in DLP-1, Connecting the Terminal
or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port.
If the ATLAS is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a PC connected
to the network to Telnet into the unit. Use the procedures in DLP-3, Setting IP Parameters for the
ATLAS 800 Series System, on page 322 to connect to the 10/100 BASET interface.
1. Login to the unit using the read-write password (see DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on
page 319 for details).
2. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, select ACCESS PASSWORDS, and press .

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

327

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Adding a New User Profile and Password

1. Select the first column (0) and press I (for insert).
2. To give the new user profile a name, select the LABEL field, press , and type the user-defined
name.
3. To personalize the password for that LABEL, select the PASSWORD field, press , and type the
new password.
Passwords for the ATLAS system are case sensitive. The default password for a new user
profile is “password.” The current password displays as a series of asterisks (********).
Setting the Password Security Level

1. Review the six different password security levels and determine which level you want to set (see the
following chart).
If you want the user to have...

Select level...

Minimum rights: Read-only permission for all menu items

5

Read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands

4

Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, authentication methods,
and interface configurations

3

Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, and authentication
methods

2

Access to all commands except passwords

1

Maximum rights: Permission to edit every menu item, including creating and
editing passwords

0

2. Select the ACCESS RIGHTS field and choose the appropriate level.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

328

DLP-6 Updating ATLAS Firmware using TFTP
Introduction
The ATLAS 800 Series supports firmware updates via the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port using either TFTP
from a network server or the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM. This DLP provides the steps to
follow for a successful firmware upgrade using the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

A PC with a Telnet client software
A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the
ADTRAN Utilities software.)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

TFTP Instructions for Updating Firmware
1. Connect to the ATLAS using the 10/100 BASET interface. (If you are not already connected to the
unit’s ETHERNET port using Telnet client software, use the procedure in DLP-4, Verifying
Communications Over an IP LAN, on page 324 to connect to the unit.)
2. Login to the unit using the read-write password (see DLP-5, User Access and Password Security
Levels, on page 327 for details).
3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press .
4. Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press . Select the appropriate module slot to update.
Select SLOT 0 to update the System Controller.
5. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select TFTP.
6. Enter the IP address of the network TFTP server into the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS field.
7. Enter the full path name and filename of the update file into the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

329

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

8. From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu, select the time for the module to perform a restart after
completing the update process:
•
•

RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is
complete.
RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system will restart.
If you select this option, a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below the current
field. To use that option, enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter
the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 09-30-2000).

9. View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware update or any errors
encountered during the download process. Refer to the table in step 10 for a detailed description of
messages found in this field.
10. Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process. Enter Y to confirm the transfer and to set
up the module to receive the TFTP Upload.
During the TFTP upload process, various status messages display in CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to
indicate progress. Table 1 describes these messages.
Table 1. Status Messages for TFTP Upload Process
Message

Description

Contacting Server

Indicates communication with the TFTP network server is trying to be
established with the specified server address in the TFTP SERVER IP
ADDRESS field.

Beginning TFTP Transfer

Indicates communication with the TFTP network server has been
established and the update file is being transferred between the ATLAS 800
Series and the TFTP network server.

Completed

Indicates the ATLAS 800 Series successfully received the update file.

Error: File Not Found

Indicates the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file
name or path in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field.

Error: Access Violation

Indicates the TFTP network server denied the ATLAS 800 Series access to
the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are
selected for the specified path.

11. When the update process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE STATUS
field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field.
Depending on your selection in step 8 on page 330, the ATLAS will either restart immediately and
resume operation, or will restart at the specified time and day of the week.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

330

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

331

DLP-7 Updating ATLAS Firmware using XMODEM
Introduction
The ATLAS supports firmware updates via the ETHERNET port using either TFTP from a network server or
the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM. This procedure outlines the steps for a successful
firmware upgrade using the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces and XMODEM software.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

VT100 terminal or PC with VT100 terminal emulation software
XMODEM software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

XMODEM Instructions for Updating Firmware
1. Connect to the ATLAS using the DB-9 ADMIN or CRAFT interface, or the RJ-45 ADMIN port.
If you are not already connected to the unit’s ADMIN or CRAFT interface (either with a
VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), follow the procedure in
DLP-1, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port. Connecting to the ADMIN or
CRAFT interface limits the upgrade procedure to XMODEM Only.
2. Login to the unit using the read-write password (see DLP-5, User Access and Password Security
Levels, on page 327 for details).
3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press .
4. Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press . Select the appropriate module slot to update.
Select SLOT 0 to update the System Controller.
Selecting ALL MODULES OF A TYPE and SYS CTRL will force a controller reboot during the
update process.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

332

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

5. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select XMODEM.
6. From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu, select the time for the module to perform a restart after
completing the update process.
•
•

RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is
complete.
RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system will restart.
If you select this option, a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below the current
field. To use that option, enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter
the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 09-30-2000).

7. View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware update or any errors
encountered during the download process.
8. Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process. Enter Y to confirm the transfer and set
up the module to receive the XMODEM upload.
When the ATLAS is ready to receive the XMODEM upload, the menu screen clears and displays
Awaiting XMODEM Upload.... to Cancel. If this does not appear, please review the steps
above for possible configuration errors.
9. From the terminal emulation software, begin the XMODEM upload by using the appropriate command
sequence. This may take several minutes.
If necessary, refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help. Also, when specifying
the filename, ensure that the file transferred is the one provided by ADTRAN. Otherwise, the update
will not complete successfully.
During the upload, the ATLAS VT100 menus will be inoperable from the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces
because XMODEM data is being transferred in-band through the menu interface. You can cancel the
update at any time within the terminal emulation software. (Please consult the documentation provided
by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this.)
10. When the update process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE STATUS
field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field.
Depending on your selection in step 6, the ATLAS either restarts immediately and resumes operation
or restarts at the specified time and day of the week.
11. Alternatively, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a
PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. By using the ETHERNET port, the ATLAS may be
quickly upgraded using TFTP—provided there is a TFTP server on the local network. The ATLAS
ships with ADTRAN Utilities software, which includes a TFTP server. (See DLP-6, Updating ATLAS
Firmware using TFTP, on page 329 for more details.)

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

333

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

334

DLP-8 Saving the Current Configuration using TFTP
Introduction
The ATLAS supports configuration transfers from the unit (via the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port) to a TFTP
server located on the network. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration transfer
using the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•

A PC with a Telnet client software
A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the
ADTRAN Utilities software.)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

TFTP Instruction for Saving a Configuration
1. Connect to the ATLAS using the 10/100 BASET interface. (Telnet to the unit.)

The procedures in DLP-1 through DLP-4 must be completed prior to the Telnet login.
2. Login to the unit using the read-write password (see DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on page 319
for details).
3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; press .
4. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server
Program.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

335

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field. For
other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation.

5. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configuration
file saved to the remote server.
Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the
server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 format
filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters).
6. Select the SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY menu field and press . Enter Y to confirm the request.
7. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current transfer.
8. When the transfer process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER
STATUS field and TFTP DOWNLOAD COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS field.

TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access
files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target filename.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

336

DLP-9 Connecting the ATLAS to an External Modem
Introduction
The ATLAS can be accessed and managed via a modem, allowing the same capabilities to the user as if
connected to the local ADMIN port.
ATLAS 830

Access is provided by a female DB-9 connector, labeled ADMIN, located on the back of the unit .
ATLAS 890

Access is provided by an RJ-45 ADMIN port on the System Controller card.

Prerequisite Procedures
The ATLAS should be mounted in its permanent location before connecting to an external modem.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•
•

Modem
Null Modem, Full Handshake Cable
Female RJ-45 to Male DB-25 Connector (shipped with ATLAS 890 unit)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Instructions for Connecting to an External Modem
1. Mount the modem in its permanent position.
2. Connect power to the modem using manufacturer instructions.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

337

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

3. Configure the modem as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

9600 baud rate
8 data bits
No parity
1 stop bit
Flow control - Hardware
Auto Answer - On
DTR - Idle (when Off/normal on the modem with ATLAS in dial mode)
The unit may be left in direct mode with DTR set to IGNORE; however, automatic disconnect
on logoff and authentication failure will be lost.

4. ATLAS 830
Connect the male DB-9 connector of the data cable to the female DB-9 connector, labeled ADMIN,
located on the back of the unit.
ATLAS 890
Connect the male RJ-45 connector of the data cable to the female RJ-45 connector, labeled ADMIN,
located on the back of the unit in the middle of the SYSTEM CONTROLLER module.
5. Route the data cable to the modem.
6. ATLAS 830
Connect the other end of the cable to the DB-9 end of the connector (DB-9 to male DB-25). Then,
connect the DB-25 end of the connector to the modem, configured as described above.
ATLAS 890
Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 end of the connector (RJ-45 to male DB-25). Then,
connect the DB-25 end of the connector to the modem, configured as described above.
7. Connect the modem to the POTS line as required by the manufacturer.
8. Login to the ATLAS system. (Refer to DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on page 319 for
detailed instructions.)
9. From the MAIN MENU, select the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter the
right-pane menus.
10. From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, select the ADMIN PORT menu and press . Once in the ADMIN
PORT menus, press the right arrow key to enter the right-pane menus.

The ADMIN port may be configured via Telnet or the CRAFT port.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

338

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

11. From the CRAFT [Chain] PORT menus, select the PORT TYPE menu and select DIAL.
If you are connected to the ATLAS using the ADMIN interface, changing the PORT
TYPE mode to DIAL will terminate your session. You MUST have Ethernet access to
the ATLAS to change the PORT TYPE back to DIRECT and restore your terminal
session.

To complete the connection to the unit, the ATLAS must now be called from a PC that is
configured to emulate a VT100 terminal, with communication software set as in step 3 and
configured for dial mode.

Follow-Up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

339

DLP-10 Using the Event Log (Syslog)
Introduction
The ATLAS Event Log is used to log various message types at settable threshold levels. The Event Log is
a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard (or call connection) activities including the viewing of digits
received, digits transferred, and ISDN Messages. The Event Log can maintain the most recent 350 lines of
data in a first in/first out buffer. To ensure that important data is not lost, save the Event Log messages to an
external Syslog server. The ATLAS ships with an ADTRAN-provided Syslog server.

Prerequisite Procedures
This procedure assumes that the ATLAS unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up.

Tools and Materials Required
Syslog Server (provided on the ATLAS System CD in ADTRAN Utilities)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Instructions for Using Syslog
Set Up the ATLAS

1. Login to the system with maximum rights (details for login in are in DLP-5, User Access and
Password Security Levels, on page 327). Once you have logged in to the ATLAS 800 Series, go to
SYSTEM CONFIG/ SYSLOG SETUP. Set the options as follows:
•
•
•
•

TRANSMISSION: Enabled
HOST IP ADDRESS: Enter the IP address of the PC where the Syslog host resides
HOST FACILITY: Specify the facility destination of log events
OPTIONS:LOCAL0 to LOCAL7

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

340

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Review the Syslog Host

1. On your PC, go to START/PROGRAMS/ADTRAN UTILITIES/SYSLOG. (The Syslog program must be
open on your PC to record ATLAS information.)

•
•

•

When the Syslog window opens, you will see LOCAL0 through LOCAL7 listed on the left. The
selected buttons should correspond with the HOST FACILITY specified in the ATLAS.
The Syslog files can be viewed through the Syslog window or by using the ADTRAN Utilities
folder, LOCALX.TXT, where X equals 0 through 7. Alternatively, you can view the LOCALX.TXT file
by clicking on EDIT LOG.
Any event logged in the ATLAS Event Log (SYSTEM STATUS/EVENT LOG) should also appear in
the Syslog.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

341

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Review Additional Syslog Features

1. The MONITOR feature allows all Syslog messages to be pre-filtered by SYSTEM NAME, SOURCE,
SLOT, and PORT before displaying these messages to the user and logging the message to the
predesignated monitor log file. Various filter options may be defined by selecting SOURCE.
•

The following figure shows the SOURCE FILTER window. When the MONITOR button is selected,
the file will be logged to LOCAL8.TXT.

•

•
•

To look at the text file, click on the EDIT LOG button on the left side of the Syslog screen.
Only source options selected with an ‘X’ will be displayed in the Syslog file. In this example, all
options will be displayed.

2. Under the LOG FILES menu option, the user may erase log files, define Red events, set priorities, and
clear Red events.
•
•
•

The ERASE LOG FILES option will erase the specified text log file.
DEFINE RED EVENTS allows the user to predefine a message priority condition so that if the
condition occurs, the file is highlighted in red.
In the following figure, any CRITICAL or MAJOR conditions will cause any LOCAL0 through
LOCAL7 facility to become highlighted in red if it receives a critical or major alarm.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

342

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

3. The PROPERTIES menu allows the user to specify the types of messages to be logged to an ASCII text
file. Mark the lowest priority Event Log message you want to log to the Syslog server text file. For
example, the figure below shows that all messages will be logged to the text file.

4. The HELP menu also explains these features. Click on HELP/CONTENTS/SYSLOG HOST DAEMON for
further explanation of Syslog features.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

343

DLP-11 Connecting the Alarm Contacts
Introduction
This DLP explains how to connect the alarm contacts for the ATLAS.

Prerequisite Procedures
Before making alarm connections, the unit should be mounted in its permanent location.

Tools and Materials Required
•
•
•

Wire strippers
Small, straight slot screwdriver
22 or 24 AWG 2-conductor twisted pair cross-connect wire

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Instructions for Connecting Alarm Contacts
1. Determine whether the external alarm reporting device uses normally open (NO) or normally closed
(NC) relay contacts to sense an alarm condition. (Table 1 on page 345 shows the ATLAS alarm relay
pinout.)
2. Figure 1 on page 345 and Figure 2 on page 346 show enlarged drawings of the alarm relay connectors.
3. Using standard Telco cross-connect wire or equivalent, determine and cut the length required to reach
from the alarm header to the alarm-reporting device(s).
4. Using wire strippers, strip ¼-inch from both ends of each wire.
5. Remove the alarm relay (4 pin) terminal block by gently prying it loose.
6. Using the small, straight slot screwdriver, loosen the screws in the terminal block.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

344

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

7. Insert one strand into the COM connection from the ATLAS and tighten the screw.
8. Insert another strand into either the NC or NO connections and tighten the screw. A chassis ground
connection is also provided.
9. Replace the terminal block.
Table 1. ATLAS Alarm Relay Connector Pinout
Pin

Name

Description

1

Normally Closed (NC)

Opens when a selected alarm condition is present.

2

Normally Open (NO)

Closes when a selected alarm condition is present.

3

Common (COM)

Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO terminal.

4

Chassis Ground (GND)

Alarm Relay
Connector

Slot 1

Slot 5

Slot 2

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 7

Slot 4

Slot 8

Figure 1. ATLAS 830 Rear View

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

345

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

ALARM
NC

Alarm Relay
Connector

NO
COM

INPUT

External Input
Connector

VOUT

EXT
INPUT

Figure 2. ATLAS 890 Rear View

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.
To connect the ATLAS 890 External Input Connector, see DLP-12, Connecting to the
ATLAS 890 External Input, on page 347.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

346

DLP-12 Connecting to the ATLAS 890 External Input
Introduction
This DLP explains how to connect other equipment to the external input on the ATLAS 890. The external
input connector can sense a relay closure or the presence of -48 VDC.

Prerequisite Procedures
Before making this connection, the unit should be mounted in its permanent location.

Tools and Materials Required
• Wire strippers
• Small, straight slot screwdriver
• 22 or 24 AWG 2-conductor twisted pair cross connect wire

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

Connecting the External Input
1. To sense the relay closure, connect VOUT (-48VDC limited to 1 mA) to the COM of the relay to be
monitored (see Figure 3 on page 348). Connect INPUT to the normally open (NO) contact of the
device to detect when the relay is energized or the normally closed (NC) to detect when the relay is
de-energized (see Table 2).
2. To sense the presence of -48 VDC, connect INPUT to the source to be sensed.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

347

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

ALARM
NC
NO

Alarm Relay
Connector

COM

INPUT

External Input
Connector

VOUT

EXT
INPUT

Figure 3. ATLAS 890 Rear View

Instructions
1. Using standard Telco cross-connect wire or equivalent, determine and cut the length required to reach
from the external input header to the equipment to be sensed.
2. Using wire strippers, strip ¼-inch from both ends of each wire.
3. Remove the external input (3 pin) terminal block by gently prying it loose.
4. Using the small, straight slot screwdriver, loosen the screws in the terminal block.
5. Insert the wires in the terminal block as determined in steps 1 and 2, and tighten the screws. (A chassis
ground connection is also provided.)
6. Replace the terminal block.
Table 2. External Input Connector Pinout
Pin

Name

Description

1

Alarm Out

Outputs EIA-232 level signal for connection to external alarm contacts.

2

Alarm In

Monitors signal coming from external alarm contacts.

3

Chassis Ground

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

348

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

349

DLP-13 Using the Alarm Connections and ACO Button
Introduction
The alarm connections alert the user when a selected alarm condition exists. The alarm may be cleared by
pressing the Alarm Cut-Off (ACO) switch located on the front panel of the ATLAS. This procedure details
the steps which must be performed to use the ATLAS alarm connections and ACO switch.
This procedure should be performed at installation on each ATLAS shelf that is wired out to external office
alarm equipment.

Prerequisite Procedures
Before beginning this procedure, the ATLAS should be mounted in its permanent location and the alarm
contacts should be connected (see DLP-11, Connecting the Alarm Contacts, on page 344).

Tools and Materials Required
•

VT100 terminal or PC with VT100 terminal emulation software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules,
wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place
modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on
modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

350

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Connect to the ATLAS

1. If you are not already connected to the unit’s ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces (either with a VT100
compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), use the procedure in DLP-1,
Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port to connect to the ADMIN or CRAFT
interface.
Alternatively, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a
PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. Use the procedures in DLP-4, Verifying
Communications Over an IP LAN to connect to the 10/100 BASET interface.
2. Logon to the unit using the read-write password (see DLP-2, System Login and Menu Access, on
page 319 for details).
Configure the Alarm Relay

1. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.
2. Select the ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD menu and choose the appropriate threshold level.
The ALARM RELAY will set for this threshold and all other alarms of greater importance. Refer to the
section called System Event Log in this system manual for a listing of all alarms and levels of
importance.
Setting the threshold to Normal will not set the Alarm Relay for Normal events. No Normal
events will set the Alarm Relay.

Clearing the Alarm Relay Remotely

1. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.
2. Select the ALARM RELAY RESET field and press .

Locally clear the ALARM RELAY by pressing the ACO switch.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

351

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual

Configuring the ATLAS 890 Alarm Monitor

Complete the following steps only if you wish to monitor for external alarms.

1. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus. Then,
select the EVENT LOGGING menu and press . Once in the EVENT LOGGING menu, press the
right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.
2. From the EVENT LOGGING menu, select the EXTERNAL INPUT menu and set it to the same value as the
ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD. Any event on the ALARM MONITOR will now be logged in the EVENT
LOG and set the ALARM RELAY.

Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with
the tasks indicated there.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

352

SECTION 6

SYSTEM EVENT LOG
Explains System Event Log messages and describes configuration of the Event
Log.

You can log various message types at settable threshold levels in the ATLAS 800 Series Event Log. This
section describes the entries that may be logged by the system Event Log. The Event Log CATEGORY
threshold is particularly important – this is the minimum severity level that an event must have associated
with it in order that the event be logged.

Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels. If too many
sources have their CATEGORY values set too low, the number of messages being logged in
a given period can be very large. If too many messages are being logged too rapidly,
system performance can be adversely affected.

The Event Log is a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard (or call connection) activities including the
viewing of digits received, digits transferred, and ISDN Messages. Since most of the events viewed in the
following tables are used primarily during troubleshooting, they should be turned off in normal operation.

Table of Contents
Setting the Event Log Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Viewing the Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
System Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
ISDN Cause Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cause Code Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

List of Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.

System Controller Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Switchboard Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Nx 56/64 Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
T1 Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Ethernet Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
ISDN Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Circuit Backup Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
DP Outgoing Signaling Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
ISDN Cause Code Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
ISDN L2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
ISDN Call Control Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Source: ISDN Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

353

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

1.

Setting the Event Log Category

SETTING THE EVENT LOG CATEGORY

The following steps outline the procedure for setting up the event CATEGORY thresholds for the Event
Log.
1. From the MAIN MENU, go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter the
right-pane menus.

Untitled Screenshot

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

354

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

Setting the Event Log Category

2. Select the EVENT LOGGING field and press . Once in the EVENT LOGGING menus, press
the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.

Untitled Screenshot

3. Refer to the tables in this section to determine the desired CATEGORY thresholds.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

355

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

Setting the Event Log Category

4. To change the CATEGORY, select the appropriate field and press . This will provide a list
of available options. Highlight the desired threshold and press  to select it.

Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels. If too many
sources have their CATEGORY values set too low, the number of messages being logged in
a given period can be very large. If too many messages are being logged too rapidly,
system performance can be adversely affected.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

356

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

2.

Viewing the Events

VIEWING THE EVENTS

The following steps outline the procedure for viewing EVENT LOG messages.
1. From the MAIN MENU, go to the SYSTEM STATUS menu and press the right arrow key to enter the
right-pane menus.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

357

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

Viewing the Events

2. Select the EVENT LOG field and press . Once in the EVENT LOG, press the right arrow key
to access the actual messages.

The EVENT LOG messages are stored in a first-in/first-out table. Therefore, the most recent
log entry is found at the top of the log.

EVENT LOG messages may be sent to an external Syslog server for storage. Refer to
DLP-10, Using the Event Log (Syslog), for more details.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

358

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

3.

System Events

SYSTEM EVENTS

Table 1 through Table 8 provide listings of ATLAS system events, including tables of events for each
category, according to the order they appear in the EVENT LOG setup screen.
Table 1. System Controller Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

AC Power Supply has Recovered

CRITICAL

AC power supply is functioning normal again

AC Power Supply has Failed

CRITICAL

AC power supply is not operating properly

AC Power Supply has Exceeded
Temperature Limit

CRITICAL

Internal system temperature has exceeded
safe operating limit

AC Power Supply is Under Temperature
Limit

CRITICAL

Internal temperature has cooled to safe
operating limit

DC Power Supply has Recovered

CRITICAL

DC power supply is functioning normally
again

DC Power Supply has Failed

CRITICAL

DC power supply is not operating properly

DC Power Supply has Exceeded
Temperature Limit

CRITICAL

Internal system temperature has exceeded
safe operating limit

DC Power Supply is Under Temperature
Limit

CRITICAL

Internal temperature has cooled to safe
operating limit

Firmware invalid

CRITICAL

Corrupted firmware

Firmware update failed

CRITICAL

Flash download failed

System Configuration Uploaded

CRITICAL

ATLAS configuration file loaded into the
system and activated

Module Not Responding

WARNING

Module removed or not responding

ACO Switch pressed

MINOR

ACO switch pressed

Login Failure

MINOR

Console login failure 1

Timing source changed to Internal

MINOR

Neither the primary nor the backup are valid

Timing source changed to Backup

MINOR

The primary source is invalid; backup
source valid and selected.

Timing source changed to Primary

MINOR

The timing source changed to primary

Not responding to programming

MINOR

Unable to program module

Cold

NORMAL

System cold start 2

Firmware update completed

INFO

Flash download successful

Module Found

INFO

Module found

SNMP Authentication Failure

INFO

SNMP authentication failure 3

1

Three consecutive logins were attempted and failed.

2

Generated five seconds after the completion of system initialization.

3

Generated if the ATLAS receives an SNMP request from an SNMP manager defined in the ATLAS SNMP communities
list but with a community name that does not match the community name defined in the SNMP communities list.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

359

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

System Events

Table 2. Switchboard Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

 rejected: No such number

WARNING

Call rejected 1

 rejected: Outgoing reject list

NORMAL

Call rejected 2

 rejected: Busy

NORMAL

Call rejected 3

 accepted:  

NORMAL

Call successfully routed

1

No such number in dial plan.

2

Number is on outgoing reject list.

3

All endpoints busy.

Table 3. Nx 56/64 Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

Nx 56/64 511 Test Pattern Active

WARNING

511 Test Pattern Activated

Nx 56/64 511 Test Pattern Cleared

WARNING

511 Test Pattern Deactivated

Nx 56/64 Bilateral Loopback Active

WARNING

Bilateral Loopback Activated

Nx 56/64 Bilateral Loopback Cleared

WARNING

Bilateral Loopback Deactivated

Nx 56/64 Excessive Zeros Alarm

WARNING

Excessive Zeros from DTE

Nx 56/64 Excessive Zeros Alarm Cleared

WARNING

Excessive Zeros condition cleared

Nx 56/64 Clock Slip Alarm Active

MAJOR

Clock Slip Alarm Active

Nx 56/64 Clock Slip Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Clock Slip Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 External Clock Alarm Active

MAJOR

External Clock Alarm

Nx 56/64 External Clock Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

External Clock Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 PLL Alarm Active

MAJOR

PLL Alarm Active

Nx 56/64 PLL Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

PLL Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 CTS Asserted

INFO

CTS Asserted

Nx 56/64 CTS Dropped

INFO

CTS Dropped

Nx 56/64 DCD Asserted

INFO

DCD Asserted

Nx 56/64 DCD Dropped

INFO

DCD Dropped

Nx 56/64 DTR Asserted

INFO

DTR Asserted

Nx 56/64 DTR Dropped

INFO

DTR Dropped

Nx 56/64 RTS Asserted

INFO

RTS Asserted

Nx 56/64 RTS Dropped

INFO

RTS Dropped

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

360

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

System Events

Table 4. T1 Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

T1 Curr CSS Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Controlled Slip Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr ES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr LCV Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Line Code Violations Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr LES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Line Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr PCV Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Path Code Violations Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr SEFS Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Threshold
Exceeded

T1 Curr SES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Severely Errored Seconds Threshold
Exceeded

T1 Curr UAS Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Current T1 Unavailable Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Line Loopback Active

WARNING

Line Loopback Active

T1 Loopback Cleared

WARNING

Loopback Cleared

T1 Payload Loopback Active

WARNING

Payload Loopback Active

T1 Total CSS Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Controlled Slip Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total ES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total LCV Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Line Code Violations Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total LES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Line Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total PCV Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Path Code Violations Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total SEFS Thrs Exceeded WARNING

Total T1 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Threshold
Exceeded

T1 Total SES Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Severely Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total UAS Thrs Exceeded

WARNING

Total T1 Unavailable Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Blue Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Blue Alarm Cleared

T1 Blue Alarm Active

MAJOR

Blue Alarm Set

T1 D Channel Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

D Channel Alarm Cleared

T1 D Channel Alarm Active

MAJOR

D Channel Alarm Set

T1 LOS Cleared

MAJOR

LOS Alarm Cleared

T1 LOS Active

MAJOR

LOS Alarm Set

T1 Red Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Red Alarm Cleared

T1 Red Alarm Active

MAJOR

Red Alarm Set

T1 Tx Blue Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Tx Blue Alarm Cleared

T1 Tx Blue Alarm Active

MAJOR

Tx Blue Alarm Set

T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared

T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Active

MAJOR

Tx Yellow Alarm Set

T1 Yellow Alarm Cleared

MAJOR

Yellow Alarm Cleared

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

361

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

System Events

Table 4. T1 Events (Continued)
Console Log String
T1 Yellow Alarm Active

Category
MAJOR

Event
Yellow Alarm Set

Table 5. Ethernet Events
Console Log String

Category

Out of memory

CRITICAL

Event
Not enough memory for Ethernet driver

Table 6. ISDN Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

BRI configuration failed: No ISDN resources
are available

CRITICAL

No BRI resources available

PRI configuration failed: No ISDN resources
are available

CRITICAL

No PRI resources available

No SPID matches the call profile:  

WARNING

No Matching SPID found

No SPID with free B channels matches call
type: 

WARNING

No Matching SPID found

LT: Tried to call unregistered SPID 

WARNING

SPID Unregistration attempted

D channel is DOWN

MAJOR

D Channel Down

 : Incorrectly formatted cause IE

MAJOR

Incorrectly formatted IE

BRI NT: SPID  was rejected

MAJOR

SPID Failed

BRI NT: SPID Negotiations failed - resetting
the link

MAJOR

SPID Negotiation failed

BRI LT: SPID  received - NOT IN LIST MAJOR

Unknown SPID received

BRI NT: SPID Negotiations failed - Retrying

MINOR

SPID Retry in progress

Configured BRI as LT

NORMAL

BRI LT configuration successful

Configured BRI as NT

NORMAL

BRI NT configuration successful

Rejected an incoming call for an
unregistered SPID

NORMAL

Call Rejected

D channel is UP

NORMAL

D Channel Up

Released: No longer an ISDN line

NORMAL

ISDN line released

No outgoing B channel available for call to


NORMAL

No B channels for call

Configured PRI as central office emulator

NORMAL

PRI CO configuration successful

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

362

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

System Events

Table 6. ISDN Events (Continued)
Console Log String

Category

Event

Configured PRI as CPE

NORMAL

PRI CPE configuration successful

BRI NT: Spid  registered

NORMAL

SPID registered

BRI LT: All SPIDs registered

NORMAL

SPID Registration complete

BRI NT: All SPIDs registered

NORMAL

SPID Registration complete

BRI LT: Registering SPID 

NORMAL

SPID Registration in progress

BRI NT Registering SPID 

NORMAL

SPID Registration in progress

Call to  declared busy after
leaving ATLAS

INFO

Call busy

Call to  refused: Busy

INFO

Call busy

Call to  cleared from ATLAS
end

INFO

Call cleared

Call to  connected

INFO

Call connected

Call to  disconnected by far
end

INFO

Call disconnected

Call not accepted to  : No
channel available

INFO

Call not accepted

Call to ATLAS:  received

INFO

Call received

Call to  ringing

INFO

Call ringing

Dialing 

INFO

Dialing number

Incoming call to  accepted

INFO

Incoming call accepted

Incoming call to  refused

INFO

Incoming call refused

Table 7. Circuit Backup Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

Circuit Backup Attempt Failed

MAJOR

Outgoing backup call was unsuccessful

Circuit Backup Test Call Failed

MAJOR

Outgoing backup test call was
unsuccessful

Attempting Circuit Backup

MINOR

Circuit Backup call attempted to restore
data circuit

Circuit Backup Active

MINOR

Port is currently in backup

Circuit Backup Deactivated, Primary
Restored

MINOR

Port was in backup, but primary data
function was restored

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

363

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

ISDN Cause Codes

Table 7. Circuit Backup Events (Continued)
Console Log String

Category

Event

Circuit Backup Data Alarm Active

MINOR

Inband keep alive messages were
disrupted or corrupted

Circuit Backup Data Alarm Cleared

MINOR

Inband keep alive messages are
functioning properly

Circuit Backup Test Call Originated

INFO

Circuit Backup test call was attempted by
the unit

Circuit Backup Test Call Connected

INFO

Circuit Backup test call was successfully
connected to backup site

Circuit Backup Test Call Passed

INFO

Circuit Backup test call was successfully
maintained for test period

Table 8. DP Outgoing Signaling Events
Console Log String

Category

Event

TX Set Rx ABCD < > Tx ABCD < > 1

INFO

ATLAS changed signal bits on port

RX Change Rx ABCD < > Tx ABCD < >

INFO

Equipment connected to port changed
signal bits

1

4.

The ATLAS 800 Series uses only AB signaling bits. The CD signaling bits are a copy of the AB values. These values
are shown in hexadecimal notation. For example, if AB signal bits are 01, then the total signal bits would be 01 01.
Putting that in hexadecimal notation results in an event of Tx set Rx ABCD 0x 05.

ISDN CAUSE CODES

In addition to the above events, certain recognized ISDN cause codes are sent to the Event Log from the
ISDN message facility during ISDN EVENTS, L2 MESSAGES, and L2 FORMATTED event categories.
Table 9 lists the codes applicable to the ATLAS 800 Series and the minimum category required for logging
the cause code event.
Table 9. ISDN Cause Code Events
Cause Code Event

Category

Code

ACCESS_INFO_DISCARDED

WARNING

43

BAD_INFO_ELEM

MAJOR

99

BEAR_CAP_NOT_AVAIL

MINOR

58

CALL_REJECTED

INFO

21

CAP_NOT_IMPLEMENTED

MINOR

65

CHAN_NOT_IMPLEMENTED

MINOR

66

CHANNEL_UNACCEPTABLE

INFO

6

DEST_OUT_OF_ORDER

INFO

27

FACILITY_NOT_IMPLEMENTED

MAJOR

69

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

364

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

ISDN Cause Codes

Table 9. ISDN Cause Code Events (Continued)
Cause Code Event

Category

Code

FACILITY_NOT_SUBSCRIBED

MINOR

50

FACILITY_REJECTED

INFO

29

INCOMING_CALL_BARRED

MINOR

54

INCOMPATIBLE_DEST

MAJOR

88

INTERWORKING_UNSPEC

WARNING

127

INVALID_CALL_REF

MAJOR

81

INVALID_ELEM_CONTENTS

MAJOR

100

INVALID_MSG_UNSPEC

MAJOR

95

INVALID_NUMBER_FORMAT

INFO

28

MANDATORY_IE_LEN_ERR

MAJOR

103

MANDATORY_IE_MISSING

MAJOR

96

NETWORK_CONGESTION

WARNING

42

NETWORK_OUT_OF_ORDER

WARNING

38

NO_CIRCUIT_AVAILABLE

WARNING

34

NO_ROUTE

INFO

2

NO_USER_RESPONDING

INFO

18

NONEXISTENT_MSG

MAJOR

97

NORMAL_CLEARING

INFO

16

NUMBER_CHANGED

INFO

22

OUTGOING_CALL_BARRED

MINOR

52

PRE_EMPTED

WARNING

45

PROTOCOL_ERROR

MAJOR

111

REQ_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAIL

WARNING

44

RESP_TO_STAT_ENQ

INFO

30

SERVICE_NOT_AVAIL

MINOR

63

TEMPORARY_FAILURE

WARNING

41

TIMER_EXPIRY

MAJOR

102

UNASSIGNED_NUMBER

INFO

1

UNSPECIFIED_CAUSE

INFO

31

USER_BUSY

INFO

17

WRONG_MESSAGE

INFO

98

WRONG_MSG_FOR_STATE

MAJOR

101

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

365

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
System Event Log

5.

Cause Code Log Entries

CAUSE CODE LOG ENTRIES

Cause Code IEs that are non-Q.931 (i.e., the Coding Standard field is not 0) are logged with the following
format:
 :  code 
The coding standard field is one of the following: Reserved, National, or Local. Each Cause Code IE log
entry ends with a location designation. Table 10 shows these designations. Table 11 through Table 13
provide listings of system events.
Table 10. Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations
Code

Location

IN0TL

International network

INWK

Network beyond internetworking point

LN

Public network serving the local user

LPN

Private network serving the local user

RLN

Public network serving the remote user

RPN

Private network serving the remote user

TN

Transit network

U

User
Table 11. ISDN L2 Messages
Console Log String

Category


1

INFO

Event
ISDN Layer 2 (LAPD) Message1

Provides a hex dump of the entire LAPD frame.

Table 12. ISDN Call Control Messages
Console Log String

Category

Event

Host > > CC   

INFO

ISDN Call Control Messages

CC > > Host   

INFO

ISDN Call Control Messages

Table 13. Source: ISDN Information Elements
Console Log String

1

Category
INFO

Event
ISDN Information Element1

Provides a hex dump of the ISDN IE sent with a call control message.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

366

SECTION 7

ADTRAN UTILITIES
Provides instructions for configuring and using the ADTRAN utilities (Telnet,
VT100, Syslog, and TFTP).

ADTRAN delivers several PC software utilities along with the ATLAS 800 Series. These utilities are
located on the CD-ROM that came with your shipment. They also include MIB files (located in the MIB
directory).

Review the readme file (Readme.txt) for the latest information about the utilities.

The utilities make it easier to interface with the terminal menu and transfer configuration files to and from
TFTP servers. The utilities all run on Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher. The following sections describe
the Syslog, Telnet, VT100, and TFTP Server utilities.

Table of Contents
Telnet Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Session Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Capture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
VT100 Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Session Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Capture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Print Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

List of Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.

Telnet Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VT100 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TFTP Server Interface Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TFTP Server Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

369
373
375
375

367

1.

TELNET UTILITY

The Telnet utility delivered with the ATLAS 800 Series provides enhancements to standard Telnet
programs making it easier to work with.
Access the Telnet program remotely through the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. For a detailed description of
how to work with the Telnet program, refer to Navigating the Terminal Menus on page 68. If you need help
setting up the ATLAS 800 Series for a Telnet session, refer to Connecting the Terminal or PC to the
ADMIN or CRAFT Port on page 317.
The Telnet menus include SESSION, EDIT, OPTIONS, CAPTURE, and HELP (see the menu tree in Figure 1).

Session

Telnet

Connect
Disconnect
Transfer Cfg
Exit

Edit

Copy
Paste

Options

Colors
Local Echo
Auto Repeat
File

Capture

Buffer Size
Save Buffer As
Screen Capture

Help

Contents
IP Status
About

Host Name
Port
Edit Entry
Add New
Delete
Connect

Background
Bold
Text

Start Cfg Capture
Stop Cfg Capture

Figure 1. Telnet Menu Tree

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

368

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

Telnet Utility
Session Menu

Session Menu
Click on SESSION to open the Telnet session.
Connect

Opens dialog box for
setting HOST NAME and
PORT parameters for a
Telnet session. Also lets
you EDIT ENTRY, ADD
NEW entry, and DELETE
stored entries. When the parameters are set, click CONNECT to make the
connection. Click CANCEL to end the session.

Submenu

Description

Host Name

Accepts and stores host names. You may either enter a descriptive name, an IP
address, or a domain name directly from this field. Click on the drop-down
arrow to display a complete list of previously stored host names.

Port

Provides several port options. You may enter port numbers directly into this
field to connect to non-standard ports or select the drop-down combo-box to
display the following options:
Telnet

establishes a Telnet session

Echo

provides a loopback for troubleshooting

Discard

bit bucket; discards data

Daytime

returns the time

Chargen

displays as a unique character stream; used for self-tests

Edit Entry

Changes either the unit name or the IP
address of each host. Press either Tab,
Return, or a period (.) after each
number in the IP address to move to
the next field. If you press Return or (.)
while the cursor is located in each IP
field, the next field is cleared and the
cursor advanced into it.

Add New

Prompts you for the same information as the EDIT ENTRY dialog box for new
host. When enabled, the USE DNS (Domain Name Server) feature allows users
to request DOMAIN LOOK UP via a DNS server on the network, rather than
specifying an IP address. The name then appears in the HOST NAME field.

Delete

Removes a host name from the list; simply select the host name you want to
remove, and, at the prompt, click DELETE.

Connect

Establishes the Telnet session.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

369

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

Telnet Utility
Edit Menu

Disconnect

Terminates the Telnet session.
To re-establish the session, select CONNECT from SESSION MENU or press
ENTER three times. This action restores the previous connection.

Transfer Cfg

This feature is used with ADTRAN products primarily for sending
configuration files to the unit.

Exit

Ends the Telnet session and closes the Telnet screen.

Edit Menu
Provides COPY and PASTE commands.

Options Menu
Provides viewing alternatives for the terminal screen.
Colors

Three options change the color of the background window (BACKGROUND),
bold highlights (BOLD), and text (TEXT).

Local Echo

Echoes each character that you enter.

Auto Repeat

Repeats characters you select from the keyboard, if you hold down the key.

Capture Menu
Provides options for capturing screen images.
Sends screen options data to a file in the format options listed below:

File
Submenu

Description

Start Cfg Capture

Used with the ADTRAN product line to start sending the scrolling screen
capture to a file storage location.

Stop Cfg Capture

Used with the ADTRAN product line to stop sending the scrolling screen
capture to a file storage location.

Buffer Size

Disables terminal window scroll bars when set to zero. (This is the normal
setting for ATLAS 800 Series.) This number represents the number of lines to
capture in the memory buffer.

Save Buffer As

Save screen capture to a file.

Screen Capture

Copies the text on the current Telnet screen to the clipboard. You can open any
word processor and paste the clipboard contents into the program. This option is
helpful when debugging.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

370

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

Telnet Utility
Help Menu

Help Menu
Provides on-line help for using the ADTRAN Utilities.
Contents

Opens the on-line help.

IP Status

Displays the local port address and the status of the connection.

About

Displays version and owner information.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

371

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

2.

VT100 Utility
Session Menu

VT100 UTILITY

Use the VT100 to configure an ATLAS 800 Series which is directly connected to a PC. The VT100 display
is almost identical to the Telnet display. For a detailed description of how to work within the terminal
menu, refer to Navigating the Terminal Menus in the User Interface Guide section of this manual. If you
need help setting up the ATLAS 800 Series for a VT100 session, refer to the Detailed Level Procedures
section of this manual. VT100 menus include SESSION, EDIT, PORT, OPTIONS, CAPTURE, and HELP (see
the menu tree in Figure 2).
Session

VT100

Connect
Disconnect
File Transfer
Exit

Edit

Copy
Paste

Port

Settings

Options

Refresh Screen
Connect
Colors
Local Echo
Auto Repeat

Capture

Help

File
Buffer Size
Save Buffer As
Screen Capture

XMODEM CRC
ASCII Cfg Files

Send Cfg File

Transmit Wakeup
Transmit Refresh
BackGround
Bold
Text
Start Cfg Capture
Stop Cfg Capture

Contents
About

Figure 2. VT100 Menu Tree

Session Menu
Opens VT100 terminal emulation session.
Connect

Opens a specified serial port for a VT100 session.

Disconnect

Closes a specified serial port at the end of a VT100 session.

File Transfer

Uploads and downloads files to and from an ATLAS 800 Series.

Submenu

Description

XMODEM CRC

Selects the XMODEM file transfer protocol.

ASCII Cfg Files

Selects ASCII transfer mode. Primarily useful for configuration transfers for the
ADTRAN products.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

372

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

VT100 Utility
Edit Menu

Edit Menu
Identical to the Telnet EDIT MENU (see Edit Menu on page 370).

Port Menu
Changes serial COM port SETTINGS. Provides data rate settings from
300—57600 bps.

Options Menu
Provides terminal screen commands.
Refresh Screen

Redraws the screen.

Connect

Provides the options TRANSMIT WAKEUP and
TRANSMIT REFRESH.

Submenu

Description

Transmit Wakeup

Provides a control sequence that puts the ATLAS 800 Series Control Port online
in terminal mode.

Transmit Refresh

Provides a control sequence to refresh the screen automatically when
connecting. (This is the default setting for the ATLAS 800 Series.)

Colors

Identical to Telnet COLORS MENU (see Colors on page 370).

Local Echo

Echoes each character that you enter.

AutoRepeat

Repeats characters you select from the keyboard if you hold down the key.

Capture Menu
Identical to the Telnet CAPTURE MENU (see Capture Menu on page 370).

Help Menu
Provides on-line help and information about the version number.
Contents

Opens on-line help.

About

Displays version and owner information.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

373

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

3.

TFTP Server
Help Menu

TFTP SERVER

The TFTP Server utility transfers ATLAS 800 Series configuration files to and from a TFTP server. You
can install this program on a PC running any version of Microsoft Windows. The configuration of an
ATLAS 800 Series can be saved offline as a backup file. The saved file may also be used to send the same
configuration to multiple ATLAS 800 Series units. Transfer configuration files using the TFTP protocol (a
TCP/IP user protocol) via the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The ATLAS 800 Series must have a valid IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required), and be connected to an Ethernet network before
proceeding. Figure 4 shows the TFTP server interface. For information on transferring and saving
configurations using TFTP, refer to the Detailed Level Procedures section of this manual.
Files must be placed in the Application directory where you installed the product. Received
files are also placed here.

Server

TFTP Server
Print Log

Help

Enable
Disable
Abort
Exit
...to Clipboard
...to Printer
Clear Log
Contents
About

Figure 3. TFTP Server Interface Menu Tree

Figure 4. TFTP Server Interface

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

374

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities

TFTP Server
Server Menu

Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) may be active at a time. The TCP/IP
parameters are not saved or overwritten as part of an ATLAS 800 Series unit’s transferred configuration to
allow sending identical configurations to multiple units. When you start this program, a port is
automatically opened.

Server Menu
Provides enable, disable, abort, and exit options.
Enable

Enables the TFTP server. The IP address displays in the Status field and Server
Ready displays in the Log field.

Disable

Disables the TFTP server. When you select this option, the message PORT
CLOSED displays in the Status field and Port Closed displays in the Log field.

Abort

Terminates a transfer that is in progress.

Exit

Terminates active transfers and closes the TFTP window.

Print Log
Provides print options.
...to Clipboard

Copies the information in the Log field to the clipboard. You can then open any
word processor and paste the information into the program for review.

...to Printer

Sends the information in the Log field to the default printer.

Clear Log

Deletes the information stored in the Log field.

Help
Provides on-line help and version information.
Contents

Opens on-line help.

About

Displays version and owner information.

TFTP Server GUI
Status Field

This field displays general information about port and transfer status. This field
is read-only. The unlabeled field in the center of the screen displays prompts
about the status of active transfers, such as bytes transferred and received.

Meter Field

The XMIT meter provides a visual record of the transfer process.

61200780L1-1C

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

375

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
ADTRAN Utilities
Log Field

61200780L1-1C

TFTP Server
Help

This field displays a record of all of the events that occur during the time the
TFTP Server is enabled. Use the scroll bar to move up and down the list. To
clear the information in this field, select CLEAR LOG from the PRINT LOG
menu. Save this information to a file before deleting it with the ...TO
CLIPBOARD command.

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

376

Index
A
ADTRAN Utilities 367
Async-232 Option Module
dial plan, user term 307
menus
Configuration 213
I/O Status 211
Info 210
Session Status 212
Signal Status 211
Test 217
overview 56
pinout, DB-25 44
shipping contents 65
ATLAS
grounding instructions 59
installing modules 62
mounting options 61
power, AC 60
power, DC 60
shipping contents 58
system overview 51
ATLAS 830
alarm relay connection 22
equipment dimensions 16
front panel description 16
LED colors, meaning of 19
LEDs 17
overview 51
pinout
alarm relay connector 22
craft port (DB-9) 17
DB-9 21
Ethernet (RJ-45) 22
T1/PRI 23
power requirements, AC 16
power requirements, DC 16
rear panel 20
specifications, at a glance 23
ATLAS 890
alarm relay connection 33
equipment dimensions 26
external input connection 33
front panel 27
LED colors, meaning of 29
LEDs 28
overview 51
pinout
admin in (RJ-48C) 32
alarm relay connection 33

61200780L1-1C

craft port (RJ-48C) 28
Ethernet (RJ-48C) 32
external input connection 33
power requirements, AC 26
power requirements, DC 26
rear panel 31
specifications, at a glance 34
System Controller Module
overview 54

C
Circuit Status menus 264
Backup Status 264
Delay 265
From 264
Line Status 265
Manual Backup 264
Test 265
customer service 10

D
Dedicated Maps menus 253
Activate Map 253
Create/Edit Maps 254
Connects Menu - Pkt Endpt 262
Connects Menu - Pkt Voice 262
E1/PRA 257
FXS-8 260
NxT1 HSSI 259
Octal BRI 258
T1/PRI 256
T3 and T3 D&I 259
USSI 258
V35Nx 258
Current Map 253
Detail Level Procedures 316
dial plan menus
global parameters 275
network term 268
see also individual module 267
user term 272
DLPs 316
Dual Video Option Module
menus
Alarm Status 161
Configuration 163
Data Rate 163
DTE Interface 166
DTE Status 162

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

377

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Index
Info 161
PLL/FIFO 163
Test 165
overview 55
pinout
EIA-530 47
RS-366, DB-25 45
RS-449 47
V.35 Winchester 46
shipping contents 65

E
Endpoints, backup
dial plan, user term 308, 310
Endpoints, packet
dial plan, user term 308

F
factory default system 101
FCC-required information 5

H
HDLC Resource Module
menus
Info 190
Status 190
overview 56
shipping contents 65

M
Modem-16 Resource Module
menus
Configuration 200
Info 192
Status 192
Modem-24 Option Module
menus 203
Modem-24 Resource Module
menus
Configuration 208
Info 203
Status 203
overview 56
shipping contents 65
modules
information chart 53
installing 62
menu descriptions 102
Alarm 103
Menu 103
Rev 104
Slt 102

61200780L1-1C

E

State 104
Status 104
Test 103
Type 103
shipping contents 63

N
Nx 56/64 BONDing Resource Module
menus 187
Configuration 188
Info 187
Status 188
overview 55
shipping contents 65
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module
dedicated map 258, 259
dial plan, user term 297
menus
HSSI/V.35 Menus 173
IMUX Menus 170
overview 55
pinout
50-pin SCSI-II and V.35 Winchester 48
RJ-48C 48
shipping contents 64

O
Octal BRI (S/T) Option Module
dedicated map 258
dial plan, user term 304
menus 137
Alarms 137
Channel Usage 138
Configuration 138
Info 137
Test 138
overview 54
pinout, RJ-45 43
shipping contents 64
Octal BRI (U) Option Module
dial plan, network term 299
dial plan, user term 302
menus 134
Alarms 134
Channel Usage 135
Configuration 135
Info 134
Performance Current 135
Test 136
overview 54
pinout, RJ-45 43
shipping contents 64

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

378

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Index

P

Octal FXS Option Module
dedicated map 260
dial plan, user term 305
menus 176
Config 179
Info 176
Status 176
Test 177
overview 55
pinout, 8-pin modular 49
shipping contents 64

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (USOC RJ-48C) 36
Quad USSI Option Module
CCITT X.21 V.11 42
DB-78 40
EIA-530 41
RS-232 42
RS-449/V.36 41
T3 D&I Option Module (BNC pair, female) 45
T3 Option Module (BNC pair, female) 44
product support 10

Q
P
Packet Manager
menus 219
Cncts Sort 235
Frame Relay IQ 235
Packet Cncts 234
Packet Endpnts 219
Packet Voice
dial plan, network term 312
dial plan, user term 314
pinout
Async-232 Option Module (DB-25) 44
ATLAS 830
admin port (DB-9) 21
alarm relay connector 22
craft port (DB-9) 17
Ethernet (RJ-45) 22
T1/PRI 23
ATLAS 890
admin in (RJ-48C) 32
alarm relay connection 33
craft port (RJ-48C) 28
Ethernet (RJ-48C) 32
external input connection 33
Dual Video Option Module
EIA-530 47
RS-366, DB-25 45
RS-449 47
V.35 Winchester 46
NxT1 HSSI/V.35 Option Module
50-pin SCSI-II and V.35 Winchester 48
RJ-48C 48
Octal BRI (S/T) Option Module (RJ-45) 43
Octal BRI (U) Option Module (RJ-45) 43
Octal FXS Option Module (8-pin modular) 49
Quad E1/PRA Option Module
DB-15 37
DB-62 37
Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
DB-78 38
V.35 Winchester 38

61200780L1-1C

Quad E1/PRA Option Module
dedicated map 257
dial plan
network term, PRA 294
user term, PRA 296
menus 112
Alarm Status 113
Configuration 116
Info 112
Performance 15Min 115
Performance 24Hr 115
Performance Current 115
Sig Status (Port 1-4) 114
Test 117
TS0 Alarms 114
TS0 Status 114
overview 54
pinout
DB-15 37
DB-62 37
shipping contents 63
Quad Nx56/64 Option Module
menus 118
Alarm Status 118
Configuration 121
Data Rate 120
Dial 123
DTE Status 119
Inband Stats 120
Info 118
PLL/FIFO 121
Test 123
overview 54
pinout
DB-78 38
V.35 Winchester 38
shipping contents 63
Quad T1/PRI Option Module
dedicated maps 256
menus 105
Alarm Status 106

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

379

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Index
Configuration 108
DS0 Alarms 107
DS0 Status 106
Info 105
Performance 15Min 108
Performance 24Hr 108
Performance Current 107
Sig Status 107
Test 109
overview 54
pinout, USOC RJ-48C 36
shipping contents 63
Quad USSI Option Module
dedicated map 258
overview 54
pinout
CCITT X.21 V.11 42
DB-78 40
EIA-530 41
RS-232 42
RS-449/V.36 41
Quad USSI Option Module System
shipping contents 64

R
Router (IP)
menus 240
ARP Cache 241
Clear 247
Global 245
Interfaces 243
OSPF Global 252
Ping 245
Routes 241
Static Routes 240
Statistics 247
Telnet Client 246
UDP Relay 251

S
safety instructions 4
security levels for using menus 73
shipping contents
ATLAS 58
System Config menu 83
Access Passwords 90
ADLP Address 83
Admin Port 85
Alarm Relay Reset 92
Alarm Relay State 92
Alarm Relay Threshold 92
Backup Timing Source 83

61200780L1-1C

R

Bonding Config 91
Craft Port 85
Ethernet Port 84
Event Logging 89
Ext. Input Alarm (ATLAS 890) 93
Ext. Input Threshold (ATLAS 890) 92
Licenses 90
Max Telnet Sessions 84
Primary Timing Source 83
Real Time Clock 90
Session Timeout 83
SNMP 86
Syslog Setup 89
System Event Log 353
System Info menu 74
Boot ROM Rev 75
Current Time/Date (24Hr) 75
Firmware Revision 74
Installed Memory 75
Serial Number 75
Startup Mode 75
System Contact 74
System Location 74
System Name 74
System Uptime 75
System Status menu 76
Admin Port 77
Clear System Event Log 77
Craft Port 78
Ethernet Port 77
Event Log 76
Redundancy (ATLAS 890) 82
Resource Usage 79
System Alarms (ATLAS 830) 78
System Alarms (ATLAS 890) 79
System Timing Source 79
Trunk Usage 81
System Utility menu 94
Alarm Relay Test (ATLAS 890) 101
ATEL Client 99
Client Status 100
Config Transfer 96
Control Switch Schedule (ATLAS 890) 100
Factory Default System 101
Force Controller Switch (ATLAS 890) 101
Ping 98
Reboot System 101
System Selftest 97
System Utilization 97
Telnet Client 100
Update Firmware 94
Update Status 95

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

380

ATLAS 800 Series System Manual
Index

T

T
T3 D&I Option Module
dedicated map 259
dial plan
network term, PRI 277
menus 150
DS1 Alarm Status 155
DS1 Configuration 158
DS1 DS0 Alarm 157
DS1 DS0 Status 156
DS1 Performance 15 Min 158
DS1 Performance 24Hr 158
DS1 Performance Current 157
DS1 Sig Status 157
DS1 Test 159
DS3 Alarm Status 152
DS3 Configuration 153
DS3 Info 151
DS3 Performance 15Min 153
DS3 Performance 24Hr 153
DS3 Performance Current 152
DS3 Test 154
Mux Configuration 151
overview 55
pinout, BNC pair, female 45
shipping contents 64
T3 Option Module
dedicated map 259
dial plan
network term, NFAST3 D&I Option Module
dial plan

network term,NFAS 283
network term, PRI 277
network term, RBST3 D&I Option Module
dial plan

network term, RBS 280

DS1 Performance Current 146
DS1 Sig Status 146
DS1 Test 148
DS3 Alarm Status 141
DS3 Configuration 142
DS3 Info 140
DS3 Performance 15Min 142
DS3 Performance 24Hr 142
DS3 Performance Current 141
DS3 Test 143
overview 55
pinout (BNC pair, female) 44
shipping contents 64
terminal menus
features 70
help 72
keyboard strokes 70, 71, 72
moving through 68, 71
security levels 73
views 68
training 10, 12

U
USSI Option Module
dial plan, user term 299
menus 125
Alarm Status 126
Configuration 129
Data Rate 127
Dial 131
DTE Interface 133
DTE Status 126
Inband Stats 128
Info 125
PLL/FIFO 129
Test 131

user term, NFAST3 D&I Option Module
dial plan

user term, NFAS 291
user term, PRIT3 D&I Option Module
dial plan

user term, PRI 287
user term, RBST3 D&I Option Module
dial plan

user term, RBS 289
menus 140
DS1 Alarm Status 144
DS1 Configuration 147
DS1 DS0 Alarm 146
DS1 DS0 Status 145
DS1 Performance 15Min 147
DS1 Performance 24Hr 147

61200780L1-1C

V
VCOM Option Module
menus 180
Config 183
Info 180
Statistics 184
Status 180
Voice Compression Resource Modules
overview 55
shipping contents 65

W
warranty 10

© 2004 ADTRAN, Inc.

381



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 381
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:62ef3883-4ee7-44f1-b526-b690a03ab1d3
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2004:08:09 09:24:54Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2004:08:09 09:24:54Z
Document ID                     : uuid:f6dd53df-a314-4b57-891c-581a1d7e769e
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : dcoulter
Title                           : 61200780L1-1C.book
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Author                          : dcoulter